This is a modern-English version of The orchestra and orchestral music, originally written by Henderson, W. J. (William James).
It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling,
and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If
you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.
Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.
The Music Lover’s Library
The Music Lover's Library

BEETHOVEN.
Beethoven.
The Orchestra
And
Orchestral Music
By
W. J. Henderson
By W. J. Henderson
Author of “What Is Good Music?” Etc.
Author of “What Is Good Music?” etc.
With Portraits
With Pictures
Charles Scribner’s Sons
New York :: :: :: 1902
Charles Scribner’s Sons
New York :: :: :: 1902
Copyright, 1899, by
Charles Scribner’s Sons
Copyright, 1899, by
Charles Scribner’s Sons
Trow Directory
Printing and Bookbinding Company
New York
Trow Directory
Printing and Bookbinding Company
New York
To the
Philharmonic Society of New York
To the
Philharmonic Society of New York
which has maintained through fifty-seven years its
existence as an orchestra devoted to the
performance of artistic music
which has continued for fifty-seven years as an orchestra dedicated to the performance of artistic music
Preface
This is not a text-book. It is not a treatise on instrumentation. It is not written for musicians, nor primarily for students of music, though the latter may find in it information of some value to them. This is simply an attempt to give to music lovers such facts about the modern orchestra as will help them in assuming an intelligent attitude toward the contemporaneous instrumental body and its performances. The author has endeavored to put before the reader a description of each instrument with an illustration which will enable him to identify its tone when next heard in the delivery of the passage quoted. Some account of the distinctive nature and functions of the strings, the wood, the brass, and the percussion instruments has been given. With this account go hand in hand some remarks on the development of methods of scoring. The reader will not find such historical matter in any other book with which the present writer is acquainted. Neither will he find anywhere else a history of the development of the conductor, which is given in this volume. The author has endeavored to make his work complete by describing the duties of the conductor and the requisites of good orchestral playing, and by recounting briefly the story of the growth of the orchestra and the development of its music. All other books on the orchestra which the author has seen are for the professional musician. In making one for the amateur of music the writer hopes to supply a need.
This This isn’t a textbook. It’s not a detailed study on instrumentation. It’s not aimed at musicians, nor primarily for music students, although the latter might find some useful information in it. This is simply an attempt to provide music lovers with facts about the modern orchestra that will help them take an informed approach to contemporary instrumental groups and their performances. The author has worked to present a description of each instrument along with an illustration that will help readers recognize its sound the next time they hear the quoted passage. An overview of the distinct characteristics and roles of string, woodwind, brass, and percussion instruments has been included. Along with this overview are comments on the evolution of scoring techniques. The reader won’t find this kind of historical content in any other book that the author knows of. They also won’t find anywhere else a history of the conductor's development, which is included in this volume. The author has aimed to make this work comprehensive by detailing the conductor's responsibilities and the essentials of good orchestral performance, and by briefly recounting the history of the orchestra and the evolution of its music. All other books about the orchestra that the author has seen are targeted at professional musicians. By creating one for music enthusiasts, the writer hopes to fill a gap.
Contents
Table of Contents
Part I | ||
How the Orchestra is Constituted | ||
Page | ||
I. | Instruments Played with the Bow | 3 |
II. | Wind-Instruments of Wood | 19 |
III. | Wind-instruments of Brass | 30 |
IV. | Other Instruments | 37 |
V. | The Orchestral Score | 43 |
Part II |
||
How the Orchestra is Used | ||
VI. | General Principles | 61 |
VII. | The Strings | 66 |
VIII. | The Wood-Wind | 81 |
IX. | The Brass and the “Battery” | 97 |
X. | Qualities of Good Orchestration | 113 |
XI. | Qualities of Orchestral Performance | 124 |
Part III |
||
How the Orchestra is Directed | ||
XII. | Development of the Conductor | 147 |
XIII. | Functions of the Conductor | 164 |
Part IV |
||
How the Orchestra Grew | ||
XIV. | From Peri to Handel | 181 |
XV. | From Haydn to Wagner | 198 |
Part V |
||
How Orchestral Music Grew | ||
XVI. | From Bach to Haydn | 217 |
XVII. | From Beethoven to Richard Strauss | 226 |
Index | 235 |
Portraits
Pictures
Beethoven | Front page |
FACING PAGE |
|
Arthur Nikisch | 48 |
Haydn | 86 |
Wagner | 114 |
Charles Lamoureux | 128 |
Theodore Thomas | 142 |
Hans Richter | 162 |
Berlioz | 208 |
PART I
How the Orchestra is Constituted
How the Orchestra is Made Up
[Pg 3]
[Pg 3]
I
Instruments Played with the Bow
The modern orchestra is a musical instrument upon which a performer, known as a conductor, plays compositions written especially for it. It is true that an orchestra is a collection of instruments, but these are intended to be so distributed and operated that the result shall be homogeneous, the effect that of one grand organ of sound. Within itself the orchestra embraces a wide variety of tone-qualities and many grades of power and brilliancy, and these are due to the presence of several different families of instruments, each having general qualities, with special traits in the individuals. It is by causing these different families to work together or separately that the composer achieves the expression of his thought, and it is by governing wisely the operations of the individual members and the families that the conductor conveys the composer’s design to the hearer. [Pg 4]
The modern orchestra is a musical ensemble where a performer, called a conductor, leads compositions written specifically for it. While an orchestra is made up of a collection of instruments, they are arranged and played in such a way that the outcome feels like a single, grand sound. The orchestra includes a broad range of tone qualities and various levels of power and brilliance, thanks to several different families of instruments, each with its general characteristics and unique traits. By making these families work together or separately, the composer expresses their ideas, and by skillfully managing the contributions of individual instruments and families, the conductor communicates the composer’s intent to the audience. [Pg 4]
The orchestra of to-day is the result of a series of interesting developments, of which some considerable account will be given in this volume. But it is necessary before that development can be traced that the reader shall take a bird’s-eye view of the orchestra as it now is. Subsequently we shall examine its constitution in detail, but at present we shall simply glance at its general features. Orchestras are not the same for all compositions. Composers select their instruments in these days according to the purpose of the work in hand. But the orchestra employed by Beethoven and his immediate successors in their symphonies is the typical orchestra for independent performance. Curtailed or extended as it may be for special effects, its general plan remains undisturbed.
The orchestra today is the outcome of a series of fascinating developments, which will be discussed in detail in this volume. However, before we explore that development, it's essential for the reader to get an overview of the orchestra as it currently exists. Later, we'll look at its structure in detail, but for now, let's just consider its overall characteristics. Orchestras vary depending on the composition. Composers nowadays choose their instruments based on the purpose of the piece. However, the orchestra used by Beethoven and his immediate successors in their symphonies is the standard orchestra for independent performance. While it may be shortened or expanded for specific effects, its overall structure remains consistent.
The modern orchestra, then, is composed of the following instruments: Flutes, oboes, clarinets, bassoons, horns, trumpets, trombones, drums, and other instruments of percussion, violins, violas, violoncellos, and double-basses. These instruments naturally divide themselves into families. Flutes, oboes, clarinets, and bassoons are instruments of wood, and are caused to sound by the blowing of the breath of the players. They therefore form a single group or family, known as the “wood-wind,” or, more briefly, the wood. Horns, trumpets, and trombones [Pg 5] are instruments of brass, and they form a family known as the brass. The percussion instruments (drums, triangles, cymbals, etc.) are sometimes called “the battery.” Violins, violas, violoncellos (usually called ’cellos), and double-basses are all stringed instruments played with a bow, and they form a group known as “the strings.”
The modern orchestra is made up of the following instruments: flutes, oboes, clarinets, bassoons, horns, trumpets, trombones, drums, and other percussion instruments, as well as violins, violas, cellos, and double basses. These instruments naturally group into families. Flutes, oboes, clarinets, and bassoons are wood instruments, producing sound through the breath of the players. They form a single group called “woodwinds,” or simply, wood. Horns, trumpets, and trombones are brass instruments, and they form a family known as brass. The percussion instruments (drums, triangles, cymbals, etc.) are sometimes referred to as “the battery.” Violins, violas, cellos (commonly called ’cellos), and double basses are all string instruments played with a bow, and they form a group known as “the strings.”
At present the reader will not be invited to study the characteristics and possibilities of these groups and their combinations, but will be asked to acquaint himself with the individual instruments composing them. The foundation of an orchestra is its body of strings. Two principal reasons may here be given for this: The strings are capable, when playing alone, of a greater variety of expression than either the wood or the brass, and they never grow tired. Blowers of wind-instruments require frequent periods of rest, but the strings are equal to the demands of an operatic act an hour and a half in length. Because the strings are the foundation of the orchestra we must study them first. The string group is often described as the “quartet.” This was correct in early times when composers wrote the same part for the ’cellos and double-basses, but it is not correct now, because the strings almost invariably play in five real parts. The violins are divided into two bodies, known as first and second violins. First [Pg 6] violins are the sopranos of the strings, second violins the altos, violas the tenors, ’cellos the barytones, and double-basses the basses. This is not strictly true, because the compass of the viola and of the ’cello enables those instruments to sing above the violins at times. But the normal distribution of the parts of the strings is that which has been given, and this distribution is disturbed only when special effects are required, as we shall see hereafter.
Currently, the reader isn't invited to explore the characteristics and possibilities of these groups and their combinations but is instead asked to get familiar with the individual instruments that make them up. The backbone of an orchestra is its string section. There are two main reasons for this: Strings can express a wider range of emotions when played alone than either woodwinds or brass, and they never get tired. Players of wind instruments need regular breaks, but strings can handle the demands of a one-and-a-half-hour opera performance. Since strings form the orchestra's foundation, we will study them first. The string group is often referred to as the “quartet.” This was accurate in earlier times when composers wrote the same part for cellos and double basses, but it's no longer true, as strings now typically play in five distinct parts. The violins are divided into two sections, known as first and second violins. First violins are the sopranos of the strings, second violins are the altos, violas serve as the tenors, cellos are the baritones, and double basses are the basses. This isn’t entirely accurate since the range of the viola and cello allows those instruments to occasionally play above the violins. However, the usual partitioning of string parts is as stated, and this arrangement is only altered when specific effects are needed, as we'll discuss later.
THE VIOLIN
Let us begin our survey of the individual instruments with a look at the violin, the prima donna of the orchestra. The violin is both a dramatic and a colorature soprano. It can sob with the woes of an Isolde as eloquently as Lilli Lehmann, or it can twitter with the trills and roulades of a Lucia as brightly as a Melba. Its resources in the way of technical agility are great, and its powers of emotional expression are still greater. It is not necessary to expatiate upon the abilities of the violin, because it is so familiar an instrument; but it is well to note that the effect of a solo violin is very different from that of a number of violins playing together in an orchestra. A body of violins is capable of producing a vigorous, [Pg 7] masculine, sonorous volume of tone whose character is as different from that of a solo instrument as its amount is.
Let’s start our exploration of the individual instruments with the violin, the star of the orchestra. The violin is both a dramatic and a coloratura soprano. It can weep with the sorrows of an Isolde as expressively as Lilli Lehmann, or it can sparkle with the trills and embellishments of a Lucia as brightly as a Melba. Its technical agility is impressive, but its capacity for emotional expression is even more remarkable. There’s no need to elaborate on the capabilities of the violin since it’s such a well-known instrument; however, it’s worth mentioning that the impact of a solo violin is very different from that of several violins playing together in an orchestra. A group of violins can create a powerful, rich, resonant sound that is as distinct from a solo performance as the volume itself. [Pg 7]
The violin has four strings, the lowest being tuned to the G below the treble clef. The other three are tuned to D, A, and E, the E being that in the uppermost space of the treble clef. The E is called the first string, and the G the fourth. The compass of the instrument as employed in the orchestra is from the low G, three and a half octaves upward, to the C in the sixth space above the staff. This compass is sometimes increased by the employment of what are called harmonics. These are strangely sweet flute-like sounds, which the Germans call the flageolet tones of the violin. They are nothing more or less than what the scientists describe as overtones, or, better, upper partials. It is a fact of acoustics that every musical tone is composed of several tones, the ear hearing plainly only that which is the fundamental sound of the series. In the case of a vibrating string the lesser tones can be utilized. Professor Zahm, in his “Sound and Music,” says: “A string emitting a musical note rarely, if ever, vibrates as a whole, without, at the same time, vibrating in segments, which are aliquot parts of the [Pg 8] whole.” Violinists have discovered that by touching the vibrating string at certain points very lightly with the fingers of the left hand, they can stop the vibrations of the fundamental tone, leaving the upper partial to be heard. These harmonics are very high in pitch and sweet in quality, and cannot be used in loud or vigorous music, but in certain kinds of passages they enable the violin to soar away into realms of ethereal beauty of tone.
The violin has four strings, with the lowest tuned to the G below the treble clef. The other three are tuned to D, A, and E, with E being in the highest space of the treble clef. E is referred to as the first string, while G is the fourth. The range of the instrument in the orchestra extends from the low G, three and a half octaves up to the C in the sixth space above the staff. This range can sometimes be expanded using what's known as harmonics. These create strangely sweet, flute-like sounds, which are referred to as flageolet tones of the violin in German. They are essentially what scientists call overtones or, more accurately, upper partials. In acoustics, it’s a fact that every musical note is made up of several tones, with the ear primarily hearing just the fundamental sound of the series. For a vibrating string, the additional tones can be utilized. Professor Zahm, in his “Sound and Music,” states: “A string emitting a musical note rarely, if ever, vibrates as a whole, without at the same time vibrating in segments, which are aliquot parts of the whole.” Violinists have found that by lightly touching the vibrating string at certain points with the fingers of the left hand, they can stop the fundamental tone's vibrations, allowing the upper partials to be heard. These harmonics are very high in pitch and sweet in quality, and while they can't be used in loud or vigorous music, in specific passages, they allow the violin to reach ethereal heights of beauty in sound.
The normal tone of a body of violins playing together is clear, penetrating, and rich. As Berlioz has noted in his book on orchestration, a mass of violins playing in the middle and upper registers produces the most brilliant color of the modern orchestra. The opening measures of Mendelssohn’s Italian symphony, the finale of Weber’s “Oberon” overture, the closing measures of the garden scene in Gounod’s “Faust,” or the whole of the prelude to Wagner’s “Lohengrin,” may be instanced as illustrations of pure violin color and power.
The typical sound of a group of violins playing together is clear, bright, and full. As Berlioz pointed out in his book on orchestration, a bunch of violins playing in the middle and upper ranges creates the most vibrant color of the modern orchestra. The opening bars of Mendelssohn’s Italian symphony, the finale of Weber’s “Oberon” overture, the last measures of the garden scene in Gounod’s “Faust,” or the entire prelude to Wagner’s “Lohengrin” serve as examples of pure violin sound and strength.
The prelude to “Lohengrin” also makes use of harmonics. They are heard in the peculiar, mystic, high tones at the close of the number. It should be noted here that harmonics, or upper partials, need not be used simply to increase the compass of the violin. On the contrary, they can be produced from any of the four strings. Those of the G [Pg 9] string, for instance, have a singularly mellow, flute-like quality. Thus, harmonics can be employed in tone-coloring, in which the resources of the modern orchestra are almost inexhaustible.
The prelude to “Lohengrin” also uses harmonics. You can hear them in the unique, mystical high notes at the end of the piece. It’s important to note that harmonics, or upper partials, aren't just used to expand the range of the violin. In fact, they can be created from any of the four strings. For example, the harmonics on the G string have a remarkably soft, flute-like sound. So, harmonics can be utilized for tone-coloring, where the possibilities of the modern orchestra are nearly limitless. [Pg 9]
A great many special effects can be produced from violins. The manner of drawing the bow across the strings has much to do with them. For instance, bowing close to the bridge of the instrument produces a rough, metallic sound, while bowing over the finger-board evokes a soft, veiled tone. There is even a difference in the sound of a tone produced by the pushing of the bow upward and that given out when it is drawn downward. The use of the toe or the heel of the bow also makes a difference. The toe is best employed for a delicate touch, while the heel is used for short, vigorous notes. All possible gradations between a smooth, fluent cantilena and the sharpest staccato are possible to the violin, and can be employed in the orchestra with excellent effect.
A lot of special effects can be created with violins. How you draw the bow across the strings plays a big role. For example, bowing close to the bridge creates a rough, metallic sound, while bowing over the fingerboard produces a soft, muted tone. There’s even a difference between the sound of the bow being pushed upward and when it’s drawn downward. Using the toe or heel of the bow also affects the sound. The toe is best for a delicate touch, whereas the heel is used for short, energetic notes. The violin can produce every variation from a smooth, flowing melody to sharp staccato notes, and this can be used effectively in an orchestra.
Rapid alternating strokes of the bow upward and downward produce the tremolo effect, which is very common in orchestral music. Berlioz notes, with his customary accuracy in regard to instrumental effects, that the tremolo of violins expresses great agitation when played by many violins not far above the middle B flat, while a forte on the [Pg 10] middle of the first string is stormy and violent. Wagner’s “Flying Dutchman” overture affords admirable examples of both these effects.
Quick back-and-forth motions of the bow, up and down, create the tremolo effect, which is very common in orchestral music. Berlioz points out, with his usual precision regarding instrumental sounds, that the tremolo from violins conveys intense agitation when played by a group of violins not far above the middle B flat, while a strong note on the [Pg 10] middle of the first string is intense and forceful. Wagner’s “Flying Dutchman” overture provides excellent examples of both these effects.
The saltato is sometimes employed. This is a performance of rapid successions of notes by causing the bow to jump on the strings by its own elasticity instead of drawing it smoothly. The direction col legno, sometimes seen in orchestra scores, means that the violinists are to use the backs of their bows instead of the hair. This produces a harsh, grotesque kind of staccato, and it is a method employed only in music with something of grim humor in it. Some of the best instances of its employment are to be found in Wagner’s “Siegfried,” where it is used in the music accompanying Mime’s betrayal of his gleeful expectations of Siegfried’s death.
The saltato technique is used sometimes. It involves playing a rapid series of notes by making the bow jump on the strings due to its own elasticity instead of moving it smoothly. The direction col legno, which is occasionally seen in orchestra scores, means that violinists should use the backs of their bows instead of the hair. This creates a harsh, bizarre kind of staccato and is a technique reserved for music that has a touch of dark humor in it. Some of the best examples of its use are found in Wagner’s “Siegfried,” where it accompanies Mime’s betrayal of his gleeful hopes for Siegfried’s death.
Pizzicato is a term used to express the plucking of the strings with the fingers. This is a very familiar musical effect. In earlier times it was employed very little, and confined chiefly to the basses. It is very common in modern music, and sometimes whole movements are directed to be played in this manner. The familiar pizzicato movement of Delibes’s “Sylvia” ballet is an excellent example.
Pizzicato is a term that refers to plucking the strings with your fingers. This is a well-known musical effect. In the past, it was rarely used and mainly limited to the basses. Nowadays, it's very common in modern music, and sometimes entire movements are meant to be played this way. A well-known example is the pizzicato movement from Delibes’s “Sylvia” ballet.
Sordines are little contrivances of wood or brass with teeth which can be pressed down over the strings so as to deaden their vibrations. You [Pg 11] will often, if you are observant, see the players take them out of their waistcoat-pockets and place them over the strings of their instruments just in front of the bridges. These sordine, or mutes, give the tone of the instrument a veiled sound, which adds to the mournfulness of pathetic music, and to the mystery of anything weird or strange. In the “Queen Mab” scherzo of Berlioz’s “Romeo et Juliette” symphony, for instance, the use of the sordines adds to the suggestion of the supernatural world, while in “Asa’s Death” in Grieg’s “Peer Gynt” suite they deepen the impression of crushing sorrow. For the benefit of those who read orchestral scores it must be added that the direction to use the mutes is con sordini, and the words senza sordini signify that their use is to be discontinued. The use of the bow after a pizzicato passage is directed by the words col arco, or simply arco (the bow).
Sordines are small tools made of wood or brass with teeth that can be pressed down over the strings to mute their vibrations. You [Pg 11] will often notice players taking them out of their waistcoat pockets and placing them over the strings of their instruments right in front of the bridges. These sordines, or mutes, give the instrument a softened sound that enhances the sadness in emotional music and adds to the mystery of anything strange or unusual. For example, in the “Queen Mab” scherzo of Berlioz’s “Romeo et Juliette” symphony, using sordines suggests a supernatural atmosphere, while in “Asa’s Death” from Grieg’s “Peer Gynt” suite, they amplify the feeling of deep sorrow. For those familiar with orchestral scores, it should be noted that the instruction to use mutes is con sordini, while senza sordini indicates that they should no longer be used. Resuming bowing after a pizzicato section is indicated by the terms col arco, or simply arco (the bow).
Violins in the orchestra are divided into two bodies, first and second. A friend once asked me: “What is the difference between a first and a second violin?” The question amused me and I repeated it to my friend, Philip Hale, the brilliant music critic of the Boston Journal. He promptly answered: “There is no difference except in the price.” That is quite true. Violins are all alike, but a first-violin player is [Pg 12] sometimes paid more than a second. The reason for dividing the instruments into two bodies is that the middle voices of the harmony may be properly filled out. If there were no second violins, the violas, which we shall presently consider, would have to play continually in their upper register in order to fill what may be called the contralto part of the harmony. Then the ’cellos would have to be pushed up into the tenor register, and there would be a big gap between them and the low-toned double-basses. On the other hand, if the violas were kept down, there would be a gap between them and the violins. But by dividing the violins into two bodies, the second violins are available for the notes of the harmony lying between those sounded by the first violins and those given out by the violas. First and second violins can frequently play the same notes, when the harmonic support is confided to the wind-instruments, and thus a double amount of power is attained. Indeed, it is not uncommon to write a melody for all the violins, violas, and ’cellos to sing together, with wind accompaniment. First and second violins, on the other hand, are often subdivided into four or more parts. So are all the other stringed instruments. This is an effect which we shall consider more in detail when we come to the extended examination of the separate choirs. [Pg 13]
Violins in an orchestra are split into two sections: first and second. A friend once asked me, “What’s the difference between a first and a second violin?” I found the question funny and shared it with my friend, Philip Hale, the brilliant music critic of the Boston Journal. He quickly replied, “There’s no difference other than the price.” That’s true. All violins are similar, but a first violinist sometimes earns more than a second. The reason for splitting the instruments into two sections is to properly fill out the middle voices of the harmony. Without second violins, the violas, which we'll discuss soon, would have to play constantly in their upper register to cover what could be called the contralto part of the harmony. This would force the cellos into the tenor register, creating a large gap between them and the low-toned double basses. Conversely, if the violas stayed down, there would be a gap between them and the violins. By dividing the violins into two sections, the second violins can cover the notes of the harmony that fall between those played by the first violins and those played by the violas. First and second violins can often play the same notes when the harmonic support comes from the wind instruments, resulting in double the power. In fact, it’s not unusual to write a melody for all the violins, violas, and cellos to play together, with wind accompaniment. First and second violins, on the other hand, are often further divided into four or more parts, as are all the other string instruments. This effect will be examined more closely when we take an in-depth look at the separate groups.
THE VIOLA
This adorable instrument always reminds me of Shakespeare’s Viola—“She never told her love, but let concealment, like a worm i’ the bud, prey on her damask cheek.” The viola speaks often enough, but no one recognizes her voice. She is unknown to the average concert-goer. Kept in the background by the position of the players, who sit behind the violins, and by the unskilful employment of the earlier composers, this beautiful and expressive member of the viol family is almost a stranger to lovers of music. The viola is nothing more or less than a larger violin with a deeper compass. The violin is tuned, as we have already seen, thus:
This lovely instrument always makes me think of Shakespeare’s Viola—“She never expressed her love, but let hiding, like a worm in the bud, eat away at her rosy cheek.” The viola speaks often enough, but no one really hears her. She’s not recognized by the average concert-goer. Kept in the background by the placement of the players, who sit behind the violins, and by the poor use by earlier composers, this beautiful and expressive member of the viol family is almost a stranger to music lovers. The viola is simply a larger violin with a deeper sound. The violin is tuned, as we have already seen, like this:

The viola has also four strings, which are tuned thus:
The viola has four strings as well, and they are tuned like this:

In order to avoid the inconvenience of writing the part of the viola [Pg 14] in two clefs, the old custom of writing it on what is known as the alto clef is continued. The peculiarities of clefs will be explained in a separate chapter. The viola is both a tenor and a contralto, though it is usually employed in modern scores to discharge the duties of a tenor. The early composers knew so little about its expressive power that they frequently used it simply to reinforce the basses. The most recent writers have gone to the other extreme. They have been so delighted with the individuality of the viola’s tone that they have shown a tendency to overwork it. The lowest register of the viola has a peculiarly sepulchral tone, which gives it a dark and threatening character, admirably adapted to the demands of tragic music. In its middle register the viola sings with a peculiar pathos which cannot be imitated by any other instrument playing in the same region of pitch, and even in the higher parts of its scale the viola maintains its individuality by a penetrating sweetness and gentleness of tone. Nevertheless, it blends well with other stringed instruments. If a composer desires to write a long scale, exceeding the downward range of violins, he can pass from violins to violas, and so to ’cellos, without any abrupt change of tonal quality. Again, violas can be used to reinforce other stringed instruments, as in the beginning of the [Pg 15] andante con moto of Beethoven’s Fifth Symphony, where they play the melody in unison with the ’cellos. Meyerbeer, Berlioz, and Wagner have made excellent use of the characteristic qualities of the viola. The first named gives a good example of his style of treatment in the viola accompaniment to Raoul’s romance, “Plus blanche que la blanche hermine,” in Act I. of “Les Huguenots.” Berlioz employs a solo viola in his “Harold in Italy” symphony to represent Byron’s melancholy wanderer. Wagner takes advantage of the peculiar tone-color of the instrument in many places in his scores. A familiar example is that which begins the bacchanalian passage in the “Tannhäuser” overture:
To avoid the hassle of writing the viola part in two clefs, the old practice of using the alto clef continues. The details about clefs will be covered in a separate chapter. The viola serves as both a tenor and a contralto, but in modern compositions, it’s mostly used as a tenor. Early composers didn’t understand its expressive potential, often using it just to support the bass parts. In contrast, recent composers have become so enamored with the unique sound of the viola that they may overuse it. The lowest register of the viola has a haunting tone that lends a dark and ominous quality, perfect for tragic music. In its middle register, the viola produces a distinctive pathos that no other instrument can replicate in the same pitch range, and even in its higher notes, it retains its unique character with a sweet and gentle tone. Still, it blends well with other string instruments. If a composer wants to write a long scale that goes beyond the lower range of violins, they can transition from violins to violas and then to cellos seamlessly. Additionally, violas can be used to complement other string instruments, like in the opening of the andante con moto of Beethoven’s Fifth Symphony, where they play the melody in unison with the cellos. Composers like Meyerbeer, Berlioz, and Wagner have skillfully utilized the viola’s distinct qualities. Meyerbeer provides a good example of his approach in the viola accompaniment for Raoul’s romance, “Plus blanche que la blanche hermine,” in Act I of “Les Huguenots.” Berlioz features a solo viola in his “Harold in Italy” symphony to depict Byron’s melancholic wanderer. Wagner leverages the instrument's unique tone color in various parts of his works, a well-known example being the start of the bacchanalian section in the “Tannhäuser” overture:

All that has been said about the methods of bowing, tremolo, pizzicato, harmonics, sordines, etc., applies to the viola as well as to the violin.
All the information regarding bowing techniques, tremolo, pizzicato, harmonics, mutes, etc., applies to the viola just like it does to the violin.
THE VIOLONCELLO
This instrument is so well known that it will not be necessary to say [Pg 16] much about it. Its tone and its various effects are familiar to all concert-goers. The ’cello is tuned precisely as the viola is, but an octave lower:
This instrument is so well-known that there's no need to say much about it. Its tone and various effects are familiar to all concert-goers. The cello is tuned exactly like the viola, but an octave lower: [Pg 16]

The compass usually employed in the orchestra is three and one-half octaves from the low C to the G just above the treble staff. This compass may be increased further by the employment of harmonics. Students of scores will find that three different clefs are used for ’cello music, as explained in the account of clefs.
The range typically used in the orchestra is three and a half octaves, from low C to the G just above the treble staff. This range can be expanded even more by using harmonics. Students studying scores will notice that three different clefs are used for cello music, as explained in the section about clefs.
All that has been said about playing the violin applies also to the ’cello, though, of course, in orchestral music the ’cello is not expected to display so much agility as the violin. It is heard to the best advantage in broad and fluent melody. As Berlioz justly says: “Nothing is more voluptuously melancholy or more suited to the utterance of tender, languishing themes than a mass of violoncellos playing in unison on their first strings.” He might have added that nothing is more expressive of dignity without passion than the lower tones of the ’cello when uttered by several instruments at once. Owing to its great compass the ’cello can be used as the bass of the string [Pg 17] quartet, as a solo instrument, or as the singer of the melody with an accompaniment by the other strings.
All that has been said about playing the violin also applies to the cello, although in orchestral music, the cello doesn’t need to show as much agility as the violin. It's best appreciated in broad and flowing melodies. As Berlioz rightly points out: “Nothing is more sensually melancholy or more suited to expressing tender, longing themes than a group of cellos playing in unison on their open strings.” He could have added that nothing conveys dignity without passion better than the lower notes of the cello when played by multiple instruments together. Due to its wide range, the cello can function as the bass in a string quartet, as a solo instrument, or as the melody performer accompanied by the other strings. [Pg 17]
THE DOUBLE-BASS
The irreverent frequently call the double-bass the “bull fiddle.” It is the foundation of the string choir and the fundamental bass of the whole orchestra. It is tuned thus:
The irreverent often refer to the double bass as the “bull fiddle.” It serves as the foundation of the string section and the basic bass for the entire orchestra. It's tuned like this:

It must be borne in mind, however, that the notes sound an octave lower than written. The instrument is called the double-bass because it was used in early times to double the bass part played by the ’cello. It is only since the beginning of the nineteenth century that it has generally been given an independent bass part. Beethoven extended its powers immensely and revealed capacities which earlier composers did not suspect the instrument of possessing. Indeed, some of Beethoven’s contemporaries looked askance at his innovations. Weber wrote an article on the great man’s Fourth Symphony. In it he depicted himself [Pg 18] as hearing in a dream the comments of the instruments of the orchestra. The contra-bass (double-bass) says:
It should be noted that the notes sound an octave lower than they are written. The instrument is called the double-bass because it was originally used to double the bass part played by the cello. It’s only since the beginning of the nineteenth century that it has typically been given its own independent bass part. Beethoven greatly expanded its capabilities and showcased potential that earlier composers didn’t realize the instrument had. In fact, some of Beethoven’s contemporaries were skeptical of his innovations. Weber wrote an article about the great man’s Fourth Symphony. In it, he described dreaming about the comments from the instruments in the orchestra. The contrabass (double-bass) says:
“I have just come from the rehearsal of a symphony by one of our newest composers; and though, as you know, I have a tolerably strong constitution, I could only just hold out, and five minutes more would have shattered my frame and burst the sinews of my life. I have been made to caper about like a wild goat, and to turn myself into a mere fiddle to execute the no-ideas of Mr. Composer.”
“I just came back from a rehearsal of a symphony by one of our newest composers; and even though I have a pretty strong constitution, I could barely make it, and five more minutes would have completely exhausted me. I’ve had to dance around like a wild goat and turn myself into a puppet to perform the nonsense of Mr. Composer.”
The time had not yet come for the famous recitative passage of the basses in the Ninth Symphony. The same methods of bowing, etc., as are applied to the violin are applied to the double-bass, but without any attempt at great agility. Sordines, or mutes, are not used, because an effective mute for a double-bass would weigh about two pounds and would be very inconvenient to carry in the pocket. Harmonics can be produced from the double-bass, but they are strident and loud and have no musical utility.
The moment for the well-known bass recitative section of the Ninth Symphony hadn't arrived yet. The same bowing techniques used for the violin are also used for the double bass, but there's no effort to be particularly agile. Mutes aren't used because an effective mute for a double bass would weigh around two pounds and would be awkward to carry in your pocket. You can produce harmonics on the double bass, but they end up sounding harsh and loud without any real musical purpose.
[Pg 19]
[Pg 19]
II
Wind-Instruments of Wood
THE FLUTE
Next in importance to the strings is the wood-wind, which is divided into three families—flutes, oboes, and clarinets. To the first family belong the piccolo and the flute; to the second the oboe, English horn, and bassoon, and to the third the clarinet and bass clarinet. In the modern orchestra, flutes, clarinets, oboes, and bassoons are usually employed in pairs, while there is, if needed, one piccolo, one English horn, and one bass clarinet. The flute is the most agile of the wind-instruments, and is employed very freely in the orchestra. Its compass is three octaves upward from the C below the treble clef, but the two uppermost notes are seldom used. The tone is soft and sweet in the medium register, clear and penetrating in the upper, and singularly characteristic in the lower. Rapid passages are readily executed on the [Pg 20] flute, but the instrument’s powers of expression are limited, owing partly to its tone-quality and partly to the impossibility of giving a wide crescendo or diminuendo to any passage played upon it.
Next in importance to the strings is the woodwind, which is divided into three families—flutes, oboes, and clarinets. The first family includes the piccolo and the flute; the second contains the oboe, English horn, and bassoon, while the third includes the clarinet and bass clarinet. In a modern orchestra, flutes, clarinets, oboes, and bassoons are typically used in pairs, with one piccolo, one English horn, and one bass clarinet if needed. The flute is the most agile of the wind instruments and is used quite freely in the orchestra. It can play three octaves upward from the C below the treble clef, but the two highest notes are rarely used. The tone is soft and sweet in the medium range, clear and penetrating in the upper, and uniquely characteristic in the lower. Rapid passages can be played easily on the [Pg 20] flute, but the instrument’s expressive range is limited, partly due to its tone quality and partly because it lacks the ability to create a wide crescendo or diminuendo in any passage played on it.
Nevertheless, it can be employed expressively when used with judgment. Berlioz calls attention to Gluck’s use of it in his “Orfeo” in the scene in the Elysian fields, where it voices the humility and resignation of the bereaved husband. In the upper register rapid sequences for the flute have an air of gayety. Well-known passages which illustrate this are that near the close of the “Leonora” overture No. 3, and that near the close of the finale of the “Eroica” symphony. The piccolo, or octave-flute, is simply a small, shrill-voiced flute, sounding an octave higher than the ordinary instrument. The sounds in its second octave are well adapted to pieces of a joyous character, while its upper register is useful for violent effects, such as a storm or a scene in the infernal regions. In grotesque and supernatural scenes it is also often employed with good results.
Nevertheless, it can be used expressively when handled thoughtfully. Berlioz highlights Gluck’s use of it in his “Orfeo” during the scene in the Elysian fields, where it expresses the humility and acceptance of the grieving husband. In the higher register, quick sequences for the flute have a cheerful vibe. Notable examples of this can be found near the end of the “Leonora” overture No. 3, and towards the end of the finale of the “Eroica” symphony. The piccolo, or octave flute, is simply a smaller, higher-pitched flute that sounds an octave higher than the standard instrument. The notes in its second octave suit joyful pieces well, while its upper register is effective for intense effects, such as a storm or a scene in hell. It is also frequently used with great effect in bizarre and supernatural scenes.
THE OBOE
The oboe is a reed instrument with a peculiar pastoral tone, which, when once recognized, can never again be mistaken for that of another [Pg 21] instrument. It is not possible to describe this tone, beyond saying that the average hearer thinks of it as the tone of a shepherd’s pipe. The instrument is so well suited to pastoral music that the principal melody is almost always given to it in passages having such a character. Rapid passages, except in rare instances, are not suited to the utterance of the oboe, though when it joins with the whole mass of instruments in a tutti, anything that is not impossible may be written for it. But it is essentially a lyric instrument of tender expression, and it is seldom called upon for either gayety or tragedy. Berlioz says: “Candor, artless grace, soft joy, or the grief of a fragile being, suits the oboe’s accents. It expresses them admirably in its cantabile.” An excellent example of the oboe’s quality as a tender lyric singer is the opening of the slow movement of Schubert’s symphony in C:
The oboe is a reed instrument with a unique pastoral sound that, once recognized, can never be confused with that of any other instrument. It’s hard to describe this sound, except to say that most listeners think of it as resembling a shepherd’s pipe. The instrument is so perfectly suited for pastoral music that it typically carries the main melody in these kinds of passages. Fast musical phrases, except on rare occasions, are not ideal for the oboe, although when it plays along with the full orchestra in a tutti, anything that isn’t impossible can be written for it. However, it is primarily a lyrical instrument with a gentle expression, and it's rarely used for either happiness or tragedy. Berlioz states: “Simplicity, innocent grace, soft joy, or the sorrow of a delicate being, fits the oboe's tones. It expresses them beautifully in its cantabile.” A great example of the oboe’s ability as a gentle lyrical voice is the beginning of the slow movement of Schubert’s Symphony in C:

[Pg 22]
[Pg 22]

Its pastoral character is illustrated by hundreds of familiar passages. Perhaps none is more familiar than this from the first scene of Gounod’s “Faust.”
Its pastoral nature is shown in hundreds of well-known passages. Maybe none is more recognizable than this one from the first scene of Gounod’s “Faust.”

To the oboe belongs the duty of sounding the A to which the whole orchestra tunes. This privilege dates from the time of Handel, when it was the principal wind-instrument employed in the band. [Pg 23]
The oboe has the responsibility of playing the A note that the entire orchestra tunes to. This role goes back to the time of Handel, when it was the main wind instrument used in the ensemble. [Pg 23]
THE ENGLISH HORN
The English horn is not, as its name seems to imply, an instrument of brass, but of wood. It is, in fact, an alto oboe. Its compass is from the E below the treble clef to the F on the fifth line. This carries it five tones below the oboe. Its tone is similar to that of the oboe, but is heavier and has a dryer quality. Its character is less feminine, more sombre, and more pathetic. Yet it is not incapable of joyous expression, if the expression is not strained by the context. In all the range of music there are no such examples of the eloquence of the English horn as in the works of Wagner, who made it speak with a human voice. The finest instances of its powers are to be found in his later dramas, and perhaps the most familiar are in “Tristan und Isolde.” The English horn is the instrument which imitates the shepherd’s pipe in the melancholy wail of Act III., played while Tristan is waiting for news of the ship.
The English horn is not, as its name suggests, a brass instrument, but rather a wooden one. It is actually an alto oboe. Its range extends from the E below the treble clef to the F on the fifth line, which is five tones lower than the oboe. Its sound is akin to that of the oboe, but it’s heavier and has a drier quality. Its character is less feminine, more somber, and more expressive of sorrow. However, it can still convey joy when the context allows for it. In the entire spectrum of music, there are no examples of the English horn's eloquence that rival those in the works of Wagner, who made it sound like a human voice. The best demonstrations of its abilities are found in his later dramas, with perhaps the most well-known being in “Tristan und Isolde.” The English horn mimics the shepherd’s pipe in the mournful lament of Act III., played while Tristan waits for news of the ship.

[Pg 24] When the ship is sighted by the herdsman, his pipe (still the English horn) bursts into this pæan of joy:
[Pg 24] When the herdsman spots the ship, his pipe (still the English horn) breaks into this joyful song:

THE BASSOON
The bassoon is the bass of the oboe, and it occupies among the wood-wind instruments a position similar to that of the ’cello among the strings. Its upper tones resemble somewhat those of the English horn, while its lower tones are deep and hoarse. Its extreme compass is from the B flat below the bass clef to the F at the top of the treble, but the last four notes are uncertain and of unnatural quality. Music for the bassoon, like that for the ’cello, is written on three clefs—bass, tenor, and treble. Bassoons are employed in pairs in the orchestra. They are used either to fill out the harmonies, to strengthen the bass, or as solo instruments.
The bassoon is the bass version of the oboe and holds a similar role among woodwind instruments as the cello does among strings. Its higher notes are somewhat similar to those of the English horn, while its lower notes are deep and raspy. The full range of the bassoon extends from the B flat below the bass clef to the F at the top of the treble clef, though the last four notes are unreliable and have an unnatural quality. Music written for the bassoon, like that for the cello, uses three clefs: bass, tenor, and treble. In orchestras, bassoons are typically played in pairs. They are used to enrich harmonies, strengthen the bass, or serve as solo instruments.
The bassoon is capable of a great variety of effects. Its upper register [Pg 25] has a pastoral quality, combined with a certain plaintiveness, which makes it suitable to the utterance of gentle grief or melancholy. Composers have frequently availed themselves of the humorous effects to be obtained by making the bassoon play music which ill comports with the quality of its tone. The effect is really funny, though the fun arises, not from the inherent humor of the instrument, but from the incongruity of the singer and the song. The most familiar example of this kind of fun is in the clown’s march in Mendelssohn’s “Midsummer Night’s Dream” music:
The bassoon can produce a wide range of effects. Its upper register has a pastoral quality, mixed with a certain sadness, making it perfect for expressing gentle grief or melancholy. Composers often take advantage of the humorous effects that come from having the bassoon play music that doesn’t match its tone. The result is genuinely funny, not because the instrument is inherently humorous, but due to the mismatch between the singer and the song. A well-known example of this type of humor is in the clown’s march in Mendelssohn’s “Midsummer Night’s Dream” music: [Pg 25]

There is also a contra-bass bassoon, which sounds an octave lower than the ordinary bassoon. The reader will find that in orchestra scores the bassoons are usually designated by their Italian title, fagotti. This name is applied to the instrument because it resembles two sticks bound together, as in a bundle of fagots. [Pg 26]
There is also a contrabassoon, which plays an octave lower than the regular bassoon. In orchestra scores, you'll typically see the bassoons referred to by their Italian name, fagotti. This term is used for the instrument because it looks like two sticks tied together, similar to a bundle of twigs. [Pg 26]
THE CLARINET
The clarinet is a wind-instrument of wood with a very mellow and beautiful tone. It differs from the oboe chiefly in the construction of its mouth-piece, which contains the sound-producing mechanism. The instruments of the oboe family have mouth-pieces with two vibrating reeds; those of the clarinet family have only one reed. This accounts chiefly for the difference in the character of the tone. The compass of the clarinet is from the E below the treble clef three octaves and a half upward. The notes of the uppermost octave are shrill and are seldom used. They are employed occasionally when a screaming effect is desired. Clarinets are used in pairs in the orchestra, sometimes to fill out harmonies, and frequently for solo effects. There is hardly anything which cannot be done with a clarinet, for the instrument is capable of great agility and brilliancy, and at the same time is the most expressive of all the wind-instruments. It can be played pianissimo or fortissimo through most of its compass, and the most beautiful crescendo and diminuendo effects can be obtained. There is no more familiar example of the high expressiveness of the clarinet than [Pg 27] that found in the overture to “Tannhäuser,” where the clarinet intones the pleading passage afterward sung in the first scene by Venus:
The clarinet is a wooden wind instrument with a very soft and beautiful tone. It differs from the oboe mainly in the design of its mouthpiece, which has the mechanism that creates sound. The oboe family instruments have mouthpieces with two vibrating reeds, while the clarinet family has only one reed. This is the main reason for the difference in their tone. The clarinet has a range from the E below the treble clef up three and a half octaves. The notes in the highest octave are sharp and not often used, except when a dramatic effect is needed. Clarinets are used in pairs in orchestras, sometimes to enrich harmonies and often for solo performances. There's hardly anything a clarinet can't do, as it is incredibly agile and brilliant, and is the most expressive of all wind instruments. It can be played very softly or very loudly across most of its range, and it can produce beautiful crescendo and diminuendo effects. One of the most well-known examples of the clarinet's expressiveness is found in the overture to “Tannhäuser,” where the clarinet plays the pleading passage later sung in the first scene by Venus:

The reader will find that in scores the clarinet part is usually written in some other key than that of the composition. This is because three kinds of clarinet are employed, clarinets in A, B flat, and C. A clarinet in B flat means one whose pitch is a whole tone below the standard, so that when one plays the scale of C natural on it he gets the sounds of the scale of B flat, just as he would from a piano tuned a whole tone too low. A clarinet in A is a tone and a half below pitch in the scale of C. One in C produces the scale of C when played in C. The reason for using different kinds of clarinets is that it is difficult to play the instrument in remote keys. By using an A clarinet for keys having sharps and a B flat clarinet for keys having flats, [Pg 28] much of the difficulty is obviated. A clarinet in A is producing the sounds of the key of three sharps when it is playing in C. To get the sounds of the key of six sharps, it is necessary only to write for the A clarinet in three sharps. Similarly, to get the sounds of the key of five flats one needs only to write in three flats for a clarinet in B flat. The kind of clarinet to be used is designated in the score. Instruments treated in this manner are called transposing instruments. (See Chapter V.)
The reader will notice that in many scores, the clarinet part is usually written in a different key than that of the composition. This is because three types of clarinets are used: A, B flat, and C clarinets. A B flat clarinet is tuned a whole step lower than the standard pitch, so when you play a C natural scale on it, you actually hear a B flat scale, similar to how a piano would sound if it were tuned a whole step too low. An A clarinet plays a tone and a half lower than the C scale, while a C clarinet produces the C scale when played in C. The reason for using different types of clarinets is that it’s challenging to play in distant keys. By using an A clarinet for keys with sharps and a B flat clarinet for keys with flats, a lot of the difficulty is avoided. An A clarinet will sound as if it's in the key of three sharps when playing in C. To achieve the sounds of the key of six sharps, you only need to write for the A clarinet in three sharps. Likewise, to get the sounds of the key of five flats, you just need to write in three flats for a B flat clarinet. The specific clarinet type to be used is indicated in the score. Instruments organized this way are referred to as transposing instruments. [Pg 28] (See Chapter V.)
THE BASS CLARINET
The bass clarinet is a clarinet whose compass extends an octave below that of the B flat clarinet. It is a long instrument with a curved bell at the lower end, so that it looks like an old-fashioned Dutch pipe. Bass clarinets in B flat and A are employed, and the music is usually written on the treble clef, thus transposing an octave below. Wagner uses the bass clef, which is more convenient for the student of his scores than for the performer. The tone of the lower register of the bass clarinet is sonorous and rich, and affords a fine bass for wood-wind passages.
The bass clarinet is a type of clarinet that has a range an octave lower than the B flat clarinet. It’s a long instrument with a curved bell at the bottom, resembling an old-fashioned Dutch pipe. Both B flat and A bass clarinets are used, and the music is typically written in the treble clef, which means it sounds an octave lower. Wagner uses the bass clef, which is easier for students studying his scores than for the actual performers. The sound in the lower register of the bass clarinet is deep and rich, providing a strong bass for woodwind sections.
As a solo instrument the bass clarinet is admirable in its dignity. The [Pg 29] instrument is used singly, not in pairs. As a fine example of the effect of the bass clarinet, the music of Elizabeth’s final exit in Act III. of “Tannhäuser” may be commended.
As a solo instrument, the bass clarinet is impressive and dignified. The instrument is typically played alone, not in pairs. A great example of the bass clarinet's impact can be found in the music of Elizabeth’s final exit in Act III of “Tannhäuser.” [Pg 29]

[Pg 30]
[Pg 30]
III
Wind-Instruments of Brass
THE HORN
The brass choir is composed of horns, trumpets, and trombones, with the addition in most modern scores of a contra-bass tuba. Wagner has used also bass trumpets and tenor tubas to enrich the color of this part of his orchestra. The horn, or French horn, as it is often called, is the old hunting horn adapted to orchestral purposes. It is an extremely valuable instrument, because it has a most noble and expressive tone, which makes it very interesting as a solo voice, and equally because it blends admirably with either strings or wood, as well as with brass. In the older compositions the reader will find that two horns were used, but it is customary with modern composers to employ four, thus making a full four-part harmony possible. Wagner generally doubles his horn parts, requiring eight instruments. [Pg 31]
The brass section consists of horns, trumpets, and trombones, with most modern scores also including a contrabass tuba. Wagner has also incorporated bass trumpets and tenor tubas to enhance the color of this part of his orchestra. The horn, often referred to as the French horn, is essentially an adapted hunting horn for orchestral use. It's a highly valuable instrument due to its noble and expressive tone, making it captivating as a solo voice, and it blends beautifully with strings, woodwinds, and other brass instruments. In older compositions, you’ll typically find two horns used, but modern composers commonly use four, allowing for a full four-part harmony. Wagner usually doubles his horn parts, requiring eight instruments. [Pg 31]
It was impossible in earlier times to play in all keys on any one horn, and so horns in various keys had to be used. The reader will find that many scores call for horns in D, in E flat, in B flat, etc. Players now use almost exclusively the horn in F, with valves, upon which it is possible to play in all keys. It is customary with many composers, however, to write horn parts in various keys, and the players have to transpose them. As no opera is more familiar than “Faust,” the reader may readily identify the horn as a solo instrument in the first act when Mephistopheles shows Faust the vision of Marguerite.
It used to be impossible to play in all keys on a single horn, so musicians had to use horns in different keys. You'll see that many scores call for horns in D, E flat, B flat, and so on. Nowadays, players almost exclusively use the horn in F with valves, which allows them to play in all keys. However, many composers still write horn parts in different keys, meaning players have to transpose them. Since no opera is more well-known than “Faust,” you can easily recognize the horn as a solo instrument in the first act when Mephistopheles shows Faust the vision of Marguerite.

In Wagner’s “Siegfried” the horn plays all the passages which the young hero is supposed to intone on his hunting horn. The quartet of horns employed in the modern orchestra is frequently heard alone, and the effect of this full harmony of mellow brass is incomparably fine. Such effects are heard in the hunting fanfare which precedes the entrance of the Landgrave and his party in Act I. of “Tannhäuser,” and in the echoing through the woods of the departing hunt in the beginning of Act II. of “Tristan und Isolde.” It must not be supposed, however, that [Pg 32] horn quartets are used only for hunting effects. One has only to recall the beautiful passage in Saint-Säen’s “Phäeton.”
In Wagner’s “Siegfried,” the horn plays all the parts the young hero is meant to play on his hunting horn. The quartet of horns used in the modern orchestra is often heard on its own, and the sound of this rich brass harmony is simply stunning. You can hear these effects in the hunting fanfare before the entrance of the Landgrave and his group in Act I of “Tannhäuser,” as well as in the echoes through the woods of the departing hunt at the start of Act II of “Tristan und Isolde.” However, it’s important to note that horn quartets aren’t just used for hunting sounds. Just think of the beautiful section in Saint-Saëns’ “Phäeton.”

Stopped tones are frequently given to the horns. These are produced by inserting the hand in the bell of the instrument, where it has an effect not unlike that of a sordine on a violin-string. The quality of stopped tones is nasal and stertorous. They are used with much significance in dramatic music.
Stopped tones are often produced by the horns. They’re created by placing the hand in the bell of the instrument, which has a similar effect to a mute on a violin string. The sound of stopped tones is nasal and heavy. They are used with great significance in dramatic music.
THE TRUMPET
This fine instrument, the soprano of the brass choir, is too often replaced by the cornet. Indeed, in the United States I have heard [Pg 33] trumpets only in the Boston Symphony Orchestra and Walter Damrosch’s orchestra. The trumpet has a full, round, brilliant tone, for which that of the blatant and brassy cornet is not a good substitute. But it is much easier to get good cornet-players than good trumpeters, so the cornet is quite common. The pealing, militant character of the trumpet is always associated in the mind with that of the army bugle, which it closely resembles. The trumpets are usually employed in chords written for the brass, or in the big mass effects of the orchestra. They are seldom called upon to intone a melody except in passages in which the brass plays alone, or when a very brilliant and forcible orchestration is used. The instrument is so familiar that no illustration is necessary. Trumpets in various keys were formerly always employed, but it is now customary to use chiefly the F trumpet, with valves. Cornets employed in the orchestra are in A and B flat. There is a high cornet in E flat, but it is used only in military bands. Stopped tones are easily produced from the cornet or trumpet, and are often used for comic effects. They sound much like the voice of a person singing in a falsetto voice through his nose. Trumpets and cornets are generally used in pairs in the orchestra. [Pg 34]
This great instrument, the soprano of the brass section, is often swapped out for the cornet. In fact, in the United States, I've mostly heard trumpets in the Boston Symphony Orchestra and Walter Damrosch’s orchestra. The trumpet has a rich, full, bright tone that the loud and brassy cornet just can’t match. However, it’s much easier to find skilled cornet players than good trumpeters, so the cornet has become quite common. The bold, powerful nature of the trumpet is always linked in our minds with that of the army bugle, which it closely resembles. Trumpets are usually used in chords written for brass or in the large, dramatic effects of the orchestra. They’re rarely asked to play a melody except in sections where the brass plays alone or with very bright and forceful orchestration. The instrument is so well-known that no illustration is needed. Trumpets in various keys were once always used, but now it's mostly the F trumpet with valves that's standard. The cornets used in the orchestra are in A and B flat. There’s a high cornet in E flat, but it’s only used in military bands. Stopped notes are easily produced on both the cornet and trumpet and are often used for comic purposes. They sound a lot like someone singing in a nasal falsetto. Trumpets and cornets are typically used in pairs in the orchestra.
THE TROMBONE
The trombone is one of the noblest of all orchestral instruments. When it sounds ignoble, it is either because its part is not well written or because it is badly played. In respect of register there are three principal kinds of trombones—alto, tenor, and bass. The alto has a compass extending from A at the bottom of the bass clef to the E flat in the top space of the treble clef. The tenor ranges from E below the bass clef to the B flat in the middle of the treble clef, and this is the instrument most frequently employed. The bass trombone’s register runs from B below the bass to the F in the first space of the treble clef. The alto trombone is in E flat, the tenor in B flat, and the bass in F. There is also a contra-bass trombone in B flat, sounding an octave lower than the tenor trombone. It is very fatiguing to play, and is usually replaced by the tuba, whose tone is of a considerably different character. Although all these trombones stand in keys other than C, they are not treated as transposing, but are written in the key of the composition.
The trombone is one of the most impressive instruments in an orchestra. When it sounds bad, it’s usually because the music isn’t well written or the player isn’t skilled. There are three main types of trombones based on their range: alto, tenor, and bass. The alto can play from A at the bottom of the bass clef to E flat in the top space of the treble clef. The tenor ranges from E below the bass clef to B flat in the middle of the treble clef, and this is the most commonly used instrument. The bass trombone's range goes from B below the bass clef to F in the first space of the treble clef. The alto trombone is in E flat, the tenor in B flat, and the bass in F. There’s also a contra-bass trombone in B flat, which sounds an octave lower than the tenor trombone. It can be very tiring to play and is often replaced by the tuba, which has a very different sound. Even though all these trombones are in keys other than C, they aren’t considered transposing instruments; they’re written in the key of the piece.
The tone of the trombone is grave and majestic, but it may be made to [Pg 35] rage hoarsely. In all solemn or broadly dignified music trombones play a conspicuous part. It is customary to write in three parts for these instruments, but when necessary they may be made to play in unison, as in the proclamation of the pilgrims’ chorus in the overture to “Tannhäuser,” or the curse motive in various parts of the Nibelung series. A fine example of the employment of trombones in several parts is to be found in the first act of “Die Walküre” on the first appearance of the “Walhalla” motive.
The sound of the trombone is serious and grand, but it can also be made to [Pg 35] scream powerfully. In all solemn or highly dignified music, trombones take on an important role. It’s common to write for these instruments in three parts, but they can also play together in unison when needed, like in the announcement of the pilgrims’ chorus in the overture to “Tannhäuser,” or the curse theme in various sections of the Nibelung series. A great example of using trombones in multiple parts can be found in the first act of “Die Walküre” during the first appearance of the “Walhalla” theme.

THE TUBA
The tuba is a deep-toned brass instrument of double-bass quality. It is, in fact, the double-bass of the brass choir. Its quality of tone is noble and blends well with that of trombones. The instrument usually employed in the modern orchestra is the bass tuba in B flat. Wagner employs tenor tubas in the funeral march of the “Götterdämmerung” in order to get a generally consistent sombre color in the brass. He uses [Pg 36] in other places both bass and contra-bass tubas, but his writing for these instruments cannot be regarded as invariably felicitous.
The tuba is a deep-toned brass instrument with a double-bass sound. It's basically the double-bass of the brass section. Its tone is rich and blends nicely with trombones. The version typically used in modern orchestras is the bass tuba in B flat. Wagner uses tenor tubas in the funeral march of “Götterdämmerung” to create a consistent somber tone in the brass. In other sections, he incorporates both bass and contrabass tubas, but his writing for these instruments isn’t always successful. [Pg 36]
The tuba is really a member of the large family of Saxhorns, of which there are six principal types, all in E flat or B flat. These are the sopranino, or piccolo Saxhorn in E flat (A below treble to B flat above), soprano Saxhorn in B flat (German flügelhorn—E below treble to B flat above), alto in E flat (bass A to E flat in fourth space of treble), tenor in B flat (E below bass to B flat treble), bass in B flat, called in Germany bass tuba, and in England euphonium (B flat below bass to F above it), bass in E flat (same compass less one upper note), and contra-bass in B flat (E flat an octave below the bass to F on the third line). These instruments belong primarily to the military band, but an orchestral composer may employ any of them that suit his purpose.
The tuba is actually part of the large family of Saxhorns, which includes six main types, all in E flat or B flat. These are the sopranino or piccolo Saxhorn in E flat (A below treble to B flat above), soprano Saxhorn in B flat (German flügelhorn—E below treble to B flat above), alto in E flat (bass A to E flat in the fourth space of treble), tenor in B flat (E below bass to B flat treble), bass in B flat, known in Germany as bass tuba, and in England as euphonium (B flat below bass to F above it), bass in E flat (same range minus one upper note), and contrabass in B flat (E flat an octave below the bass to F on the third line). These instruments are mainly used in military bands, but an orchestral composer can use any of them that fit his needs.
In some older scores the music-lover will find instead of the tuba the ophicleide, which is the bass of the keyed bugle family. Its coarse and blatant tone is happily replaced by that of the tuba.
In some older scores, music lovers will find that instead of the tuba, there is the ophicleide, which belongs to the bass of the keyed bugle family. Its rough and loud tone is thankfully replaced by that of the tuba.
[Pg 37]
[Pg 37]
IV
Other Instruments
THE TYMPANI
The tympani, or kettle-drums, belong to the department of instruments of percussion. They are the only drums which can be tuned to sound certain notes. The other instruments of percussion need not be described until the department is discussed as a whole. The older composers employed only two kettle-drums. The modern writers often use three and sometimes four. There are low and high kettle-drums. The low drum can be tuned to any note from F below the bass clef to C in the second space, and the high drum from B flat on the second line to F on the fourth. The early composers used kettle-drums almost invariably with the trumpets, and found no better employment for them than the accentuation of rhythm and changes of harmony. Beethoven, who was one of the keenest of all composers in his appreciation of the [Pg 38] individuality of instruments, saw that the kettle-drums could be used for special effects.
The timpani, or kettle drums, are part of the percussion family of instruments. They are the only drums that can be tuned to specific notes. The other percussion instruments won't be covered until we discuss the whole family. Older composers typically used just two kettle drums. In contrast, modern composers often use three or even four. There are low and high kettle drums. The low drum can be tuned to any note from F below the bass clef to C in the second space, while the high drum ranges from B flat on the second line to F on the fourth. Early composers almost always paired kettle drums with trumpets and primarily used them to emphasize rhythm and changes in harmony. Beethoven, known for his deep understanding of instrument individuality, recognized that kettle drums could be used for special effects.
The early composers always tuned them to the tonic key and its dominant. Beethoven, in the scherzo of the Ninth Symphony, tuned them in octaves and produced a striking effect. Again in the slow movement of the same symphony he made the two drums play simultaneously on two notes of a chord. This also was novel. In the andante of his First Symphony he had already made the tympani play the bass to a melody of violins and flutes, and in the Fourth Symphony the tympani take their turn with the other instruments in playing the theme of two notes often repeated. The solo effects of the tympani in the scherzo of the Fifth Symphony and in the opening of the violin concerto are well known. Beethoven thus paved the way for subsequent composers to make a wide and varied use not only of the tympani but of other percussive instruments.
The early composers always tuned them to the main key and its dominant. Beethoven, in the scherzo of the Ninth Symphony, tuned them in octaves and created a striking effect. In the slow movement of the same symphony, he had the two drums play together on two notes of a chord. This was also a new idea. In the andante of his First Symphony, he had already made the timpani play the bass to a melody played by violins and flutes, and in the Fourth Symphony, the timpani joined the other instruments in playing a theme of two notes that were often repeated. The solo parts of the timpani in the scherzo of the Fifth Symphony and at the beginning of the violin concerto are well-known. Beethoven thus opened the door for later composers to use not only the timpani but also other percussion instruments in diverse and creative ways.
Other instruments of percussion employed in the orchestra are the military snare drum, bass drum, cymbals, triangle, tambourine, castanets, the carillon (a set of steel bars which produce sounds like those of small bells), the xylophone, large bells (or heavy steel tubes to imitate them), and the gong. [Pg 39]
Other percussion instruments used in the orchestra include the military snare drum, bass drum, cymbals, triangle, tambourine, castanets, carillon (a set of steel bars that make sounds similar to small bells), xylophone, large bells (or heavy steel tubes that mimic them), and gong. [Pg 39]
THE HARP
The reader will look in vain for the harp in the older symphonic scores. It was in its early employment wholly an instrument of the theatre. Although it found its way into the orchestra early, it was not employed as a genuine orchestral instrument. Up to the beginning of the present century, as Gevaert has clearly pointed out, composers used it for the sake of its historical character. Thus Handel introduced it in the first version of his “Esther” (1720), Gluck in his “Orfeo” (1762), and Beethoven in his “Prometheus” ballet (1799). In Gluck’s “Orfeo,” for example, the harp is heard only when Orpheus is supposed to play on the instrument carried by him. In this same manner Wagner employs the harp in “Tannhäuser.” It was employed in a similar manner in the early part of the present century by composers for the theatre, chiefly in France. Biblical and classical subjects, in which the harps of the daughters of Israel or the lyres of Greece and Rome might be heard, naturally suggested the use of the harp, and thus it was employed by Méhul in his “Joseph” (1809), Spontini in “La Vestale” (1807), and Rossini in “Moïse” (1827). Again, scenes in Scotland or [Pg 40] Ireland required the local color of the gleeman’s harp, and for this purpose it was employed by Méhul in his “Uthal” (1803), Lesueur in “Les Bardes” (1807), and Catel in “Wallace” (1817).
The reader will look in vain for the harp in older symphonic scores. It was initially an instrument of the theater. Although it made its way into the orchestra early on, it wasn't used as a true orchestral instrument. Up until the beginning of this century, as Gevaert has clearly pointed out, composers used it for its historical significance. For instance, Handel included it in the first version of his “Esther” (1720), Gluck in his “Orfeo” (1762), and Beethoven in his “Prometheus” ballet (1799). In Gluck’s “Orfeo,” for example, the harp is only heard when Orpheus is supposed to play it. Wagner uses the harp in a similar way in “Tannhäuser.” It was also used similarly in the early part of this century by theater composers, mainly in France. Biblical and classical themes, where the harps of the daughters of Israel or the lyres of Greece and Rome are present, naturally called for the use of the harp, which is why Méhul used it in his “Joseph” (1809), Spontini in “La Vestale” (1807), and Rossini in “Moïse” (1827). Additionally, scenes set in Scotland or Ireland needed the local touch of the gleeman’s harp, leading Méhul to use it in his “Uthal” (1803), Lesueur in “Les Bardes” (1807), and Catel in “Wallace” (1817).
The perfection of the pedal mechanism by Sebastian Erard in 1810 led to a much wider use of the harp. Meyerbeer and Wagner began to use it extensively in their operas, and Berlioz introduced it into symphonic music of the romantic school.
The perfection of the pedal mechanism by Sebastian Erard in 1810 led to a much wider use of the harp. Meyerbeer and Wagner started using it extensively in their operas, and Berlioz incorporated it into the symphonic music of the Romantic era.
The harp is provided with seven pedals, operated by the player’s feet. By means of these pedals the tension of the strings can be instantly altered, thus changing the pitch of the scale, or, in other words, putting the harp into another key. It is this mechanism which enables the harpist of to-day to play in all keys, while in earlier times only a few were practicable.
The harp comes with seven pedals that the player operates with their feet. These pedals instantly adjust the tension of the strings, changing the pitch of the scale, or, in simpler terms, allowing the harp to be played in different keys. This mechanism is what enables today's harpists to play in all keys, whereas in the past, only a few were really usable.
The reader of orchestra scores will find that harp parts are written on two staves, like piano music, and placed in the score just above the parts of the string quintet. The harp is a non-transposing instrument and its music is written as it sounds. Sometimes, however, in remote keys composers remove some of a harp-player’s difficulties by changing the key signature. For instance, certain kinds of passages, if written [Pg 41] in the key of B natural, are very difficult for the harp, whereas if written in C flat (which sounds precisely the same) they become easy. This is because the Erard system of tuning makes C flat the fundamental key of the harp.
The reader of orchestral scores will notice that harp parts are written on two staves, similar to piano music, and are positioned in the score just above the parts for the string quintet. The harp is a non-transposing instrument, so its music is written to match the sound produced. However, in more complex keys, composers sometimes simplify things for harp players by changing the key signature. For example, certain passages written in the key of B natural can be very challenging for the harp, while if written in C flat (which sounds exactly the same), they become much easier. This is due to the Erard system of tuning, which designates C flat as the fundamental key of the harp. [Pg 41]
The instrument is much used in our day in orchestral music, as well as in the opera. Its treatment is usually either in broad chords, as in the air “Roi du ciel” in Meyerbeer’s “Le Prophète,” or in running arpeggios, as in “Anges purs et radieux” in “Faust.” Glissando effects—smooth-running passages produced by sliding the hands rapidly over the strings without stopping to pluck them—are often used in modern music, as in the orchestral arrangements of Liszt’s Hungarian rhapsodies. Harmonics can be produced on the harp. They sound like the faint tinkle of a muffled glass bell, and are very pretty when properly applied. A familiar example is to be found in the waltz of the sylphs in the ballet music of Berlioz’s “Damnation of Faust.”
The instrument is widely used today in orchestral music, as well as in opera. Its playing style usually involves either broad chords, like in the aria “Roi du ciel” from Meyerbeer’s “Le Prophète,” or flowing arpeggios, as seen in “Anges purs et radieux” from “Faust.” Glissando effects—smooth passages created by sliding the hands quickly over the strings without stopping to pluck them—are common in modern music, such as in the orchestral arrangements of Liszt’s Hungarian rhapsodies. Harmonics can be produced on the harp. They sound like the soft tinkling of a muted glass bell, and are very beautiful when used appropriately. A well-known example can be found in the waltz of the sylphs from Berlioz’s ballet music of “Damnation of Faust.”
Wagner has used the harp very freely in his music dramas. Sometimes he employs it historically, sometimes for the sake of its luxuriant tone in the accompaniment of lyric song, and again with a remarkable insight into its power of combination with other instruments in descriptive [Pg 42] music. In this latter manner it is superbly used in the magic fire-music of “Die Walküre:”
Wagner has used the harp quite freely in his music dramas. Sometimes he uses it in a historical way, sometimes for its rich tone in support of lyric singing, and other times with a keen understanding of how it combines with other instruments in descriptive music. In this latter way, it is beautifully used in the magic fire music of “Die Walküre:” [Pg 42]


[Pg 43]
[Pg 43]
V
The Orchestral Score
The printed form of an orchestral composition, or one for voices and orchestra, is called a score. (German, Partitur.) In it are comprised the parts to be played by all the instruments. It is read across the page precisely as a piece of piano music is, with the important difference that while in a piano piece there are only two staves—one for the treble and one for the bass—in an orchestral score there are from sixteen to twenty-four, according to the number of the parts. The name of the instrument is printed at the beginning of its part and also the key in which it stands, if it is a transposing instrument. The customary order of the instruments from top to bottom of the page is as follows: Flutes, oboes, clarinets, bassoons, horns, trumpets, trombones, tuba, tympani, and other instruments of percussion, harps, violins, violas, ’cellos, and double-basses. This order is sometimes changed for the sake of convenience. If there are voices, as in an opera or oratorio, they will be found in the older scores between the viola and ’cello parts. The more modern custom is to put them above the first violins, so that the parts of the string choir are not separated. In a concerto the solo instrument is similarly placed. The names of the instruments of the score are usually given in Italian, but sometimes in German. The following list gives the names of the instruments in English, Italian, German, and French, with the plurals where needed:
The printed version of an orchestral composition, or one for voices and orchestra, is called a score. (German, Partitur.) It includes the parts for all the instruments. It's read across the page just like a piece of piano music, but there's a key difference: while a piano piece has only two staves—one for the treble and one for the bass—in an orchestral score, there are between sixteen and twenty-four, depending on the number of parts. The name of each instrument is printed at the start of its part, along with the key, if it's a transposing instrument. The standard order of instruments from top to bottom of the page is: Flutes, oboes, clarinets, bassoons, horns, trumpets, trombones, tuba, timpani, and other percussion instruments, harps, violins, violas, cellos, and double-basses. This order may be adjusted for convenience. If vocals are included, like in an opera or oratorio, they'll typically be found in older scores between the viola and cello parts. The more modern practice is to place them above the first violins, so the string sections stay together. In a concerto, the solo instrument is similarly positioned. The names of the instruments in the score are usually given in Italian, but sometimes in German. The following list provides the names of the instruments in English, Italian, German, and French, with plurals where necessary:
Italian. | German. | French. | |
---|---|---|---|
Flute | Flautŏ(i) | Flöte(n) | Flute. |
Oboe | Oboe(i) | Hoboe(n) | Hautbois. |
English Horn | Cornŏ Inglese | Englische Horn | Cor Anglais. |
Clarinet | Clarinettŏ(i) | Clarinette(n) | Clarinette. |
Bassoon | Fagottŏ(i) | Fagott(e) | Basson. |
Horn | Cornŏ(i) | Horn(er) | Cor. |
Trumpet | Tromba(e) | Trompete(n) | Trompette. |
Cornet | Cornettó(i) | Cornet(te) | Cornette à pistons. |
Trombone | Trombonó(i) | Posaune(n) | Trombone. |
Tuba | Tuba | Tuba | Tuba. |
Bass Drum | Gran Cassa | Grosse Trommel | Grosse Caisse. |
Cymbals | Piatti | Becken | Cymbales. |
Kettle-drums | Timpani | Pauken | Timbales. |
Harp | Arpa | Harfe | Harpe. |
Violin | Violino | Geige | Violone. |
Viola | Viola | Bratsche | Alto. |
Violoncello | Violoncello | Violoncell | Violoncelle. |
Bass | Basso | Bass | Contrebasse. |
[Pg 44]
[Pg 44]


[Pg 45]
[Pg 45]


[Pg 46] In German scores the Italian names are often used. Sometimes each instrument has a separate staff, but more frequently a pair of instruments, as two flutes, or two oboes, is written on one staff. In [Pg 47] such cases the tails of the notes for the upper instrument are turned up and of those for the lower down. If there are two sets of tails, one up and one down, to one set of notes, it indicates that two instruments are to play the same passage. In the case of four horns, two staves are used, the upper for the first and second and the lower for the third and fourth. In old scores the reader will find many different orders of placing the instruments on the page. That which I have given is the present method.
[Pg 46] In German scores, Italian names are often used. Sometimes each instrument has its own staff, but more often, a pair of instruments like two flutes or two oboes is written on one staff. In such cases, the note stems for the upper instrument point up, while those for the lower instrument point down. If there are two sets of stems, one up and one down, for a single set of notes, it shows that two instruments are meant to play the same part. For four horns, two staves are used, with the upper one for the first and second horns and the lower one for the third and fourth. In older scores, you'll find various ways of arranging the instruments on the page. What I have provided is the current method. [Pg 47]
The reader will find many directions and abbreviations in scores not used in piano music. The meaning of any of these can be ascertained by consulting a dictionary of music. One or two may be explained here. The word “divisi” written over a part in double notes (or more) means that one instrument is to play the upper line and another the lower. First violins are thus sometimes subdivided, and so are other stringed instruments. The words “A due” are used as a direction for all to play together again. The letters A, B, C, etc., often seen at the tops and bottoms of pages, are for the convenience of conductors in rehearsing.
The reader will come across many terms and abbreviations in scores that aren't typically used in piano music. The meaning of these can be found by checking a music dictionary. A couple of them can be clarified here. The term “divisi” written over a part with double notes (or more) indicates that one instrument should play the upper line and another the lower. First violins are sometimes split this way, as are other string instruments. The phrase “A due” serves as a direction for everyone to play together again. The letters A, B, C, etc., often seen at the tops and bottoms of pages, are meant for the convenience of conductors during rehearsals.
“If you please, gentlemen, let us go back to four bars before the letter G,” or something of that kind, is a familiar remark at orchestra rehearsals. [Pg 48]
“If it’s okay with you, gentlemen, let’s go back to four bars before the letter G,” or something like that, is a common phrase at orchestra rehearsals. [Pg 48]
The reader will find that in many scores space is saved by omitting from some pages the staves of those instruments which have nothing on those pages. Usually when this is done the names of the instruments which are playing are indicated by abbreviations placed just above the staves, as “Fl., Cl., Fg.,” etc. The full names of the instruments employed in any movement are given only at the beginning, and the reader of scores should note how many staves are employed. Sometimes the flutes are written on two staves, sometimes on one. The same is true of the other wind-instruments. Usually the wood-choir staves are bound together by a continuous double bar at the beginning of each page, and sometimes the horns have one double bar. The score-reader will soon become familiar with the various arrangements. One who loves orchestral music and wishes to understand how its effects are produced should study scores. Study your score first at home and try to imagine how it ought to sound. Then follow the performance with it and note what combinations of instruments produce particular effects. After a time you will find that your understanding of the orchestra has greatly increased, and you will get new enjoyment from the performance of symphonies and overtures.
The reader will notice that in many scores, space is saved by leaving out the staves for instruments that aren’t playing on certain pages. When this happens, the names of the instruments that are playing are usually indicated by abbreviations placed just above the staves, like “Fl., Cl., Fg.,” etc. The full names of the instruments used in any movement are only given at the beginning, and those reading the scores should keep track of how many staves are used. Sometimes the flutes are written on two staves, sometimes on one. The same goes for other wind instruments. Typically, the woodwind staves are connected by a continuous double bar at the beginning of each page, and sometimes the horns have one double bar as well. The score reader will quickly become familiar with the different setups. Anyone who loves orchestral music and wants to understand how its effects are created should study scores. Examine your score at home first and try to imagine how it should sound. Then follow along during the performance and note which combinations of instruments create specific effects. Over time, you’ll find that your understanding of the orchestra has greatly improved, and you’ll enjoy the performances of symphonies and overtures even more.

Copyright by the London Stereoscopic Co.
Copyright by the London Stereoscopic Co.
ARTHUR NIKISCH.
Arthur Nikisch.
[Pg 49] The conventional seating-plan of the orchestra will help the reader to familiarize himself with the instruments. In concerts the stringed instruments are always placed at the front of the stage, with the wind-instruments behind them, in order that the tone of the strings may come out fully and without obstruction. The first violins are always on the left of the audience, and second violins on the right. Violas are usually placed immediately behind the second violins, though some conductors put them behind the first. The ’cellos are arranged usually on the side opposite the violas, and double-basses are placed at the sides or the back, according to the conductor’s idea. The wood occupies the middle of the stage, and the brass and instruments of percussion are at the rear. The diagram on the next page shows the seating plan of the Boston Symphony Orchestra. [Pg 50]
[Pg 49] The traditional seating arrangement of the orchestra will help the reader get acquainted with the instruments. In concerts, string instruments are always positioned at the front of the stage, with wind instruments behind them, so the strings' sound can fully resonate without interference. The first violins are always on the left from the audience's perspective, while the second violins are on the right. Violas are typically placed directly behind the second violins, although some conductors prefer to position them behind the first violins. The cellos are usually arranged on the side opposite the violas, and double basses are situated at the sides or back, depending on the conductor’s preference. The woodwinds are in the center of the stage, with brass and percussion instruments at the back. The diagram on the next page shows the seating plan of the Boston Symphony Orchestra. [Pg 50]

A—Conductor. | F—Flutes. | L—Trombones. |
B—First Violins. | G—Oboes and English Horn. | M—Tuba. |
C—Second Violins. | H—Clarinets. | N—Tympani. |
D—Violas. | I—Bassoons. | P—Triangle. |
E—Violoncellos. | J—Horns. | K—Trumpets. |
O—Double Basses. | Q—Bass Drum. | R—Bells, etc. |
Seating Plan of the Boston Symphony Orchestra.
Seating Plan for the Boston Symphony Orchestra.
[Pg 51] Amateurs will find that they must extend their musical knowledge a little, if they desire to read orchestra scores. Persons who have studied only piano playing are nonplussed when they find themselves in the presence of transposing instruments and other clefs than those known as the treble and the bass. I have already briefly explained the peculiarity of what are called transposing instruments, but it will be well to give the reader some further help in dealing with them in reading scores. A question which I have frequently heard is, “Why don’t they make all instruments in C?” The answer to this question is that there could only be one reason for doing so, namely, to make it easy for amateurs to read scores. There are many more substantial reasons for making instruments in various keys. For instance, brass instruments produce most easily and with the finest tone and richest sonority their natural notes—those notes which are produced without any aid from valves or pistons as the notes of a cavalry bugle. If a composer in writing a brilliant march in B natural, a bright and incisive key for the strings, wishes to introduce trumpets, he can make most effective use of those in B natural. But it is not possible always to have clarinets, trumpets, and horns in every key ready for instant use, so custom and experience have induced musicians to make a judicious selection. Clarinets in A and B flat are now used far more than those in C. As Gevaert says: “The choice among the three clarinets is not always made from the simple consideration of facility; often it is guided by the character of the tone peculiar to each. The clarinet in C has a timbre brilliant almost to rudeness.” He further notes that it is [Pg 52] therefore used by the classic composers mostly in brilliant movements in the simple diatonic scales. The clarinet in B flat or that in A may be chosen for reasons of a like nature. The reader, however, will probably be more interested in knowing how he is to read clarinet parts. If they are in C, he will have no trouble, because there will be no transposition. A clarinet in B flat playing music written in C, sounds one tone lower than that scale. Hence the key of C is used for a clarinet in B flat only when the violins are playing in B flat.
[Pg 51] Amateurs will find that they need to expand their musical knowledge a bit if they want to read orchestra scores. Anyone who has only studied piano is often confused when faced with transposing instruments and clefs other than treble and bass. I have already briefly explained how transposing instruments work, but it would be helpful to provide the reader with more guidance on how to handle them while reading scores. A common question I often hear is, “Why don’t they make all instruments in C?” The answer is that the only reason for doing so would be to make it easier for amateurs to read scores. There are many more significant reasons for having instruments in different keys. For example, brass instruments perform best and produce the richest tone on their natural notes—those notes played without valves or pistons, like the notes of a cavalry bugle. If a composer writes a brilliant march in B natural, a bright and lively key for strings, they can use trumpets in B natural to great effect. However, it's not always possible to have clarinets, trumpets, and horns in every key available for immediate use, so tradition and experience have led musicians to make a thoughtful selection. Clarinets in A and B flat are now much more commonly used than those in C. As Gevaert states: “The choice among the three clarinets is not always based solely on ease of use; often it is influenced by the unique character of each tone. The clarinet in C has a timbre that's bright almost to the point of harshness.” He further observes that it is therefore mostly used by classical composers in lively movements in simple diatonic scales. A clarinet in B flat or A may be chosen for similar reasons. However, the reader will probably be more interested in how to read clarinet parts. If they are in C, there won't be any issues, as there won’t be transposition. A clarinet in B flat playing music written in C sounds one tone lower than that scale. Thus, the key of C is used for a clarinet in B flat only when the violins are playing in B flat. [Pg 52]
In other words, every sound which issues from a B flat clarinet is one whole tone lower than that written in the score. If you write C, the instrument sounds B flat. If you wish the instrument to sound C, you must write D. If you wish it to sound F sharp, you must write G sharp. If you wish it to sound E natural, you must write F sharp or G flat.
In other words, every sound that comes from a B flat clarinet is one whole tone lower than what’s written in the music. If you write C, the instrument plays B flat. If you want the instrument to play C, you have to write D. If you want it to sound F sharp, you need to write G sharp. If you want it to sound E natural, you should write F sharp or G flat.
The composer has the choice of two methods of writing his clarinet part. He may write always without any key signature and mark all flats and sharps as accidentals, or he may use a key signature. Custom has sanctioned the latter method, which is the more rational. I have just said that every tone which issues from a B flat clarinet is a whole interval below the written character. Therefore, all music for a B flat [Pg 53] clarinet must be written one interval higher than it is intended to sound, and this, the reader will see, simply results in transposing a B flat clarinet part into a key one tone higher than that of the composition. For a composition in C write for B flat clarinets in the key of D. For one in D write for B flat clarinets in E. For one in E flat write for B flat clarinets in F. There is another simple way of looking at this matter. Clarinets in B flat have already two flats in their open scale. If you want them to play in C, you must contradict these two flats by two sharps, and two sharps are the signature of the key of D. Hence, write in D for B flat clarinets to play in C. In reading a score all that the amateur needs to do is to remember that every note written for the B flat clarinet sounds one tone lower than written. Thus the chord of C for two flutes, two oboes, and two clarinets might be written as at A so as to sound as at B.
The composer has two options for writing the clarinet part. He can choose to write without any key signature and indicate all flats and sharps as accidentals, or he can use a key signature. The latter method, which is the more logical choice, is commonly accepted. As I mentioned, every note played on a B flat clarinet sounds a whole step lower than what is written. Therefore, all music for a B flat clarinet needs to be written one whole step higher than it’s meant to sound, which simply means transposing the B flat clarinet part into a key that is one whole step above the original composition. For a piece in C, write for B flat clarinets in D. For a piece in D, write for B flat clarinets in E. For a piece in E flat, write for B flat clarinets in F. Another straightforward way to consider this is that B flat clarinets have two flats in their open scale. If you want them to play in C, you need to counteract those two flats with two sharps, which is the signature for the key of D. So, you write in D for B flat clarinets to sound in C. When reading a score, all the amateur needs to remember is that every note written for the B flat clarinet sounds one whole step lower than what is written. Therefore, the chord of C for two flutes, two oboes, and two clarinets might be notated as in A to sound as in B.

[Pg 54] In the case of clarinets in A the same principles apply. The clarinet in A sounds A when C is written, and it sounds the entire scale of A when the scale of C is written. As C is one tone and a half above A, it follows that notes for the A clarinet are always written a tone and a half higher than the sounds to be produced, and the score-reader must conceive the A clarinet parts as sounding that much lower than they are written. Thus, to get C out of an A clarinet, you must write E flat, and to make an A clarinet play in unison with flutes in the key of C, you must write in E flat for the clarinet. The chord just written would have to be rewritten thus:
[Pg 54] The same rules apply to clarinets in A. The A clarinet plays an A note when a C is written, and it sounds the entire scale of A when the C scale is written. Since C is a tone and a half above A, it means that notes for the A clarinet are always written a tone and a half higher than the sounds they actually produce, and someone reading the score must understand that the A clarinet parts sound that much lower than they're written. Therefore, to get a C from an A clarinet, you need to write an E flat, and to have an A clarinet play in unison with flutes in the key of C, you must write an E flat for the clarinet. The chord just written would need to be rewritten like this:

One of the peculiarities of orchestra scores is that music for horns and trumpets is always written without any key signature—that is, just as if it were in C major—and all the sharps and flats are put in as accidentals. This makes difficult reading at times for an amateur. In [Pg 55] order to aid the music-lover I give herewith the written notes and the corresponding real sounds of the horn in F, which is the most frequently used. The same table will answer for the trumpet in F.
One of the quirks of orchestra scores is that music for horns and trumpets is always written without any key signature—meaning it's like it's in C major—and all the sharps and flats are added as accidentals. This can make it tough for amateurs to read sometimes. In [Pg 55] order to help music lovers, I’m providing the written notes along with the actual sounds of the horn in F, which is the most commonly used. The same table will work for the trumpet in F.

The rules of transposition given above apply to all music for transposing instruments. A tuba in E flat, for instance, is one which sounds E flat when the composer writes C. Persons accustomed to sight-reading with a “movable Do” have very little trouble in the study of orchestra scores, and I earnestly advise all who wish to read scores to study sight-reading.
The transposition rules mentioned above apply to all music for transposing instruments. A tuba in E flat, for example, sounds E flat when the composer writes C. People who are used to sight-reading with a "movable Do" don’t usually have much trouble with orchestra scores, and I strongly recommend that anyone who wants to read scores should practice sight-reading.
Next comes the matter of clefs. As I have stated, it is customary to write the viola part on the alto clef. When a bassoon or a ’cello runs up so high that it is inconvenient to employ the bass clef, the tenor clef is used, and if it goes still higher, the treble clef may be introduced. These various clefs are troublesome to the amateur because he is familiar only with the treble and bass clefs. The treble clef is [Pg 56] known also as the G clef; because the character
Next, let's talk about clefs. As I mentioned, it's standard to write the viola part in the alto clef. When a bassoon or a cello goes so high that using the bass clef becomes inconvenient, the tenor clef is used, and if it goes even higher, the treble clef can be introduced. These different clefs can be a hassle for beginners since they usually only know the treble and bass clefs. The treble clef is also called the G clef because the symbol

is placed upon the second line to indicate that the treble G is there located. A clef sign simply fixes the place of some note, and the others are located accordingly. The bass clef is also called the F clef, because the character
is placed on the second line to show that the treble G is located there. A clef sign just establishes the position of a specific note, and the others are positioned relative to it. The bass clef is also known as the F clef because the symbol

is placed so as to indicate that F is on the fourth line. Now in the alto and tenor clefs the character
is placed so as to indicate that F is on the fourth line. Now in the alto and tenor clefs the character

is used, and its purpose is to locate the note C. In the alto clef it is on the third line, where B is in the treble clef. In the tenor clef it is on the fourth line, where D is in the treble clef. The question which will arise in the amateur’s mind is this: Which C is it that is thus located? The answer is simple and easily remembered. It is best expressed by the following illustration:
is used, and its purpose is to find the note C. In the alto clef, it appears on the third line, which is where B is in the treble clef. In the tenor clef, it’s on the fourth line, where D is in the treble clef. The question an amateur might have is: Which C is being referenced? The answer is straightforward and can be easily remembered. It’s best illustrated by the following example:

Here are two scales, one alto and one tenor, with the real sounds.
Here are two scales, one for alto and one for tenor, with the actual sounds.

[Pg 57]
[Pg 57]

It will be seen from these illustrations that the C located by the clef sign in the alto on the third line and the tenor clef on the fourth line is the one situated on the first leger line below the staff in the treble clef. Having this fact in mind, the lover of orchestral music can learn, with a little practice, to read viola parts and ’cello or bassoon passages which run up into the tenor clef. The following illustration shows a ’cello passage with the middle measure written on the tenor clef, and also the same passage written wholly on the bass clef:
It can be seen from these examples that the C indicated by the clef sign in the alto on the third line and the tenor clef on the fourth line is the one located on the first ledger line below the staff in the treble clef. Keeping this in mind, anyone who enjoys orchestral music can learn, with a bit of practice, to read viola parts and 'cello or bassoon sections that extend into the tenor clef. The following illustration displays a 'cello passage with the middle measure written in the tenor clef, as well as the same passage entirely in the bass clef:

In some scores the music-lover will find the three trombone parts written on three clefs, alto, tenor, and bass, while in others they are [Pg 58] written on the bass clef only. I have already noted that bass clarinet parts are written sometimes on the treble and sometimes on the bass clef. The former is always used by French composers, and the latter nearly always by Germans. [Pg 59]
In some scores, music lovers will find the three trombone parts written on three different clefs: alto, tenor, and bass. In other scores, they're only written on the bass clef. I've already mentioned that bass clarinet parts can sometimes be written on the treble clef and sometimes on the bass clef. French composers always use the former, while Germans almost always use the latter. [Pg 58] [Pg 59]
PART II
How the Orchestra is Used
How the Orchestra is Used
[Pg 60]
[Pg 60]
[Pg 61]
[Pg 61]
VI
General Principles
The orchestra is an instrument, and composers have developed methods of writing for it. The fundamental principles of these methods constitute that branch of musical art called orchestration. It is not the purpose of the present volume to teach that branch; but it is entirely within its province to point out to the reader how composers make use of their majestic and many-voiced instrument. In compass and power alone it surpasses all other instruments. The compass of the modern orchestra is enormous. It extends from grave, low sounds to those of such acute pitch that the ear does not relish them if uttered loudly. The extreme normal compass is shown by the following illustration:
The orchestra is an instrument, and composers have created ways to write for it. The key principles of these methods make up the field of music known as orchestration. This book doesn't aim to teach that field; however, it definitely intends to show the reader how composers utilize their grand, multi-voiced instrument. In terms of range and power alone, it outmatches all other instruments. The range of the modern orchestra is vast. It spans from deep, low sounds to such high pitches that they can be unpleasant to hear if played loudly. The full normal range is illustrated by the following example:

[Pg 62] Mr. Corder, in his “Modern Orchestra and How to Write for It,” gives this interesting dynamic scale: “Suppose the degrees of sound-intensity to range from 1 (in ppp) to 12 (in fff); then one might say roughly that
[Pg 62] Mr. Corder, in his “Modern Orchestra and How to Write for It,” presents this interesting dynamic scale: “Suppose the levels of sound intensity range from 1 (in ppp) to 12 (in fff); then one could say roughly that
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 | 11 | 12 | |
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Violins have a range | ||||||||||||
of from | ppp | — | mp | — | — | — | mf | — | — | fff | — | — |
The other strings | ppp | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | fff | — | — | — |
Clarinets on high notes | — | — | ppp | — | — | — | — | fff | — | — | — | — |
Clarinets low, flutes, | ||||||||||||
oboes, and bassoons | — | — | ppp | — | — | — | fff | — | — | — | — | — |
Horns | — | ppp | — | — | — | — | — | — | fff | — | — | — |
Trumpets, trombones, | ||||||||||||
and drums | ppp | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | — | fff |
Harps | — | — | ppp | — | — | fff | — | — | — | — | — | — |
I should modify this by shifting the pianissimo of low clarinet tones back to 2, that of drums forward to 2, and that of trumpets and trombones to 4.
I should change this by moving the quiet tones of the low clarinet back to 2, the drums forward to 2, and the trumpets and trombones to 4.
Now, if there were nothing else to be considered, a composer would have to work according to some system in using the compass and force of his orchestra. What is known in regard to the method of doing so is the result of many long years of experiment by the early writers. In a general way, I may say that composers in writing a passage for the entire orchestra can give the melody to all the soprano instruments, the alto to all that have an alto compass, the tenor to all the tenors, [Pg 63] and the bass to all the basses. For example—flutes, clarinets, oboes, and violins may utter a melody in unison, while the remaining instruments supply the accompaniment. But it is rare that a composer writes in only four parts for orchestra. He usually spreads his chords out to six or eight parts, thus gaining in richness and sonority of tone.
Now, if there was nothing else to think about, a composer would need to follow a certain system when using the range and power of their orchestra. What we know about how to do this comes from many years of experimentation by earlier composers. Generally speaking, I can say that composers, when writing a piece for the full orchestra, can assign the melody to all the soprano instruments, the alto to all the alto-range instruments, the tenor to all the tenors, [Pg 63] and the bass to all the bass instruments. For example, flutes, clarinets, oboes, and violins can play a melody together, while the other instruments provide the accompaniment. However, it’s uncommon for a composer to write for only four parts in an orchestra. They typically expand their chords to six or eight parts, which adds more richness and depth to the overall sound.
But compass and power are not all the composer must consider. He has at his command a great variety of tonal qualities. We have already seen how the characteristics of certain instruments, singing as solo voices, are peculiarly suited to the embodiment of special kinds of music. Now the writer for orchestra must study the result of every possible combination of all or any of the instruments to the end that he may produce just the desired tone, and that he may never produce anything different from that which he wishes. The tonal tints of a modern orchestra are the richest pigments of the musician’s palette, and he must know how to use them either singly or combined, just as the painter knows how to use his colors. The simplest way in which I can point out the peculiarities of the composer’s work is by discussing separately the uses of the different choirs. [Pg 64]
But technique and skill aren't the only things a composer needs to think about. There’s a wide range of sounds available to him. We’ve already seen how the unique qualities of certain instruments, especially when sung as solo voices, are particularly suited to express specific types of music. Now, the orchestral writer has to explore the results of every possible combination of any or all instruments so he can create exactly the sound he wants and ensure he never produces anything other than what he intends. The tonal colors of a modern orchestra are the richest shades on a musician’s palette, and he must understand how to use them individually or together, just like a painter knows how to mix his colors. The easiest way for me to highlight the distinctive features of the composer’s work is by discussing the uses of the different sections separately. [Pg 64]
The principal requirements of good orchestration are solidity, balance of tone, contrast, and variety. Solidity is obtained by a proper dispersal of the harmony, so that certain notes in the chords do not stand out too prominently at the expense of others. The composer must not only be a master of harmony, but he must have the true harmonic feeling. He must have that almost instinctive grasp of the proportions of chords which can come only from real musical gifts cultivated by long familiarity with modern music. This feeling is not necessarily accompanied by restlessness and complexity of harmony. The harmonic effect of a simple diatonic Bach chorale is infinitely grander than the most intricate chromatic convolutions of a Charbrier overture. The true harmonic feeling is one that always produces artistic proportions, and these will permeate the instrumentation and produce solidity, provided the composer has sufficient intimacy with the instruments to prevent him from giving them the wrong notes. The foundation of solidity in orchestration is good writing for the strings. Their part of the score must always be planned with complete harmonic skill, not only because they are the main prop of the whole instrumental body, but because the man who cannot write well for strings will inevitably fail in handling wood and brass. [Pg 65]
The main requirements for good orchestration are stability, tonal balance, contrast, and variety. Stability is achieved by properly distributing the harmony, so that certain notes in the chords don’t stand out too much at the expense of others. The composer needs to be not just skilled in harmony but to also possess a genuine harmonic intuition. They must have an almost instinctive understanding of chord proportions that comes only from real musical talent honed by a long familiarity with modern music. This intuition doesn’t have to involve restlessness or complex harmony. The harmonic impact of a simple diatonic Bach chorale is far more impressive than the most intricate chromatic twists of a Charbrier overture. True harmonic intuition always generates artistic proportions, which will seep into the instrumentation and create stability, as long as the composer knows the instruments well enough to avoid giving them the wrong notes. The foundation of stability in orchestration lies in good writing for the strings. Their part in the score must always be crafted with complete harmonic skill, not just because they are the backbone of the entire ensemble, but also because someone who can’t write well for strings will inevitably struggle with woodwinds and brass. [Pg 65]
Solidity in tutti passages merges itself in balance of tone. This depends also upon a proper dispersal of the harmony and on a knowledge of the relative power of the instruments of the three choirs. For instance, it is not possible to play wood as softly as strings. Consequently, in a pianissimo the composer must know just what wood instruments to use and what parts of the chord to give them, lest he overbalance his strings. Solidity requires great skill in writing the middle voices. If they are too strong, the orchestration is muddy; if they are too weak, it is thin, and the orchestra, as the saying goes, is “all top and bottom.”
Solidity in all sections blends together in a balanced tone. This also relies on a proper distribution of harmony and an understanding of the relative strength of the instruments in the three choirs. For example, you can't play woodwinds as softly as strings. Therefore, in a pianissimo, the composer must know exactly which wood instruments to use and which notes of the chord to assign to them, to avoid overpowering the strings. Solidity requires a high level of skill in writing the middle voices. If they are too strong, the orchestration becomes unclear; if they are too weak, it feels thin, and the orchestra, as the saying goes, is “all top and bottom.”
Contrast is necessary in order that monotony of color may be avoided. It is obtained by using the three choirs of the orchestra separately, by employing any subdivision of each, or using simultaneously subdivisions of two, and so on. Variety is produced by mixing the tints. For example, a passage played by a flute alone changes color when an oboe sings in unison with the flute. Another tint results when a clarinet is added. It is not necessary to pursue this topic further than to say that the composer must know what tints will mix well to produce a new one.
Contrast is essential to prevent a dullness of color. It can be achieved by using the three sections of the orchestra separately, by utilizing any subset of each, or by combining sections of two at the same time, and so on. Variety comes from blending the colors. For instance, a melody played solely by a flute changes in color when an oboe plays along with it. Another shade emerges when a clarinet joins in. There's no need to elaborate further except to say that the composer must understand which colors blend harmoniously to create a new one.
[Pg 66]
[Pg 66]
VII
The Strings
Since the foundation of good orchestration is skilful writing for the strings, it is natural to consider that department first. The strings, as we shall see, came to their proper place in the orchestra in the works of the operatic composers. In Cavalli’s “Giasone” (1649) we find vocal parts accompanied in something like the Handelian style by two violins and a bass. About twenty-five years later we find the string quartet, two violins, viola, and bass, established by Alessandro Scarlatti, founder of the Neapolitan school of opera. Since that time the strings have been the foundation of the orchestra, and although methods of writing for them have greatly changed, the fundamental principles remain the same.
Since the cornerstone of good orchestration is skillful writing for the strings, it's natural to address that section first. The strings, as we will see, found their rightful place in the orchestra thanks to the works of operatic composers. In Cavalli’s “Giasone” (1649), we see vocal parts accompanied in a way reminiscent of Handel by two violins and a bass. About twenty-five years later, the string quartet—two violins, viola, and bass—was established by Alessandro Scarlatti, the founder of the Neapolitan school of opera. Since then, the strings have been the backbone of the orchestra, and although the techniques for writing for them have evolved, the essential principles remain unchanged.
The general disposition of the strings may be fairly expressed by the formula already given, but worth repeating here: First violins equal sopranos, second violins equal altos, violas equal tenors, ’cellos [Pg 67] equal barytones, and double-basses equal basses. In certain circumstances this disposition is altered, because the compass of violas makes it possible for them to sing soprano music, though with a distinctly individual tone, while the ’cello can cover the ordinary range of an entire quartet. The individuality of tone possessed by the various stringed instruments is tolerably well known, except in the case of the viola. It is to its beautiful quality of tone that it owes its chief value. Gloomy, sombre, and even foreboding in the lower register, in its upper range it becomes mellow, tender, pathetic, and inexpressibly winning. No wonder that Berlioz selected it for the voice of the melancholy Childe Harold, or that Brahms made it play such important parts in his quartets. Its dramatic power is now universally recognized by composers, and from the position of a misunderstood and ignored member of the string quintet, it is rapidly advancing to the equally undesirable condition of being severely overworked.
The general arrangement of the strings can be accurately described by the formula already mentioned, and it’s worth repeating here: first violins match sopranos, second violins match altos, violas match tenors, cellos match baritones, and double basses match basses. In some cases, this arrangement changes because the range of violas allows them to play soprano music, though they have a distinct sound, while the cello can cover the usual range of an entire quartet. The unique sound of the different string instruments is generally well known, except for the viola. Its beautiful tone is what gives it most of its value. It sounds dark, somber, and even ominous in the lower register, but becomes rich, gentle, moving, and incredibly charming in its upper range. It’s no surprise that Berlioz chose it for the voice of the melancholic Childe Harold, or that Brahms wrote it significant parts in his quartets. Its dramatic impact is now widely acknowledged by composers, and from being a misunderstood and overlooked member of the string quintet, it is quickly moving towards the equally undesirable state of being overused.
It is a curious fact, however, that many of the younger composers show a singular want of skill in using the viola, and it is this which often upsets the balance of their orchestration. Perhaps this is due in some measure to the Brahms cult. Brahms’s orchestration is not a good model. [Pg 68] His middle parts are almost always written too low or too heavily, and hence his instrumentation is muddy. It depends upon what a man is writing. If he is writing a symphony in the classic style, let him follow as closely as possible the methods of Beethoven. If he wishes to be more modern—and it is natural that he should—let him study Dvorák, whose instrumentation is almost perfect. Tschaikowsky’s is, too, but the reader should remember that most of his works are sombre in thought, and that hence the instrumental style will not be suitable to light themes. Liszt and Rubinstein are good models. For thick, luscious coloring there is nothing better than Rubinstein’s “Antony and Cleopatra” overture, and I can recommend also a careful study of Goldmark’s overtures. Wagner, of course, is full of instruction, but a composer must know a good deal before he can discriminate sufficiently to get any benefit from Wagner. But to return to the viola.
It's interesting to note that many of the younger composers struggle with the viola, and this often throws off the balance of their orchestration. This might be partly due to the influence of the Brahms cult. Brahms’s orchestration isn’t a great example to follow. His middle parts are usually written too low or too heavily, making his instrumentation sound muddy. It really depends on what someone is writing. If he’s composing a symphony in the classic style, he should stick closely to Beethoven’s methods. If he wants to be more modern— which is totally understandable—he should study Dvořák, whose instrumentation is nearly perfect. Tchaikovsky’s is great too, but keep in mind that most of his works are serious in nature, so his instrumental style won’t suit lighter themes. Liszt and Rubinstein are also good models. For rich, vivid color, you can't beat Rubinstein’s “Antony and Cleopatra” overture, and I also recommend carefully studying Goldmark’s overtures. Wagner is full of valuable lessons, but a composer needs to know quite a bit before they can really benefit from Wagner. But back to the viola. [Pg 68]
The placing of the viola part is of the greatest importance in the color of the strings. For instance, in the slow movement of the famous piano concerto in E flat, called the “Emperor,” Beethoven mutes his violins, but not his violas, and writes the basses pizzicati, thus: [Pg 69]
The positioning of the viola part is crucial for the color of the strings. For example, in the slow movement of the well-known piano concerto in E flat, called the “Emperor,” Beethoven mutes his violins but not his violas, and instructs the basses to play pizzicato, like this: [Pg 69]

The individuality and penetrating quality of the viola tone brings it out with marked effect in this passage, and Beethoven knew that so well that in the third measure he kept his second violins down and gave the violas the real alto part, because the harmonic significance of the passage rested so largely upon the F sharp, E sharp, E, and D sharp. If the second violin and viola parts in that passage were exchanged, the effect would be altogether different.
The unique and powerful sound of the viola really stands out in this part, and Beethoven was aware of that. In the third measure, he held back the second violins and assigned the main alto part to the violas, because the harmonic importance of this section relied heavily on the F sharp, E sharp, E, and D sharp notes. If the second violin and viola parts were swapped in this section, the outcome would be completely different.
The increase of skill in the treatment of viola and ’cello parts, but chiefly of the former, is coincident with the development of the science of orchestration. Indeed, it may fairly be said that first-rate writing for the strings, which is the foundation of orchestration, depends largely upon the treatment of the viola part. Any composer knows enough when writing for strings to give his melody to the first violins and his bass to the basses. But the character of his harmony is [Pg 70] to be determined by his middle voices, and it is in the treatment of these that we see growth in skill. Berlioz, in his treatise on instrumentation, says of the viola: “It has, nevertheless, been long neglected, or put to a use as unimportant as ineffectual—that of merely doubling, in octave, the upper part of the bass. There are many causes that have operated to induce the unjust servitude of this noble instrument. In the first place, the majority of the composers of the last century, rarely writing in four real parts, scarcely knew what to do with it; and when they did not readily find some filling-up notes in the chords for it to do, they hastily wrote the fatal ‘col basso’—sometimes with so much inattention that it produced a doubling in the octave of the basses, irreconcilable either with the harmony or the melody or with both one and the other. Moreover, it was unfortunately impossible at that time to write anything for the violas of a prominent character, requiring even ordinary skill in execution. Viola-players were always taken from among the refuse of violinists. When a musician found himself incapable of creditably filling the place of violinist, he took refuge among the violas.”
The growing skill in handling viola and ’cello parts, especially the viola, aligns with the rise of orchestration as a discipline. It can be confidently said that high-quality writing for strings, which is the backbone of orchestration, largely relies on how the viola part is treated. Any composer understands that when writing for strings, the melody should go to the first violins and the bass to the basses. However, the character of the harmony is shaped by the middle voices, and it's in the development of these where we see improved skill. Berlioz, in his treatise on instrumentation, remarks about the viola: “It has, however, been long overlooked or used in such an unimportant and ineffective way—as simply doubling the upper part of the bass an octave higher. There are many reasons that have led to the unjust treatment of this noble instrument. Firstly, most composers from the last century rarely wrote in four real parts and often didn’t know how to use it; when they couldn't find fitting notes in the chords for it, they quickly resorted to the fatal ‘col basso’—sometimes carelessly enough that it resulted in an octave doubling of the bass, which conflicted with both the harmony and the melody or both. Additionally, at that time, it was unfortunately not feasible to write anything for the violas that had a significant character, demanding even basic skill in execution. Viola players were often selected from among less successful violinists. When a musician found they couldn’t competently fill the role of a violinist, they sought refuge among the violas.” [Pg 70]
Haydn’s symphonic scores show skill coupled with restraint in the viola [Pg 71] parts. The instrument is never called upon to play passages of any difficulty except when errors will be covered up in the general body of tone. But in his scores the viola takes its correct place in a pure four-part harmony. It is seldom that Haydn undertakes to give his strings more than four parts to sing, though the reader will perceive that as each instrument is easily capable of producing two notes at a time, eight real parts can be written for a string quartet. The ’cello has few independent passages in Haydn’s symphonies. It usually doubles the bass part. Mozart, without attempting to give the viola or the ’cello difficulties to overcome, made wider use of their special tone-qualities than did Haydn, though it must be admitted that Mozart’s symphonies show a great deal of three-part writing for strings. Gluck, in his operas, brought out the dramatic value of the lower register of the viola, and Spontini, in “La Vestale,” was the first who assigned the melody to it. Méhul, the French opera-writer, used it so much that Grétry exclaimed, “I’d give a guinea to hear a first string.” Beethoven, in the andante of his fifth symphony, gives the melody in the opening bars to the violas and ’cellos in unison, a very rich and beautiful effect. [Pg 72]
Haydn’s symphonic scores showcase skill combined with restraint in the viola parts. The instrument is rarely asked to perform challenging passages unless they can be masked by the overall sound. However, in his compositions, the viola occupies its rightful place in a clean four-part harmony. It's uncommon for Haydn to give his string instruments more than four parts to play, even though it's clear that each instrument is able to produce two notes simultaneously, allowing for eight real parts to be written for a string quartet. The cello has few standalone passages in Haydn's symphonies and usually doubles the bass part. Mozart, while not pushing the viola or cello with complex challenges, utilized their unique sound qualities more than Haydn did, though it’s worth noting that Mozart’s symphonies feature a considerable amount of three-part writing for strings. Gluck, in his operas, highlighted the dramatic richness of the viola’s lower register, and Spontini, in “La Vestale,” was the first to assign the melody to it. Méhul, a French opera composer, featured it so often that Grétry remarked, “I’d pay a guinea to hear a first string.” In the andante of his fifth symphony, Beethoven gives the melody in the opening bars to the violas and cellos in unison, creating a rich and beautiful effect. [Pg 72]
In general it may be said that the string quintet did not attain the full measure of its usefulness in the hands of the classical writers till the viola and the ’cello had begun to be treated with freedom and independence. Then there was no longer any difficulty in writing a full four-part harmony, upon which depends the solidity of the string portion of the score. The best test of scoring for strings is to consider whether it sounds full and self-sustaining when unsupported by any wind-instruments. The lover of orchestral music should give especial attention to Beethoven’s scores. Here he will find the perfection of the classical style of writing, which employed almost exclusively a four-part scheme and kept each instrument in its normal place except when used as a solo voice. With the romantic movement scoring for strings began its search after unusual tone-tints, and composers began to learn that they could obtain these in two or three ways—by increasing the number of voices in their harmony, by taking advantage of the large registers of violas and ’cellos and sometimes carrying them above the violins, and by employing solo instruments among the orchestral mass. The beautiful effect of divided string parts in a simple form is heard in the opening measures of Mendelssohn’s “Midsummer Night’s Dream” overture, but if the reader desires to find [Pg 73] the extreme modern style of writing for numerous voices in the strings he must go to Wagner. He, indeed, is guilty of occasional abuses of the practice. In the accompaniment to Brangäne’s song of warning in the second act of “Tristan und Isolde” he divides the strings into fifteen parts, but I am quite sure that no human ear can hear all of them. It is seldom that more than eight real parts can be made advantageous, and then chiefly in slow movements.
In general, the string quintet didn't fully reach its potential in classical music until the viola and cello were treated with more freedom and independence. Once that happened, writing a complete four-part harmony, which is essential for a solid string section, became straightforward. The best way to test string scoring is to see if it sounds full and self-sustaining without any wind instruments. Fans of orchestral music should pay special attention to Beethoven's scores. Here, they'll find the pinnacle of classical writing that mainly used a four-part structure and kept each instrument in its usual role unless it was featured as a solo. With the rise of the romantic movement, string scoring began exploring unique tone colors, and composers learned they could achieve this in a few ways—by adding more voices to their harmonies, by leveraging the extensive ranges of violas and cellos and sometimes placing them above the violins, and by using solo instruments within the orchestral ensemble. The lovely effect of divided string parts in a straightforward form can be heard in the opening measures of Mendelssohn’s “Midsummer Night’s Dream” overture. However, for those looking for the highly modern approach to writing for many voices in strings, they should look to Wagner. He often pushes the boundaries with this practice. In the accompaniment to Brangäne’s warning song in the second act of “Tristan und Isolde,” he splits the strings into fifteen parts, but I'm certain no human ear can pick out all of them. It's rare for more than eight distinct parts to be truly effective, and this is mainly in slow movements.
It all depends upon what the composer wishes to accomplish. If he desires brilliancy in an animated movement, he will use his first violins in unison and above the middle of their register. If he wishes to get more brilliancy, he will write them still higher and double them with the second violins in the octave below. If he writes them in the middle register and doubles them with the second violins, he will get more sonority, but less brilliancy. On the other hand, if he desires richness of harmony coupled with mystery, or ethereal effects, let him divide his strings into several parts. After that it is a mere matter of register. If he writes high, he will get aërial delicacy and tenderness; if he writes low, he will get pathos as well as tenderness. No better examples can be offered than these from “Lohengrin” and “Die Walküre:” [Pg 74]
It all depends on what the composer wants to achieve. If he aims for brilliance in a lively movement, he will use the first violins in unison and play them in the upper part of their range. If he wants even more brightness, he will write for them even higher and double them with the second violins playing an octave lower. If he writes them in the middle range and doubles them with the second violins, he will get more richness in sound, but less brilliance. On the other hand, if he wants rich harmonies combined with mystery or ethereal effects, he should divide his strings into several parts. After that, it’s just a question of register. If he writes high, he will get airy delicacy and tenderness; if he writes low, he will achieve both pathos and tenderness. No better examples can be given than these from “Lohengrin” and “Die Walküre:” [Pg 74]


[Pg 75]
[Pg 75]


But, after all, these effects are special, and the fundamental principles of sound writing for the strings are best exemplified by the writings of the classical composers. The chief question for the student of music is: Which of the classical writers is the best model? This is a question not easily answered. Haydn’s earlier works are not at all to be commended, while his later compositions are full of sound scoring. His quartets are not excelled as examples of clear, well-balanced writing for strings, but his symphonies do not reveal fully the value of the viola.
But, after all, these effects are special, and the basic principles of good writing for strings are best shown through the works of classical composers. The main question for music students is: Which classical writer is the best model? This question isn’t easy to answer. Haydn’s earlier works aren’t really commendable, while his later compositions are filled with solid scoring. His quartets are unmatched as examples of clear, well-balanced writing for strings, but his symphonies don’t fully showcase the value of the viola.
Specific instrumental coloring began with Mozart, and yet he is the finest example of continence and sobriety in orchestration. His string [Pg 76] parts are generally substantial and well planned, but, nevertheless, I should hardly advise a beginner to study them. The older composers are like ancient history; one must have sufficient information to know what to accept and what to reject in order to read them with advantage. It will not profit any beginner in instrumentation to go farther back than Beethoven. The great symphonist’s string plan is always notable for its breadth, solidity, and flexibility, and there is nothing in the fundamental work of string writing which cannot be learned from him. But there is another composer whose works are neglected by professors and masters, and yet whose orchestration excels all other in the classic school in buoyancy, clarity, suavity, and polish, and to the constant study of his scores I heartily commend all who desire to master the basis of modern instrumentation. I mean Felix Mendelssohn Bartholdy. His “Midsummer Night’s Dream” is in itself an epitome of the science of instrumentation, and students and amateurs would do well to give many days and nights to its study.
Specific instrumental coloring started with Mozart, and yet he represents the best example of restraint and clarity in orchestration. His string parts are generally substantial and well organized, but I would hardly recommend a beginner to study them. The older composers are like ancient history; one must have enough knowledge to know what to accept and what to reject in order to benefit from reading them. A beginner in instrumentation won’t gain much by going back further than Beethoven. The great symphonist’s string writing is always remarkable for its breadth, solidity, and flexibility, and there’s nothing fundamental about string writing that can't be learned from him. However, there’s another composer whose works are often overlooked by teachers and masters, yet his orchestration stands out in the classic school for its lightness, clarity, smoothness, and refinement. I wholeheartedly recommend the constant study of his scores to anyone who wants to master the foundations of modern instrumentation. I’m talking about Felix Mendelssohn Bartholdy. His “Midsummer Night’s Dream” is essentially a summary of the art of instrumentation, and students and hobbyists would benefit greatly from dedicating many days and nights to studying it.
I advise the student of orchestral effects to examine particularly the overture. For lightness and transparency nothing in the way of writing for the strings excels the opening measures for first and second [Pg 77] violins in four parts, with the addition at bar 24 of a most effective pizzicato passage for viola. On page 5 (Litolff score) the first violins, doubled an octave below by the second, carry the melody against a tutti in which the string plan is notable for its simplicity and solidity. On page 9 there is a model passage for strings with violas divided, which is worthy of attention. A concert-goer should seek out such passages in scores and mark them. Then at a performance of the work note the effect. By following out such a plan the music-lover will soon come to perceive the differences between the conservative scoring of the early classical writers and the venturesome and brilliant achievements of the moderns. From such a clear and simple plan of dividing strings as that of Mendelssohn in the overture quoted grew the amazing contrivances of modern writers, such as the passage in Liszt’s “Mazeppa” for first violins in three parts, the third playing pizzicato against shakes by the other two, second violins in three parts, violas and ’celli in two each; or the thunder-storm in Wagner’s “Das Rheingold,” where the strings play a broken chord in twenty different ways, or the superbly effective passage from Nicode’s “Das Meer,” which is constructed on this scheme of divided strings with contrary motions: [Pg 78]
I recommend that students interested in orchestral effects pay special attention to the overture. For lightness and clarity, nothing beats the opening measures for first and second violins in four parts, especially with the addition of a very effective pizzicato section for viola at bar 24. On page 5 (Litolff score), the first violins, doubled an octave lower by the second violins, carry the melody against a full orchestra where the string arrangement stands out for its simplicity and strength. On page 9, there’s an excellent passage for strings with divided violas that deserves attention. Concert-goers should look for such passages in scores and highlight them. Then, at a performance, pay attention to the impact. By doing this, music lovers will soon notice the differences between the traditional scoring of early classical composers and the bold and brilliant works of modern composers. From the clear and straightforward division of strings, like that of Mendelssohn in the mentioned overture, evolved the incredible techniques of modern writers, such as the passage in Liszt’s “Mazeppa” for first violins in three parts, with the third playing pizzicato alongside the others doing shakes, and second violins in three parts, with violas and cellos in pairs; or the thunderstorm in Wagner’s “Das Rheingold,” where the strings play a broken chord in twenty different ways, or the stunning passage from Nicode’s “Das Meer,” constructed on this division of strings with opposite motions:




[Pg 79]
[Pg 79]




[Pg 80] The effect of this remarkable passage is one of the things which go to show what can be done in the way of tone-coloring with strings alone. The vital points for the reader to bear in mind are those which have been brought out as to the distribution of the harmony in the strings and the necessity of writing for them so that they are independent. To follow the development of skill in this among the successive composers is one of the most fascinating branches of musical study.
[Pg 80] The impact of this incredible section highlights what can be achieved in terms of tone color using just strings. The key points for the reader to remember are about how harmony is distributed in the strings and the importance of composing for them in a way that maintains their independence. Tracking the growth of this skill among different composers is one of the most captivating areas of music study.
Note.—The tremolo and pizzicato of bowed instruments were invented by Monteverde (1568-1643). The striking of chords on such instruments was introduced into orchestral music by Haydn. Mutes were first used in the orchestra by Gluck in his “Armide.” The oldest and most familiar example of the contrast between muted and unmuted strings is found in the “Creation” at the words, “And God said ‘Let there be light.’” The mutes are taken off at “And there was light.” The oldest known use of harmonics is that in Philidor’s opera “Tom Jones” (1765). The division of violins into more than two parts was first employed by Weber. Beethoven introduced divided violas in the last movement of the Ninth Symphony.
Note.—The tremolo and pizzicato techniques for bowed instruments were created by Monteverdi (1568-1643). Haydn was the first to incorporate chord striking on these instruments into orchestral music. Gluck was the first to use mutes in the orchestra in his “Armide.” The oldest and most well-known example of the contrast between muted and unmuted strings is found in the “Creation” at the phrase, “And God said ‘Let there be light.’” The mutes are removed at “And there was light.” The earliest known use of harmonics is in Philidor’s opera “Tom Jones” (1765). Weber was the first to divide violins into more than two parts. Beethoven introduced divided violas in the final movement of the Ninth Symphony.
[Pg 81]
[Pg 81]
VIII
The Wood-Wind
Whence originated the custom of calling the collection of wooden wind-instruments used in the modern orchestra “the wood-wind,” I am quite sure I do not know. It is still more common among musicians to speak of them simply as “the wood,” notwithstanding that the stringed instruments played with a bow are also made of wood. It is a convenient term, and its meaning being pretty generally understood, only a purist in language would object to its employment. The “wood,” then, in the modern orchestra consists of flutes, oboes, clarinets, and bassoons. Of these instruments the flute is the oldest, and was the first to be used in those indiscriminate assemblies of instruments corresponding to orchestras in the early days of the art. The flute was used in ancient Egypt, and, for the matter of that, so was the oboe, which found its way into the orchestra at least as far back as Beaujoyeux’s “Ballet [Pg 82] Comique de la Reine” (1581). Everyone knows a flute when he sees it, and is acquainted with its tone, but I have learned by experience that very few persons know anything about the other wood instruments.
Where from the custom of calling the collection of wooden wind instruments used in the modern orchestra “the wood-wind” comes from, I really have no idea. Musicians often just refer to them as “the wood,” even though the string instruments played with a bow are also made of wood. It’s a convenient term, and its meaning is pretty well understood, so only a language purist would raise an issue with it. So, the “wood” in the modern orchestra includes flutes, oboes, clarinets, and bassoons. Among these, the flute is the oldest and was the first to be used in those mixed groups of instruments that resemble modern orchestras in the early days of the art. The flute was used in ancient Egypt, and so was the oboe, which became part of the orchestra as far back as Beaujoyeux’s “Ballet [Pg 82] Comique de la Reine” (1581). Everyone recognizes a flute when they see one and is familiar with its sound, but I’ve found that very few people know much about the other wood instruments.
Yet their importance in the modern orchestra cannot be overestimated. Half the tone-coloring of our symphonic works and operatic scores depends upon skilful combinations of the tone-tints of wooden wind-instruments either with one another or with other members of the band. It is almost wholly in the direction of variety of combination that the art of writing for wood-wind has developed. In the early days, before a system of enriched instrumentation had been developed, it was the custom to treat the wood-wind parts without any design that affected the display of their coloring qualities. Sebastian Bach’s scores, for instance, show a complete absorption of the polyphonic style. He regarded his instruments as so many voices, and he treated them as such. Each part was written in a manner essentially melodious, and related to the other parts strictly in contrapuntal style. The conception of purely orchestral effect did not find birth in the mind of Bach. He was too entirely occupied with the development of the polyphonic subject to discover the possibilities of mixed tone-tints. [Pg 83] Furthermore, he was not sufficiently imbued with a feeling for the harmonic style—the style in which a leading melody is supported by a subsidiary accompaniment founded on chords, as in our songs. This is the style on which our symphony rests, but it was foreign to Bach’s genius, which was fundamentally fugal.
Yet their importance in the modern orchestra cannot be overstated. Half of the tone-coloring in our symphonic works and operatic scores relies on skillful combinations of the tone colors from woodwind instruments, either among themselves or with other sections of the orchestra. The art of writing for woodwinds has mostly developed towards creating a variety of combinations. In the early days, before a richer system of instrumentation existed, woodwind parts were often treated without any design that highlighted their color qualities. For example, Sebastian Bach’s scores show a complete focus on polyphonic style. He viewed his instruments as many voices and treated them that way. Each part was written to be essentially melodic and related to the others strictly in a contrapuntal style. The idea of purely orchestral effects did not emerge in Bach’s mind. He was so absorbed in developing the polyphonic subject that he didn’t explore the possibilities of mixed tone colors. Furthermore, he didn’t possess a strong sense of harmonic style—the style where a leading melody is supported by an accompanying harmony based on chords, like in our songs. This is the style upon which our symphony is based, but it was foreign to Bach’s genius, which was fundamentally fugal. [Pg 83]
Hence, Bach did little toward developing the combining powers of the wood-wind. As one writer has excellently said: “He preferred to employ wind-instruments for the purpose of enlarging his original design, rather than that of strengthening or decorating it. When he added a flute or an oboe to his score, he loved not only to make it obbligato, but to write it in such wise that it should form a new real part. Hence, even in his regularly constructed arias, the voice is scarcely so much accompanied by the various instruments employed as made to sing in concert with them, the score containing as many real parts as there are solo voices or instruments introduced into it.” Dr. Parry, in his “Evolution of the Art of Music,” in speaking of the difference between instrumentation of this kind and that of a later date, says: “In the instrumentation of the great masters of the earlier generation, the tone-qualities seem to be divided from one another by [Pg 84] innate repulsion; but in the harmonic style they seem to melt into one another insensibly, and to become part of a composite mass of harmony whose shades are constantly shifting and varying.”
Hence, Bach did little to develop the combining powers of the woodwinds. As one writer has excellently put it: “He preferred to use wind instruments to expand his original design rather than to reinforce or embellish it. When he added a flute or an oboe to his score, he didn’t just make it obbligato; he wrote it in such a way that it became a new, genuine part. Thus, even in his well-structured arias, the voice isn’t so much accompanied by the various instruments as it is made to sing together with them, with the score containing as many real parts as there are solo voices or instruments included.” Dr. Parry, in his “Evolution of the Art of Music,” discusses the difference between this kind of instrumentation and that of a later period, stating: “In the instrumentation of the great masters of the earlier generation, the tone qualities seem to be separated from one another by an innate repulsion; but in the harmonic style, they seem to blend into each other effortlessly and become part of a composite mass of harmony whose nuances are constantly shifting and varying.”
Handel’s wood-wind is employed with greater variety than Bach’s. This was to be expected of a composer who, in the first place, was in closer touch with the public, and hence more likely to recognize and yield to the demand for effects. In the second place, Handel, not being secluded as Bach was, stood more forward in the march of musical evolution. He was an opera-writer, and this brought him into immediate contact with the harmonic style as practised by the Italian opera-writers. He learned from some of them, too, the use of grandiose mass effects. The application of these ideas to his instrumentation produced results far different from any conceived by the introspective and historically solitary genius of the great Bach. Handel used a larger orchestra than Bach, yet did many things in the same way. For example, he often wrote for his instruments in the polyphonic style, but in the accompaniments to his great choruses he wrote for several oboes in unison with the violins and a body of bassoons in unison with the basses. At other times he treated his wood-wind parts as figured ornamentation of the more simple string parts, and again he employed the strings and wind [Pg 85] alternately, as modern composers do so frequently. Flutes he rarely used except as solo instruments, as in the “Sweet Bird” aria, and clarinets he did not have. But the idea of using some of the wind-instruments, as horns and trumpets, in pairs, had come into existence in Handel’s time, and it was not long before this plan was applied also to the wood-wind.
Handel used woodwinds with more variety than Bach. This was expected from a composer who was more in touch with the public and more likely to recognize and respond to their demand for different effects. Additionally, because Handel wasn’t as isolated as Bach, he was more involved in the progression of musical evolution. As an opera composer, he had direct contact with the harmonic style of Italian opera writers. He also learned from some of them the use of grand, dramatic effects. Applying these ideas to his instrumentation led to results that were very different from what the introspective and historically solitary genius of Bach conceived. Handel employed a larger orchestra than Bach but did many things similarly. For example, he often wrote for his instruments in a polyphonic style, but in the accompaniments to his grand choruses, he arranged several oboes to play in unison with the violins and a group of bassoons in unison with the basses. At other times, he treated his woodwind parts as decorative embellishments to simpler string parts, and he also alternated between strings and winds, as modern composers frequently do. He rarely used flutes except as solo instruments, like in the “Sweet Bird” aria, and he didn’t use clarinets. However, the practice of using pairs of some wind instruments, like horns and trumpets, became popular during Handel's time, and it wasn’t long before this approach was applied to woodwinds as well.
Its employment naturally began with the recognition of the inability of the wood-wind to play such intricate passages as strings could, and also of their power to sustain the long notes of supporting chords. These features of wood-wind writing existed even in the scores of Scarlatti and Lulli, but it was not until the harmonic style began to be clearly distinguished from the polyphonic in orchestral works that they became generally recognized. In the scores of Emmanuel Bach, the son of Sebastian, we begin to find wood-wind treated in the pure classic style. The chords, to be sure, are very thin, and the composer shows a “’prentice hand” at the dovetailing of his wind parts together so as to make a firm structure, but the skeleton of the modern form is there.
Its use naturally started with the realization that woodwinds couldn't play as intricate passages as strings could, and that they had the ability to sustain long notes in supporting chords. These characteristics of woodwind writing were present even in the scores of Scarlatti and Lully, but it wasn’t until the harmonic style became clearly distinguished from the polyphonic style in orchestral works that they were widely acknowledged. In the scores of Emmanuel Bach, the son of Sebastian, we begin to see woodwinds treated in a pure classic style. The chords are quite sparse, and the composer shows a “’prentice hand” in weaving his wind parts together to create a solid structure, but the framework of the modern form is evident.
Haydn’s scoring shows a curious combination of Handelian ideas with later developments. The Handelian plan of strengthening string parts [Pg 86] with wind parts in unison seems to have taken some hold of Haydn, for he rarely writes unsupported wood-wind passages in his symphonies. He keeps his first violins singing the melody most of the time, and gets variety by doubling them, now with flutes, now with oboes, again with bassoons. A wind solo is very rare. He shows similar weakness in writing for the wood-wind in its internal relations. His clarinet parts usually double those of the oboes or the flutes. There is a great deal of octave writing, and he seldom gets more than three real parts in his wood-wind. It is only because he so constantly employs the string quartet that his symphonic scores do not sound thin. For example, in a passage for wood-wind and strings near the beginning of the familiar symphony in D, the first flute, except in one chord, doubles the second violin at the octave above, while the second flute supports the principal notes of the melody, played by the first violins, at the octave below. The oboes in unison double the violas at the upper octave. The two clarinets in unison double the first flute an octave below. The bassoons and basses play in unison. Toward the end of the last movement there is a passage in which the wind plays sustained chords, and in this the wood is treated in a more open style of harmony. Haydn learned much from Mozart, however, and in the “Creation” and “Seasons,” his writing for wood-wind shows much greater freedom, and a decidedly more definite attempt to get at the tonal characteristics of the instruments.
Haydn’s orchestration reveals an interesting mix of Handel's ideas with later developments. The Handelian approach of reinforcing string sections with woodwind parts in unison seems to have influenced Haydn, as he rarely writes for woodwind instruments without string support in his symphonies. He often has the first violins carry the melody, adding variety by pairing them with flutes, oboes, or bassoons. Woodwind solos are quite uncommon. He demonstrates a similar limitation in writing for woodwind in their internal interactions. His clarinet parts typically double those of the oboes or flutes. There's a lot of octave writing, and he rarely achieves more than three distinct parts in his woodwind sections. It’s largely because he consistently uses the string quartet that his symphonic scores don't sound sparse. For instance, in a passage for woodwinds and strings near the beginning of his well-known symphony in D, the first flute doubles the second violin an octave higher, except for one chord, while the second flute supports the main melody played by the first violins an octave lower. The oboes in unison double the violas an octave higher. The two clarinets in unison double the first flute an octave lower. The bassoons and basses play in unison. Towards the end of the last movement, there's a section where the woodwinds play sustained chords, and here the woodwind is treated with a more open style of harmony. However, Haydn learned a lot from Mozart, and in the “Creation” and “Seasons,” his writing for woodwind shows much greater freedom and a clear attempt to capture the tonal qualities of the instruments.

HAYDN.
Haydn.
[Pg 87] There can be no question that Mozart’s orchestration shows a large improvement on Haydn’s, and it is, perhaps, easier for the amateur to discern this in his treatment of the wood-wind than anywhere else. Passages contrasting the whole wood choir with the strings are more numerous, and the combinations of wood with strings show more definite attempts to put new tints upon the symphonic canvas. One finds, for instance, in the G minor symphony the flute tone contrasted with the oboe, combinations of flute and oboe contrasted with bassoon, combinations of flutes, bassoon, and strings, and other effects which give life and variety to the instrumental coloring.
[Pg 87] There's no doubt that Mozart’s orchestration is a significant improvement over Haydn’s, and it's perhaps easier for casual listeners to notice this in his handling of the woodwinds than in any other area. There are more passages that contrast the entire woodwind section with the strings, and the mixes of woodwinds and strings show clearer attempts to add new colors to the symphonic picture. For example, in the G minor symphony, you can hear the flute contrasting with the oboe, combinations of flute and oboe alongside the bassoon, mixes of flutes, bassoon, and strings, and other effects that bring life and variety to the instrumental palette.
Nevertheless, a conventional manner of treating the wood-wind found its way into general use, and it prevailed until the romanticists, in reaching out for new forms and manners of expression, revolutionized the system of scoring. The old-fashioned way was to employ the four pairs of wood-wind instruments always in thirds and sixths. The flutes almost always took the melody and the next interval below it. The oboes [Pg 88] either doubled the flutes in the octave below, or the first oboe doubled the second flute, and the second oboe took the next lower degree of the chord. The clarinets filled in the middle voices, and the bassoons played the bass, most frequently in octaves. The harmony was close, and the texture of this instrumentation was always solid, and, it must be admitted, at times muddy. This manner of writing is found in all Beethoven’s earlier works. For example, here is the opening of the first symphony, the horns and strings (pizzicati) also appearing in the score:
Nevertheless, a traditional way of handling the woodwind instruments became commonly accepted and lasted until the romantic composers, seeking new forms and means of expression, transformed the scoring system. The old method involved using four pairs of woodwind instruments typically in thirds and sixths. The flutes almost always carried the melody and the next interval below it. The oboes either doubled the flutes an octave lower, or the first oboe doubled the second flute, while the second oboe played the next lower note of the chord. The clarinets provided the middle voices, and the bassoons played the bass, most often in octaves. The harmony was tight, and the texture of this instrumentation was consistently solid, though it must be said, at times it became muddy. This writing style appears in all of Beethoven’s earlier works. For example, here is the opening of the first symphony, with the horns and strings (pizzicati) also featured in the score:

That is perfectly adapted to its purpose; but the chances are that a composer of to-day would have used three flutes, three clarinets, and three bassoons, and would have thickened the harmony by raising the [Pg 89] clarinet voices and bringing the first bassoon up nearer the middle, thus:
That is perfectly suited to its purpose; however, it's likely that a modern composer would have used three flutes, three clarinets, and three bassoons, and would have enriched the harmony by raising the clarinet parts and bringing the first bassoon closer to the middle, like this:

Brahms followed Beethoven’s early style of scoring for wood, which, it must always be recollected, lies at the foundation of the art. An example from Brahms’s C minor symphony will show the modern writer’s adoption of his predecessor’s plan:
Brahms followed Beethoven’s early style of writing for woodwinds, which, it’s important to remember, is fundamental to the art. An example from Brahms’s C minor symphony will illustrate how the modern composer adopted his predecessor’s approach:

[Pg 90] The modern style of writing for the wood-wind choir introduces more passages in contrary motion and a more dispersed harmony. The close chords of the classicists cannot be excelled for their purpose, but the romanticists had new aims and they took advantage not only of unusual tone-tints but of the increased richness brought about by using more voices and extending their chords. Beethoven’s symphonies show a rapid progress toward the modern flexibility of methods in writing for wood-wind. For instance, note the lovely effect of this piece of contrary motion in the Fifth Symphony:
[Pg 90] The contemporary style of writing for woodwind ensembles features more passages with contrary motion and a wider range of harmonies. The close chords used by classical composers are unmatched for their intended effect, but romantic composers had different goals and took advantage not only of unique tone colors but also of the greater richness achieved by using more voices and expanding their chords. Beethoven's symphonies demonstrate a quick evolution towards the modern methods of writing for woodwind instruments. For example, observe the beautiful effect of this passage with contrary motion in the Fifth Symphony:

As we advance through the pages of the master’s symphonies we find a constantly increasing flexibility in the treatment of the wood, until in the Ninth we meet with passages containing effects which, when [Pg 91] closely examined, seem to be almost amazingly modern. Of course, one never finds in Beethoven’s scores any attempt to make an effect for its own sake. The master symphonist was altogether too busy in giving his thought expression to think of little tricks of instrumental dress. Because of his continence in this matter some modern commentators have expressed the belief that these symphonies would be improved if re-orchestrated according to contemporaneous methods. I presume that someone will eventually try the experiment, and then it will be discovered that Beethoven’s instrumentation was perfectly adapted to his musical ideas. On the other hand, a good deal of our modern music would stand revealed in its naked thinness if it were re-orchestrated in the austere style of Beethoven or with the sunny simplicity of the Mozartian manner. The extreme development of wood-wind writing as known in our day is to be found in the scores of Wagner. No one has surpassed his treatment of the wood in his earlier dramas, and the reader may accept Elsa’s entrance to the cathedral in Act II. of “Lohengrin,” and the exit of Elizabeth in Act III. of “Tannhäuser,” as complete expositions of writing for the unsupported wood-wind. In the introduction to the third act of “Lohengrin” appears this passage, which shows how Wagner could use his wood in relation to the rest of his orchestra: [Pg 92]
As we move through the pages of the master’s symphonies, we see a growing flexibility in how he handles the woodwinds, culminating in the Ninth, where we encounter passages that, when closely examined, seem surprisingly modern. However, you won’t find in Beethoven’s scores any attempts to create effects just for the sake of it. The master symphonist was too focused on expressing his ideas to worry about little tricks of instrumentation. Because of his restraint in this area, some modern commentators believe these symphonies would benefit from being re-orchestrated with contemporary methods. I suspect someone will eventually try this experiment, only to find that Beethoven’s instrumentation perfectly matches his musical ideas. On the flip side, much of our modern music would seem lacking if it were re-orchestrated in Beethoven's austere style or with the cheerful simplicity of Mozart. The advanced woodwind writing we know today is found in Wagner's scores. No one has surpassed his treatment of woodwinds in his earlier works, and readers can look at Elsa’s entrance to the cathedral in Act II of “Lohengrin” and Elizabeth’s exit in Act III of “Tannhäuser” as prime examples of writing for unaccompanied woodwinds. In the introduction to the third act of “Lohengrin,” there is a passage that demonstrates how Wagner skillfully integrates his woodwinds with the rest of the orchestra:




[Pg 93]
[Pg 93]




[Pg 94] The reader will at once see the open style in which the wood-wind parts are constructed. The horns serve to enrich and deepen the harmony, while the strings are used chiefly for a rhythmic effect. Weber’s scoring is full of admirable writing for the wood-wind, and for other fine examples I can once more refer the reader to Mendelssohn’s “Midsummer Night’s Dream” music.
[Pg 94] The reader will immediately notice the straightforward way the woodwind parts are written. The horns add richness and depth to the harmony, while the strings primarily create a rhythmic effect. Weber’s scoring showcases impressive writing for the woodwinds, and for more great examples, I can once again point the reader to Mendelssohn’s “Midsummer Night’s Dream” music.
The immense variety of coloring to be obtained from the wood is due largely to its power of producing independent harmony. Owing to the large register of the clarinets, they can be used as either soprano or low contralto instruments, while the wide scale of the bassoons permits them to be treated as basses, barytones, or tenors. It thus becomes possible to write in full and euphonious four-part harmony for two flutes and two clarinets, two oboes and two clarinets, two flutes and two bassoons, two oboes and two bassoons, or two clarinets and two bassoons. Each of these combinations differs in color from the others. If now a bass clarinet be added, it becomes possible to give it the fundamental bass and to use the bassoons for middle voices. The addition of an English horn gives further possibilities. If the number of flutes, clarinets, and bassoons be increased to three of each, the [Pg 95] composer has still more combinations. And when it is recollected that every one of these wind-instruments can be used as a solo voice, the range of variety becomes wider yet. But the reader must also bear in mind that the addition of horns and strings still further alters the tonal colors. In short, the wood-wind provides the most useful means of giving variety of color to an orchestral score, and all modern writing abounds in ingenious, surprising, and expressive effects made with the wood choir. Yet when the thunder of an orchestral tutti is required, there is no better way to write for wood than that of Beethoven’s symphonies.
The huge variety of colors you can get from wood is mainly because of its ability to create independent harmony. Thanks to the wide range of the clarinets, they can function as either soprano or low contralto instruments, while the extensive range of the bassoons allows them to be treated as basses, baritones, or tenors. This makes it possible to compose rich and harmonious four-part arrangements for combinations like two flutes and two clarinets, two oboes and two clarinets, two flutes and two bassoons, two oboes and two bassoons, or two clarinets and two bassoons. Each of these combinations has a different sound. Adding a bass clarinet allows it to provide the fundamental bass and lets the bassoons take on the middle voices. Adding an English horn opens up even more possibilities. If you increase the number of flutes, clarinets, and bassoons to three of each, the composer has even more combinations. And when you remember that each of these wind instruments can also be used as a solo voice, the variety expands even further. However, the reader should keep in mind that adding horns and strings changes the tonal colors even more. In short, woodwinds offer the best way to bring a range of colors to an orchestral score, and modern compositions are full of clever, surprising, and expressive effects created with the woodwind section. Yet, when a powerful orchestral sound is needed, there’s no better way to write for woodwinds than in Beethoven’s symphonies.
I have said nothing yet in this chapter about the piccolo and the contra-fagotto. The piccolo is a much misused instrument, but it is capable of admirable effects, as may be seen in the storm in Beethoven’s “Pastoral” symphony, the magic-fire music in “Die Walküre,” or the “Dance of the Automatons” in Delibes’s “Sylvia” ballet. The double-bassoon, or contra-fagotto, allows the composer to carry the bass of his wood-wind choir an octave lower than the compass of the bassoon. The instrument is coarse in tone and not capable of performing rapid passages, but it has its value, as is shown by its employment in [Pg 96] the last movement of Beethoven’s Ninth Symphony or Brahms’s “Chorale St. Anthony” variations. A double-bass clarinet has been invented by a New York musician. I have not heard this instrument, but am told by competent judges that it is of high value. It carries the bass an octave lower than the bass clarinet, and is capable of great agility and of the finest gradations of tone. Richard Strauss, Weingartner, and other German musicians have promised to introduce it in future scores, and I dare say it will become a fixture in the orchestra. The great value of the clarinet color to the orchestra cannot be overestimated, and any increase in its range and intensity will surely be welcomed by composers.
I haven't talked about the piccolo and the contra-bassoon in this chapter yet. The piccolo is often misused, but it can create amazing effects, like in the storm scene from Beethoven’s “Pastoral” symphony, the magic-fire music in “Die Walküre,” or the “Dance of the Automatons” in Delibes’s “Sylvia” ballet. The double-bassoon, or contra-bassoon, lets composers take the bass from the woodwind section an octave lower than the regular bassoon. This instrument has a rough tone and struggles with fast passages, but it has its worth, as shown in the last movement of Beethoven’s Ninth Symphony or Brahms’s “Chorale St. Anthony” variations. A double-bass clarinet has been created by a musician from New York. I haven’t heard it myself, but I’ve been told by knowledgeable people that it’s very valuable. It plays bass an octave lower than the bass clarinet and can move quickly and produce subtle tone variations. Richard Strauss, Weingartner, and other German musicians plan to include it in future compositions, and I believe it will become a staple in orchestras. The importance of the clarinet's color in the orchestra can't be overstated, and any enhancement in its range and power will surely be appreciated by composers.
[Pg 97]
[Pg 97]
IX
The Brass and the “Battery”
The brass choir may be dismissed with comparative brevity, because methods of writing for it have changed on lines similar to those followed by the wood. In the early scores one finds that the trumpets were the most noticeable members of the brass, but in later music the horns are far and away the most important. It is possible to get almost any amount of richness, solidity, and variety of color out of an orchestra composed of the wood-wind, four horns, and strings; but if two trumpets and three trombones be substituted for the horns, the ingenuity of the composer will be severely taxed to prevent his work from sounding coarse in forte passages. One reason for this is that, when played moderato, horns blend perfectly with either wood or strings, and when played forte they become brassy in tone and can be made to give a good imitation of trombones. Let the reader note, when he again hears the prelude to the third act of “Lohengrin,” that the [Pg 98] brass theme is played the first time by the horns, which sound like trombones robbed of their roughness. The second time the theme is heard the trombones enter and the tone at once becomes brassy. In fact, it may be said at once that the brassy quality of brass instruments comes out fully only when the tone is forced. When it sings moderato the brass choir is capable of the most beautiful effects of rich, organ-like sonority. One has only to recall as a perfect example of this the prayer in the first act of “Lohengrin,” one of the most effective of all modern pieces of writing for brass. When however, immense sonority is required, the fortissimo of the brass choir is the composer’s heavy gun.
The brass section can be discussed briefly since the techniques for writing for it have evolved similarly to those for the woodwinds. In early compositions, trumpets stood out as the most prominent brass instruments, but in more recent music, the horns take the lead. An orchestra made up of woodwinds, four horns, and strings can produce a wide range of richness, depth, and color; however, if you replace the horns with two trumpets and three trombones, the composer faces a real challenge to keep the music from sounding harsh in louder sections. This is partly because, when played at a moderate volume, horns blend seamlessly with either woodwinds or strings, but at full volume, they take on a brassy tone and can imitate trombones well. When you listen to the prelude of the third act of “Lohengrin” again, notice that the brass theme is initially played by the horns, which sound like trombones without their rough edges. When the trombones join in the second instance, the tone immediately becomes more brassy. It's worth mentioning that the brassy quality of brass instruments is most pronounced when they are played forcefully. When played at a moderate volume, the brass section can create incredibly beautiful and rich, organ-like sounds. A perfect example of this is the prayer in the first act of “Lohengrin,” which is one of the most striking modern compositions for brass. However, when great volume is needed, the fortissimo of the brass section is the composer’s big weapon.
The treatment of the trumpet parts in the works of Bach and Handel will be found to differ greatly from the modern manner of writing for them. In the first place, the instruments employed by those composers must have had mouth-pieces of a different kind from those of to-day, or else the players knew some things which ours do not. Both Bach and Handel wrote passages for the trumpet so high that contemporaneous musicians cannot perform them. But that is a fact of less importance to the reader of the present book than the general principle of the scoring. [Pg 99] The old composers, then, wrote for trumpets in pairs and made them do a great deal of their work in octaves, except in some of the earliest scores, in which three trumpets were sometimes employed. Even Monteverde wrote for one clarino (a small trumpet), three trombe (the ordinary trumpet), and four tromboni. Handel used three trumpets in the “Dettingen Te Deum,” and Bach in the “Lobe den Herrn.”
The way Bach and Handel wrote for trumpet parts is very different from how we write for them today. First, the mouthpieces of the trumpets they used must have been different from what we use now, or the players had skills that today's players don’t have. Both Bach and Handel created trumpet parts so high that modern musicians can’t play them. However, this is less important for readers of this book than the overall style of the music. [Pg 99] The older composers usually wrote for pairs of trumpets and often had them play in octaves, except in some of the earliest scores where three trumpets were used. Even Monteverde wrote for one clarino (a small trumpet), three trombe (the typical trumpet), and four tromboni. Handel utilized three trumpets in the “Dettingen Te Deum,” and Bach did the same in the “Lobe den Herrn.”
Haydn used the trumpets, horns, and drums in the primitive style. The parts were written either in octaves or in sixths—occasionally in thirds—and on tonic and dominant chords, worked with the drums chiefly to enforce the tutti. Passages such as the following abound in Haydn’s symphonies:
Haydn used trumpets, horns, and drums in a basic style. The parts were written mostly in octaves or sixths—sometimes in thirds—and focused on tonic and dominant chords, mainly working with the drums to emphasize the full ensemble. You can find passages like the following throughout Haydn's symphonies:

It seems hardly possible to contrive a more hollow plan of writing than that which gives to five instruments only three notes of a chord (though the horn parts actually sound an octave lower), yet it is a [Pg 100] method which survived till Beethoven’s time, and, so far as the trumpets go, even the mighty Ludwig made no improvement upon it. Mozart’s scores show a very slight advance upon Haydn’s. He more frequently gives three notes of the chord to the brass instruments, but he uses them in the same general way. Of course, these old composers were much restricted by the mechanical limitations of their instruments. They had the old keyless horns and trumpets, and not having the whole scale at their command, they had to write with much restraint. In the horn parts they were further compelled to remember that certain notes could be produced only in the “stopped” form, that is, by the use of one hand inserted in the bell of the instrument. These stopped notes differed wholly in quality from the open tones. This trouble lasted until the F valve horn was perfected within the present century. Before that, however, composers had begun to endeavor to give more variety to the horn parts. Weber and Beethoven both made admirable use of this, the most noble and expressive of the brass instruments, and the scores of Rossini also contain some excellent specimens of horn writing. Rossini, indeed, who was the son of a horn-player, may be said to have introduced a new style of writing for [Pg 101] the instrument, treating it with great brilliancy as a florid solo singer. But the substantial principles of horn writing, as practised in the modern orchestra, began with Mozart, who used the instrument with much skill, especially in those scores which do not call for trumpets. Beethoven made more exacting demands upon the instrument, and there is no more effective horn passage in existence than the famous trio of the scherzo in the “Eroica” symphony. The passage is too long for quotation here, but is, of course, familiar to every music-lover. As an example of perfect writing for a solo horn nothing in symphonic music is better than the opening of the slow movement of Tschaikowsky’s fifth symphony.
It seems almost impossible to come up with a more superficial approach to writing than one that gives just three notes of a chord to five instruments (even though the horn parts actually sound an octave lower). Yet, this method lasted until Beethoven's time, and as far as trumpets go, even the great Ludwig didn't improve on it. Mozart’s scores show only a slight improvement over Haydn’s. He more often assigns three notes of the chord to the brass instruments, but he still uses them in a similar way. Naturally, these earlier composers were heavily limited by the mechanical constraints of their instruments. They had the old, keyless horns and trumpets, and since they didn't have the full scale at their disposal, they had to write with a lot of restraint. In the horn parts, they were further forced to keep in mind that certain notes could only be played in the "stopped" position, meaning they had to use one hand inside the bell of the instrument. These stopped notes sounded completely different from the open tones. This issue persisted until the F valve horn was perfected in the present century. Before that, however, composers started trying to add more variety to the horn parts. Weber and Beethoven both made excellent use of this most noble and expressive of the brass instruments, and Rossini's scores also feature some outstanding examples of horn writing. Rossini, who was the son of a horn player, can be said to have introduced a new style for the instrument, treating it like a brilliant, flamboyant soloist. Still, the foundational principles of horn writing as we know it in modern orchestras began with Mozart, who skillfully employed the instrument, especially in scores that don't require trumpets. Beethoven pushed the instrument's capabilities even further, and there's no more effective horn passage than the famous trio from the scherzo in the “Eroica” symphony. The passage is too long to quote here, but it's well known by every music lover. For a prime example of outstanding writing for a solo horn, nothing in symphonic music surpasses the opening of the slow movement of Tschaikovsky’s fifth symphony.
The methods of employing horns are so numerous that it is not practicable to recount all of them. It may be said, however, that in small scores, which call for wood-wind, two horns and strings, these instruments are often used to form chords with either the wind or the strings. Two horns and two bassoons make very effective harmony; in fact, when the four instruments are played moderato it is almost impossible to distinguish the bassoons from the horns. The latter also blend excellently with clarinets or the low tones of flutes. In writing for four horns some composers give the two upper notes of the chord to [Pg 102] the first and second and the two lower to the third and fourth, while others dovetail the parts by giving the first and third notes to the first and second horns. Of course, either method is subject to variation, as in a passage like this:
The ways of using horns are so many that it's impractical to list them all. However, it can be said that in smaller scores that require woodwinds, two horns, and strings, these instruments are often used to create chords with either the winds or the strings. Two horns and two bassoons create very effective harmony; in fact, when all four instruments are played at a moderate tempo, it's almost impossible to tell the bassoons apart from the horns. The horns also blend well with clarinets or the lower notes of flutes. When writing for four horns, some composers assign the two higher notes of the chord to the first and second horns and the two lower notes to the third and fourth, while others mix the parts by giving the first and third notes to the first and second horns. Of course, either method can vary, as seen in a passage like this:

Here the dovetailing of parts is carried throughout, yet in the third bar the third and fourth horns double the fundamental bass in octaves.
Here, the fitting together of parts is consistent, but in the third bar, the third and fourth horns play the fundamental bass in octaves.
The trombone is a very familiar instrument, and little needs to be added to what has already been said about it. There are slide and valve trombones. The former is the kind always employed in symphonic orchestras. The reader will recognize the instrument by the action of the player’s arm in moving the slide in and out. This shortening and lengthening of the tube of the instrument changes its key and thus enables the player to produce in open tones every note of the chromatic scale. The valve trombone is played with keys like those of a cornet. It is less brilliant and sonorous than the slide instrument. Trombones were employed as far back as Monteverde’s “Orfeo,” early in the [Pg 103] seventeenth century, but there seems to have been no definite use of them till the time of Gluck. He thoroughly appreciated the majestic dignity of dramatic utterance of which the trombone was capable, and he used it with eloquent effect. Furthermore, he established for all time the custom of writing for trombones in three parts. After him, as Gevaert pertinently notes, the three trombones became a distinctive feature of dramatic scores, for the classic symphony found no use for their immense sonority till Beethoven called it to his aid in voicing the triumphant emotions of the finale of the Fifth Symphony. Nevertheless, the trombone is not necessarily an instrument to be used only in producing great volumes of tone. A beautiful example of its value in rich and subdued harmony, in company with other instruments, is to be found in the accompaniment to Sarastro’s grand air in Mozart’s “Magic Flute,” as is shown on the following page. [Pg 104]
The trombone is a well-known instrument, and not much more needs to be said about it. There are slide and valve trombones. The slide trombone is the one commonly used in symphonic orchestras. You can identify it by the way the player moves the slide in and out with their arm. This action shortens and lengthens the tube of the instrument, changing its pitch and allowing the player to play every note in the chromatic scale in open tones. The valve trombone, on the other hand, is played with buttons similar to those on a cornet. It has a less brilliant and resonant sound compared to the slide trombone. Trombones were used as early as Monteverde’s “Orfeo” in the early seventeenth century, but they weren't definitively employed until the time of Gluck. He fully recognized the majestic and dramatic expression that the trombone could deliver, using it effectively in his compositions. Moreover, he set the precedent for writing trombone parts in three distinct voices. After him, as Gevaert wisely points out, the three trombone arrangement became a signature aspect of dramatic music, since the classical symphony didn’t utilize their powerful sound until Beethoven called upon them to express the triumphant emotions in the finale of the Fifth Symphony. Still, the trombone isn't just for playing loud music. A great example of its role in soft and rich harmony alongside other instruments can be heard in the accompaniment to Sarastro’s grand aria in Mozart’s “Magic Flute,” as shown on the next page.




[Pg 105] The three trombones, as in this example, usually play three-note chords, except when required to play in unison. The tuba fills out the harmony by doubling the bass part in the lower octave, or forming a four-part chord with the three trombones. There are tubas in several keys, but it is customary to write for the instrument without making any transposition. There is a fine tuba solo, in unison with the double-basses, at the opening of Wagner’s “Eine Faust” overture, and frequent examples of harmony for three trombones and tuba are to be found in the works of the Bayreuth master. In writing for the full brass choir alone a composer has the choice of several methods. He may give the melody to a trumpet or cornet, and use the other instruments for the harmony, or he may let a horn (or two horns in unison) take the melody. If he desires much force, he may give the melody to a trumpet and double it with a trombone. The natural method, however, is to let a trumpet, which is a good soprano voice, sing the air, while the other trumpet and three of the horns take the middle voices, the fourth horn and first and second trombones the lower middle voices, the third trombone and tuba the bass. Similar methods are employed where the brass joins with the rest of the orchestra in the thunder of a tutti fortissimo. The reader will find a most admirable example of this style of writing in the climax of the prelude to “Lohengrin.”
[Pg 105] The three trombones, like in this example, typically play three-note chords, unless they’re asked to play in unison. The tuba enhances the harmony by doubling the bass part in the lower octave or creating a four-part chord with the three trombones. There are tubas in various keys, but it’s standard to write for the instrument without transposing. There’s a great tuba solo, in unison with the double basses, at the beginning of Wagner’s “Eine Faust” overture, and you can find frequent instances of harmony for three trombones and tuba in the works of the Bayreuth master. When writing for the full brass ensemble, a composer has several approaches. They can assign the melody to a trumpet or cornet and use the other instruments for harmony, or let a horn (or two horns in unison) carry the melody. If they want a strong sound, they can give the melody to a trumpet and double it with a trombone. However, the natural approach is to have a trumpet, which serves as a good soprano voice, sing the melody while another trumpet and three of the horns provide the middle voices, the fourth horn and the first and second trombones the lower middle voices, and the third trombone and tuba the bass. Similar techniques are used when the brass section joins the rest of the orchestra in the powerful explosion of a tutti fortissimo. The reader will find an excellent example of this writing style in the climax of the prelude to “Lohengrin.”
It should be noted that the brass choir offers certain possibilities of color both within itself and in combination with other instruments. Three trumpets are capable of independent harmony, as are four horns, [Pg 106] and three trombones. Again, owing to the deep range of the horn, trumpets and horns may form a separate choir, or either trumpets or horns may be united with trombones. The entire brass band may be used with the wood, the strings being silent, or with the strings and without wood. Part of the brass may be used with part of the wood, as in the opening of the “Tannhäuser” overture, where two clarinets, two horns, and two bassoons produce a complete and satisfying harmony. Weird and bizarre effects can be produced by combinations of contrasting tones. Perhaps there is no better example than this remarkable use of flutes and trombones in Berlioz’s “Requiem”:
It’s important to note that the brass choir has specific color options both on its own and when blended with other instruments. Three trumpets can create their own harmonies, as can four horns, [Pg 106] and three trombones. Additionally, because of the deep range of the horn, trumpets and horns can form a separate group, or either trumpets or horns can join with trombones. The whole brass section can work with the woodwinds while the strings stay silent, or with the strings while the woodwinds are left out. Some brass can be combined with some woodwinds, as shown in the opening of the “Tannhäuser” overture, where two clarinets, two horns, and two bassoons create a complete and satisfying harmony. Strange and unique effects can arise from mixing different tones. One standout example is the incredible use of flutes and trombones in Berlioz’s “Requiem.”

[Pg 107] These notes had never been written for trombones before, and the composer, whose knowledge of the capacities of instruments has never been excelled, wrote in the margin of the score: “These notes are in the instruments and the players must get them out.”
[Pg 107] These notes had never been written for trombones before, and the composer, who has an unparalleled understanding of what instruments can do, jotted in the margin of the score: “These notes are within the instruments, and the players need to bring them out.”
As I have already noted, the operatic composers, in their search after dramatic effects, invented many of the instrumental combinations afterward adopted by the composers of purely orchestral music. The scores of Mozart and Gluck, for instance, are rich in passages which make use of the harmony of trombones, and the reader who wishes to study such effects in their early form should note the accompaniment to the words of the Commendatore in the cemetery scene of “Don Giovanni,” to the solo and chorus, “Dieu puissant,” Act I., scene 3, of Gluck’s “Alceste,” the air “Divinités du styx” in the same work, and the chorus “Vengeons et la nature,” Act II., scene 4, of “Iphigenie en Tauride.”
As I mentioned earlier, operatic composers, in their quest for dramatic effects, created many of the instrumental combinations that were later used by composers of purely orchestral music. For example, the scores of Mozart and Gluck are filled with sections that utilize the harmony of trombones. Readers interested in studying these effects in their early form should take note of the accompaniment to the words of the Commendatore in the cemetery scene of “Don Giovanni,” the solo and chorus “Dieu puissant,” Act I, scene 3, of Gluck’s “Alceste,” the aria “Divinités du styx” from the same work, and the chorus “Vengeons et la nature,” Act II, scene 4, of “Iphigenie en Tauride.”
All that the moderns can do with trombone harmonies they learned from Gluck, and by applying his use of dispersed chords to the whole brass choir they have produced new and noble orchestral colors. Where did Wagner learn such things as this, if not from Mozart and Gluck? [Pg 108]
All that modern musicians can achieve with trombone harmonies they picked up from Gluck, and by using his technique of spreading out chords across the entire brass section, they've created new and rich orchestral colors. Where did Wagner get such ideas if not from Mozart and Gluck? [Pg 108]


Not much needs to be added to that already written about the percussive instruments employed in the orchestra. The tympani remain the most important of these. It has been found that one player can perform upon [Pg 109] three drums with little more difficulty than upon two, and hence composers now frequently score for three, and sometimes for four. It is not uncommon for large symphonic scores to call for three tympani together with bass-drum, cymbals, and other percussive instruments. Something has already been said about the methods of writing for tympani, but there is a little to add. It has been noted that the primitive manner of writing was to give one drum the fundamental note of the tonic chord, and the other that of the dominant, but previous to Beethoven’s day it was the invariable practice to write the tonic above and the dominant below, thus tuning the drums at the interval of a fourth. The other style, with the tonic below and the dominant above, making a fifth, was introduced by Beethoven. The same master saw the advantage of tuning his tympani in still other ways, and in the finale of the Eighth Symphony and the scherzo of the Ninth he wrote for them in octaves at their extreme compass (F to F). Again, in the beginning of the last act of “Fidelio,” he wrote their parts in A and E flat in a dissonant passage of much dramatic power. Weber followed Beethoven’s example and wrote for tympani in C and A in the incantation scene of [Pg 110] “Der Freischütz,” and Wagner has made a similar use of the drums in the beginning of the third act of “Siegfried.”
Not much needs to be added to what's already been written about the percussion instruments used in the orchestra. The timpani are still the most important of these. It has been found that one player can handle three drums with little more difficulty than with two, so composers often write for three, and sometimes even four. It's common for large symphonic scores to call for three timpani alongside bass drum, cymbals, and other percussion instruments. Some methods for writing for timpani have already been discussed, but there's a bit more to add. It has been observed that the old way of writing was to assign one drum the fundamental note of the tonic chord and the other the dominant, but before Beethoven's time, it was standard practice to write the tonic above and the dominant below, thus tuning the drums a fourth apart. The other style, with the tonic below and the dominant above, creating a fifth, was introduced by Beethoven. This same composer recognized the benefits of tuning his timpani in different ways, and in the finale of the Eighth Symphony and the scherzo of the Ninth, he wrote for them in octaves across their full range (F to F). Additionally, at the start of the last act of “Fidelio,” he wrote their parts in A and E flat in a dissonant passage with great dramatic impact. Weber followed Beethoven's lead and wrote for timpani in C and A in the incantation scene of “Der Freischütz,” and Wagner made similar use of the drums at the beginning of the third act of “Siegfried.”


[Pg 111] In general, it may be said that until the close of the eighteenth century composers employed tympani only in brilliant passages, such as marches, overtures, jubilant choruses, or hymns of thanksgiving; and in these they were always heard with the trumpets. It was Beethoven who took the shackles from the expressive powers of these valuable instruments and showed how they could be made to utter notes of overpowering solemnity and mystery.
[Pg 111] Generally speaking, up until the end of the eighteenth century, composers used timpani mainly in flashy sections, like marches, overtures, joyful choruses, or hymns of gratitude; and they were always played alongside the trumpets. It was Beethoven who freed these important instruments from their limitations and demonstrated how they could express notes of intense seriousness and intrigue.
The bass-drum is frequently used in the orchestra either with or without the cymbals, and the latter are often heard without the drum. Both instruments are sadly overworked by noisy composers, yet they have their value. The military snare-drum is used in characteristic passages where a military idea is to be suggested. Tambourines and castanets are also used in appropriate places. The gong, which is said to have found its way into western Europe at the time of the French Revolution, when it was used as a funeral bell, found its way into the opera-house as an aid to music of scenes of death or terror, as in Meyerbeer’s resurrection of the nuns in “Robert le Diable.” It is now used occasionally by the symphonists in passages of portentous significance.
The bass drum is often used in the orchestra, either with or without the cymbals, and the cymbals are frequently heard on their own as well. Both instruments are often overused by noisy composers, but they do serve a purpose. The military snare drum appears in distinct sections where a military theme needs to be conveyed. Tambourines and castanets are also featured in suitable moments. The gong, which is said to have entered western Europe around the time of the French Revolution when it was used as a funeral bell, eventually made its way into the opera house to enhance the music in scenes of death or terror, like in Meyerbeer's resurrection of the nuns in “Robert le Diable.” Nowadays, it is occasionally employed by symphony composers in segments of significant importance.
Bells came into the orchestra for dramatic purposes, and are employed [Pg 112] in various ways, some of which are so familiar that it is barely necessary to mention them. Handel employed a whole chime in a passage in his “Saul,” and Mozart used a set of little bells in “The Magic Flute.” Meyerbeer has called for a single deep-toned bell to imitate the tocsin of the massacre of St. Bartholomew in “Les Huguenots,” and Wagner has used several in “Parsifal.” The latter composer has used the carillon (little bells) with fine effect in the magic-fire music of “Die Walküre.” The lover of orchestral music needs no special information about bells. They are capable of musical pitch, and their notation is in the treble or bass clef, as the case may be.
Bells were added to the orchestra for dramatic effect and are used in various ways, some of which are so common that it's hardly necessary to mention them. Handel used a full set of chimes in a section of his “Saul,” and Mozart incorporated a set of small bells in “The Magic Flute.” Meyerbeer called for a single deep-toned bell to mimic the alarm during the St. Bartholomew's Day Massacre in “Les Huguenots,” and Wagner employed several in “Parsifal.” The latter composer also effectively used the carillon (little bells) in the magic-fire music of “Die Walküre.” Anyone who enjoys orchestral music doesn't need special info about bells. They can reach musical pitches, and their notation appears in either the treble or bass clef, depending on the context. [Pg 112]
The xylophone is sometimes employed in music of an artistic sort. A most excellent example of its possibilities may be found in Saint-Säens’ “Danse Macabre,” where it is supposed to imitate the rattling of bones in the grim dance of Death.
The xylophone is sometimes used in artistic music. A great example of what it can do is in Saint-Saëns’ “Danse Macabre,” where it’s meant to mimic the sound of rattling bones in the eerie dance of Death.
Score-readers will often find the parts for those instruments of percussion which are without musical pitch, such as triangles, cymbals, bass-drums, etc., written not on a stave, but on a single line. The rhythm can be indicated satisfactorily in this way, and that is all that is needed.
Score readers will often see parts for percussion instruments that don’t have a musical pitch, like triangles, cymbals, bass drums, etc., written not on a staff but on a single line. This method effectively indicates the rhythm, and that’s all that’s necessary.
[Pg 113]
[Pg 113]
X
Qualities of Good Orchestration
It is now possible to speak more in detail about those essential qualities of good orchestration to which reference was made at the beginning of this part of the book. Unless I have failed to make myself understood, the reader will be prepared, in applying the principles of orchestration to those works which may come under his attention, to benefit by historical perspective. He will not expect of Haydn or Mozart such richness and complexity of scoring as he will demand and find in the works of contemporaneous composers. The technics of orchestral writing are very thoroughly and widely understood in our day. It is expected, as a matter of course, that every composer shall understand them. Now, this does not purport to be a text-book on orchestration, yet it is desirable that something be said for the information of the amateur of music about the requirements of good [Pg 114] orchestration. The object of a volume of this kind is to help people to enjoy music by pointing out what composers have designed for their enjoyment. The pleasure to be derived from the performance of an orchestral composition must naturally be largely increased when the listener is alert to catch all the varieties of excellence which may be combined in it. Orchestration, as I have already said, does not mean the playing of an orchestra, though the word is frequently misused in that sense. It means writing for an orchestra, and it has certain requirements not always to be found even in the works of the great masters. Schumann, for example, scored very poorly, and some of his works suffer by reason of his inability to clothe his poetic thoughts in the most eloquent instrumental language. Meyerbeer, on the other hand, was a veritable trickster with instruments, and could produce a theatrical effect with a penny-ballad idea, while Berlioz could enchant an audience with no idea at all. Beethoven and Wagner are two of the perfect models of orchestral writing, the former in the classic and early romantic style, and the latter in the fully developed romantic style.
It is now possible to discuss in more detail the essential qualities of good orchestration mentioned at the beginning of this section of the book. If I've made myself clear, the reader will understand that when applying orchestration principles to the works that come their way, they can benefit from a historical perspective. They should not expect the richness and complexity of scoring from Haydn or Mozart that they demand from contemporary composers. Today, the techniques of orchestral writing are well understood and widely accepted; it’s expected that every composer will grasp them. While this isn’t intended to be a textbook on orchestration, it's important to provide some information for amateur music lovers about what constitutes good orchestration. The goal of a book like this is to enhance people's enjoyment of music by highlighting what composers have crafted for that purpose. The enjoyment derived from an orchestral performance is naturally heightened when listeners are attentive to the various kinds of excellence that might be present. Orchestration, as I’ve mentioned before, doesn't refer to just the performance of an orchestra, even though the term is often misused that way. It refers to writing for an orchestra and has specific requirements that aren’t always met even by the great masters. For instance, Schumann didn’t orchestrate very well, and some of his works suffer due to his inability to express his poetic ideas in the most powerful instrumental language. In contrast, Meyerbeer was a master at using instruments to create theatrical effects from simple ideas, while Berlioz could captivate an audience with no idea at all. Beethoven and Wagner represent two perfect models of orchestral writing, with Beethoven exemplifying the classic and early romantic style, and Wagner showcasing the fully developed romantic style.

WAGNER.
Wagner.
[Pg 115] The qualities of good orchestration are solidity, balance of tone, contrast, and variety. By solidity is meant a close warp of the instrumental sounds which does not seem to have holes in it. A chord played by a full orchestra should sound like the utterance of one great instrument, not like the utterance of a number of individuals. The tones of flutes, oboes, clarinets, bassoons, brass, and strings should blend into one grand body. When such a result is achieved, whether it be with three instruments or one hundred, the tone is said to be solid. If the tone is not solid, it is because the harmony is not properly dispersed. Either the chords are not written in a sufficiently extended form or they are distributed wrongly among the instruments. The first requirement of solidity is good writing for the strings. It is absolutely necessary that their part should be so written that it is capable of independence; that is, it should sound solid when played without the other instruments. The composer must give each note of a chord to that instrument which is best qualified to utter it, and he must write his chords so that they are suited to orchestral enunciation.
[Pg 115] The qualities of good orchestration are stability, tonal balance, contrast, and variety. By stability, we mean a cohesive blend of instrumental sounds that feels seamless. A chord played by a full orchestra should resonate like one powerful instrument, not like a group of separate individuals. The sounds of flutes, oboes, clarinets, bassoons, brass, and strings should merge into one magnificent entity. When this happens, regardless of whether it involves three instruments or one hundred, the tone is considered solid. If the tone isn’t solid, it’s usually due to improper harmony distribution. This can happen if the chords aren’t written in a sufficiently expanded way or if they are assigned incorrectly among the instruments. The first requirement for stability is well-crafted parts for the strings. It's essential that their part is composed in a way that allows for independence; that is, it should still sound solid when played solo. The composer needs to assign each note of a chord to the instrument best suited for it, and the chords must be structured for orchestral delivery.
Pianists make sad mistakes when they come to write for orchestra, because they try to write in a piano style. They are so accustomed to seeing a melody in the treble clef and all the accompaniment in the bass, that they frequently fail to find any use for their soprano [Pg 116] instruments except the utterance of the melody, while all the barytone and bass instruments grumble a muddy accompaniment, and thus, as musicians say, the orchestra is “all top and bottom.” The illustration below will help to explain what I mean. It shows the first two measures of “Home, Sweet Home,” scored à la pianist, with the orchestra all top and bottom, and as an orchestral writer would spread it out in full harmony and with just a trifle of instrumental effect in the arpeggio for the second clarinet doubled by the ’celli pizzicati, and the basses also written pizzicati to accentuate the attack of each chord.
Pianists often make mistakes when they write for orchestra because they try to maintain a piano style. They are so used to seeing a melody in the treble clef and all the accompaniment in the bass that they often neglect to utilize their soprano instruments for anything other than playing the melody. Meanwhile, the barytone and bass instruments just create a muddy accompaniment, leading to what musicians call an orchestra that is “all top and bottom.” The illustration below will help clarify my point. It shows the first two measures of “Home, Sweet Home,” arranged in a piano style, with the orchestra appearing top-heavy and bottom-heavy. It also shows how an orchestral composer would arrange it with full harmony, adding a touch of instrumental effect with the arpeggio for the second clarinet doubled by the 'celli playing pizzicato, along with the basses also written pizzicato to emphasize the attack of each chord.
Even in writing so simple a thing as this, one must keep in mind always the relative tonal powers of the various instruments. For instance, in the second measure the first trumpet should play the B and then descend to the G, because otherwise it would make the upper D too strong and destroy the effect of the melody. The first trombone should do the same thing. The upper D in each chord should go to the first horn and the first bassoon. [Pg 117]
Even when writing something as simple as this, it's important to always consider the different tonal strengths of the various instruments. For example, in the second measure, the first trumpet should play the B and then go down to the G, because otherwise, it would make the upper D too powerful and ruin the melody's effect. The first trombone should do the same. The upper D in each chord should be played by the first horn and the first bassoon. [Pg 117]


[Pg 118] Balance of tone is an expression used to indicate a preservation of the equilibrium of power among the three choirs, so that one shall not be heard too clearly at the expense of another. In most instances this depends upon principles similar to those which govern solidity, but it also requires a constant consideration of the sonority of the three choirs regarded as separate bodies. For instance, the wood-wind instruments cannot possibly be played as softly as the strings; hence, if the composer wishes to get a pianissimo effect, he must not write full chords for the wood. Strings, with clarinets or flutes in the lower register, produce an excellent pianissimo. Cornets, on the other hand, cannot play pianissimo along with strings, because their softest tone is louder than that of the strings, and the balance is destroyed. Balance of tone, when all the instruments are playing together, is largely dependent upon the judgment of the conductor. He should see to it, for instance, that his brass instruments do not play too loudly. But it is also a matter of scoring, and frequently a conductor is helpless in the presence of the written page. In the scherzo of Schumann’s E flat symphony there is a passage in which the first theme is given to the clarinets, bassoon, second violins, violas, and ’cellos, while the first violins, trumpets, and horns play chords above them. All are directed to play mezzo-forte, and the result is that the brass chords quite overpower the melody. A similar passage is to be found in the andante of Beethoven’s Fifth Symphony. No conductor can get a perfect balance of tone out of such passages. [Pg 119]
[Pg 118] Balance of tone is a term that refers to keeping an even distribution of power among the three choirs, ensuring that no one is heard too clearly over the others. Usually, this relies on principles similar to those that govern solidity, but it also requires ongoing attention to the sound of the three choirs as distinct groups. For example, woodwind instruments can't be played as softly as strings; therefore, if the composer wants a pianissimo effect, they shouldn't write full chords for the woodwinds. Strings, along with clarinets or flutes in the lower register, create an excellent pianissimo. Conversely, cornets cannot play pianissimo alongside strings because their softest tone is still louder than that of the strings, disrupting the balance. Achieving balance of tone when all instruments are playing together largely depends on the conductor's judgment. For instance, they need to ensure that brass instruments don’t play too loudly. However, it also relates to scoring, and sometimes a conductor feels powerless in the face of the written score. In the scherzo of Schumann’s E flat symphony, there’s a section where the first theme is given to the clarinets, bassoon, second violins, violas, and cellos, while the first violins, trumpets, and horns play chords above them. All are instructed to play mezzo-forte, resulting in the brass chords overwhelming the melody. A similar situation arises in the andante of Beethoven’s Fifth Symphony. No conductor can achieve a perfect balance of tone in such passages. [Pg 119]
Contrast is obtained by employing instruments of different tone-quality to play the principal parts at different times. A principal melodic idea may be introduced by a trumpet or a clarinet, and continued by flutes or oboes, and finally sung by all the first violins. Sometimes the wood-wind plays alone, to be succeeded by the strings. These alternations of tonal color produce contrasts, without which the richest and most solid scoring might become monotonous. Variety is the result of mixing the tonal tints. For instance, some passages will be written for two flutes, two horns and strings; presently all the strings cease to sound except the first violins, which chant the melody supported by a harmony of brass; now the tone of the clarinets mingles with that of the violins, and the combination of the two produces a new color. Variety is also obtained by giving melodic fragments, not essential parts of the melody, to some of the instruments not engaged in voicing the principal theme. As the author has had occasion to say elsewhere:
Contrast is achieved by using instruments with different sound qualities to play the main parts at different times. A main melodic idea might start with a trumpet or a clarinet, continue with flutes or oboes, and finally be sung by all the first violins. Sometimes the woodwinds play on their own, followed by the strings. These shifts in tonal color create contrasts, which prevent the richest and most solid scoring from becoming boring. Variety comes from blending the different tonal shades. For example, some sections may be written for two flutes, two horns, and strings; then all the strings might stop except for the first violins, which carry the melody backed by brass harmony; now the clarinets blend with the violins, creating a new color. Variety is also gained by giving melodic fragments, which are not essential parts of the melody, to other instruments that aren't playing the main theme. As the author has mentioned before:
“A great many persons do not hear anything definitely except the principal melody, while beautiful bits of counterpoint and exquisite effects of harmony are lost to them because they have not learned how to follow the many voices of an orchestra. Every person should acquire [Pg 120] the habit of ear-analysis. The amount of pleasure added to the hearing of a symphony by ability to hear all the instruments at once is what might be added to the delight of seeing a painting if the power to perceive the colors were given to one who had before noticed only the drawing.”
“A lot of people only pick up on the main melody, missing out on the beautiful counterpoints and amazing harmonies because they haven’t learned how to listen to all the voices in an orchestra. Everyone should develop the skill of ear-analysis. The enjoyment you gain from listening to a symphony when you can hear all the instruments together is similar to the extra delight you’d experience in viewing a painting if you were suddenly able to appreciate the colors instead of just the shapes.”
The student of orchestral music will find great solidity and balance of tone in the works of the early masters. Bach’s writing is always substantial, but there is no large amount of contrast and variety in it. This is partly owing to the lack of instruments and partly to the meagre technical resources of those wind-instruments which he had. The oboe was Bach’s mainstay as a wind voice, and its range of expressiveness, of color, of dynamic gradation, and of agility, is small. The wood-wind choir could not reach its full measure of usefulness till it had acquired the clarinet, which has within itself a considerable range of tone-color, is a far more agile instrument than the oboe, and possesses in a far higher degree than any other wood-wind instrument the power of increasing and diminishing the volume of tone. It is, indeed, as Berlioz has said in his enthusiastic style, the true dramatic soprano of the orchestra. “This beautiful soprano instrument, [Pg 121] so ringing, so rich in penetrating accents, when employed in masses, gains, as a solo, in delicacy, evanescent shadowings, and mysterious tenderness what it loses in force and powerful brilliancy.... It is the one of all the wind-instruments which can best breathe forth, swell, diminish and die away its sound.”
The student of orchestral music will find great strength and balance in the early masters' works. Bach's compositions are always substantial, but they lack a lot of contrast and variety. This is partly due to the limited number of instruments and partly because of the basic technical resources of the wind instruments available to him. The oboe was Bach’s main wind voice, but its range of expressiveness, color, dynamic variation, and agility is small. The woodwind section couldn’t reach its full potential until it included the clarinet, which has a significant range of tone colors, is much more agile than the oboe, and can control the volume of sound better than any other woodwind instrument. As Berlioz enthusiastically pointed out, it is the true dramatic soprano of the orchestra. “This beautiful soprano instrument, [Pg 121] so ringing, so rich in penetrating accents, when used in groups, gains in delicacy, subtle nuances, and mysterious tenderness as a solo, even if it loses some strength and brilliance.... It is the wind instrument that can best articulate, swell, fade, and disappear into silence.”
Without the clarinet, however, Bach and Handel accomplished much with the means at their command. Witness the former’s lovely piece of writing for a horn and two bassoons in the “Quoniam” of the famous mass in B minor, and the latter’s admirable coloring with even strings alone, as in “Angels ever Bright and Fair,” and “Suddenly There was Round About Him a Multitude.” The possibilities of coloring increased as new instruments came into use, and the clarinet was at once appreciated by Mozart, who may be said to have made the first systematic attempts at specific tone-coloring.
Without the clarinet, though, Bach and Handel achieved a lot with the resources they had. Take the lovely piece that Bach wrote for a horn and two bassoons in the “Quoniam” of his famous mass in B minor, and Handel’s impressive use of just strings in works like “Angels ever Bright and Fair” and “Suddenly There was Round About Him a Multitude.” The range of sound expanded as new instruments were introduced, and the clarinet was quickly embraced by Mozart, who can be seen as the first to systematically explore specific tone colors.
The completion of the wood-wind choir by the introduction of the clarinet gave needed freedom to composers. Haydn in his old age advanced beyond Mozart in tone-coloring, while Beethoven, who, as I have shown, had a special feeling for the individuality of instruments, developed the features of contrast and variety far beyond anything [Pg 122] which his predecessors had conceived. Weber’s orchestral technic is immense. He understood thoroughly all the requirements of good orchestration, and to this day his works sound full, sonorous, and brilliant, even when heard at concerts where the most recent products are displayed. With Weber, the romantic movement, of which I shall have more to say hereafter, was fairly launched, and its representative composers have all employed every resource of contrast and variety without neglecting solidity and balance of tone. Brahms is one of the moderns who did not master the technic of orchestration. He wrote heavy chords low in the bass in his piano music, and he carried this practice into his orchestration, with the result that his scoring is almost always thick and heavy in the middle voices. Wagner, on the other hand, knew how to write deep, sonorous basses without disturbing the clarity of his work. Most of the French composers score beautifully. In all the field of opera there is not a warmer or more delicately refined score than that of “Faust,” while M. Saint-Säens’s orchestration is at once the model and the despair of young composers.
The addition of the clarinet to the woodwind section gave composers the freedom they needed. In his later years, Haydn progressed beyond Mozart in terms of color and tone, while Beethoven, who had a unique appreciation for the individuality of instruments, took the ideas of contrast and variety further than any of his predecessors had imagined. Weber's orchestral technique is remarkable. He fully understood all the demands of good orchestration, and even today, his works sound rich, resonant, and bright, even when performed alongside the latest compositions. With Weber, the romantic movement, which I will discuss more later, truly began, and its key composers used every resource of contrast and variety while still ensuring solidity and balance in tone. Brahms is one of the moderns who never quite mastered orchestration techniques. He often wrote heavy chords low in the bass in his piano compositions, and this approach carried over into his orchestration, leading to his scoring often being thick and heavy in the middle voices. Wagner, on the other hand, knew how to create deep, resonant bass lines without sacrificing the clarity of his music. Most French composers score beautifully. In all of opera, there isn't a warmer or more delicately crafted score than that of "Faust," while M. Saint-Saëns’s orchestration is both a model and a source of frustration for young composers.
Amateurs of music will find, as they advance in the study of scores, that every composer has a distinct style. For instance, Tschaikowsky wrote much that was weird, sombre, or melancholy, and the music-lover [Pg 123] will find that he made extensive use of the upper register of the bassoon (and, indeed, of its whole scale), of the low notes of clarinets, and of the English horn to aid him in producing a gloomy, dry color. Liszt’s instrumentation is always rich and heavy; Dvorák’s always strong, clear, and bright. Beethoven has little peculiarities, such as doubling a melody in the lower octave with a bassoon. Meyerbeer is fond of queer combinations, such as English horn and piccolo. Richard Strauss writes staccato chords for trumpets, and makes horns do things which fifty years ago would have been deemed impossible. But the fundamental principles of orchestration cannot be violated by any writer with impunity, and the student will find these principles epitomized and amply illustrated in the nine symphonies of the supreme master of symphonic composition, Ludwig von Beethoven.
Music enthusiasts will discover, as they delve deeper into studying scores, that each composer has a unique style. For example, Tchaikovsky often created music that was unusual, dark, or melancholic, and the music lover [Pg 123] will notice that he frequently utilized the high register of the bassoon (and indeed its entire range), the low notes of clarinets, and the English horn to create a somber, subdued tone. Liszt’s orchestrations are always rich and heavy, while Dvořák’s compositions are strong, clear, and bright. Beethoven has distinctive quirks, like doubling a melody in a lower octave with a bassoon. Meyerbeer enjoys unconventional combinations, such as an English horn and piccolo. Richard Strauss writes staccato chords for trumpets and makes the horns perform feats that would have been seen as impossible fifty years ago. However, any composer must respect the fundamental principles of orchestration, and students will find these principles well summarized and illustrated in the nine symphonies by the master of symphonic composition, Ludwig van Beethoven.
[Pg 124]
[Pg 124]
XI
Qualities of Orchestral Performance
Perhaps the first requisite for good orchestral performance should be set forth as good instruments. It is not too much to say that some orchestras are seriously injured by the presence of half a dozen vulgar-toned fiddles among the violins, by a very yellow clarinet among the wood, or a blatant cornet where a mellow trumpet ought to be. This is seldom the case in a regularly maintained concert orchestra, yet it does happen sometimes even there. The New York Philharmonic Society suffers a good deal from this cause. The orchestra is the society, and many of its members never play in any artistic concerts except those of the organization. They have poor instruments, which do not aid in the production of a noble tone, such as should come from an orchestra of this kind. Again, there are individual players whose peculiar faults are displayed to the general disadvantage of an orchestra. The [Pg 125] concert-master (leading first violin) of a certain New York orchestra cannot play in tune and has a vicious style of bowing. The first oboe of the same orchestra has a peculiar tone, which robs his instrument of its individuality and makes it resemble a clarinet. A well-known solo horn player produces from his instrument a tone which sounds more like that of a valve trombone or a euphonium than that of a French horn. Such individual faults injure the general effect of an orchestra’s playing, though they are not strictly to be classed under the head of qualities of orchestral performance. The requisites of concert orchestral playing are the following:
Perhaps the first requirement for good orchestral performance should be quality instruments. It's fair to say that some orchestras are seriously affected by the presence of a few poorly tuned violins among the section, a very bright clarinet in the woodwinds, or a loud cornet when a smooth trumpet should be heard. This is rarely an issue in a well-maintained concert orchestra, but it can still happen occasionally. The New York Philharmonic Society experiences this quite a bit. The orchestra is made up of the society’s members, many of whom only perform in artistic concerts organized by them. They often have subpar instruments, which don’t help produce the rich sound expected from this type of ensemble. Additionally, there are individual players whose unique flaws detract from the overall quality of the orchestra. The concertmaster (the lead first violin) of a certain New York orchestra can’t play in tune and has a problematic bowing style. The first oboe in the same orchestra has a distinctive tone that takes away from his instrument's individuality, making it sound like a clarinet. A well-known solo horn player produces a sound that’s more reminiscent of a valve trombone or euphonium than a French horn. Such individual mistakes harm the overall impact of an orchestra’s performance, even though they aren't strictly categorized as qualities of orchestral performance. The requirements for concert orchestral playing are as follows:
Quality, solidity, and balance of tone; precision, unanimity, flexibility, and light and shade.
Quality, strength, and balance of tone; accuracy, agreement, adaptability, and contrast.
The quality of tone which proceeds from an orchestra should be smooth and mellow. It should never be possible for the audience to hear the rasping of stringed instruments, nor the gasping of brass ones. The tone of an orchestra should be capable of growing to its full power without pantings. It should always flow freely and with liquid purity. It should never reveal its own mechanism. One should never be able to detect the scraping of the bow which makes the fiddle speak, nor the vibrating of the reed in the throat of the clarinet. The tone of a [Pg 126] great orchestra should come forth spontaneously and without apparent effort, as that of a great singer does, filling every cranny of the auditorium and seizing upon the heartstrings of every hearer.
The sound produced by an orchestra should be smooth and warm. The audience should never hear the scratch of the strings or the harshness of the brass. The orchestra's tone should be able to build to its full volume without gasping for air. It should always flow freely and with a clear, pure quality. It should never show its own workings. You should never notice the bow scraping the fiddle or the reed vibrating in the clarinet. The sound from a great orchestra should come out naturally and effortlessly, like that of a great singer, filling every corner of the auditorium and touching the hearts of every listener. [Pg 126]
And it should have solidity, which is easier to hear than to describe. One knows at once when the tone sounds thin and anæmic and when it sounds healthy and full-blooded, but it is not easy to point out the peculiarities of this quality. Sometimes an orchestra’s tone is not solid because there are too few players for the demands of the auditorium. Sometimes it is because the instrumentalists are not playing exactly together, and the vibrations of each tone of the melody, as caused by say a dozen violins, are not isochronous. Again, tone lacks solidity at times because the individual performers are not capable, and it is frequently, like want of quality, due to poor instruments.
And it should have substance, which is easier to hear than to explain. You can immediately tell when the tone sounds weak and lifeless versus when it sounds rich and vibrant, but it's not simple to pinpoint the specific traits of this quality. Sometimes an orchestra's sound isn't solid because there aren't enough players for the size of the venue. Other times, it's because the musicians aren't playing in perfect sync, causing the vibrations of each note from, say, a dozen violins, to be out of time with each other. Additionally, tone can sometimes lack solidity because the individual performers aren't skilled enough, and it often, like the lack of quality, can be attributed to inferior instruments.
Balance of tone has the same meaning in performance as it has in orchestration. It is equality of dynamic force among the constituent parts of the band. As already said, it is the result partly of good orchestration and partly of the guiding skill of the conductor; but it depends also in a measure upon the constitution of the orchestra. The average theatre orchestra is an eloquent demonstration of the bad [Pg 127] effects of poor balance among the instruments. The desperate struggles of two first violins, one second, one viola, one ’cello, and one double-bass to produce sufficient sound to make themselves heard in forte passages against the sonorous pealing of a cornet, a trombone, and a pair of tympani, are as vain as they are ridiculous. Such efforts are repeated on a larger scale when modern symphonic music is performed by an orchestra whose strings are led by six first violins. It is not possible for six firsts, six seconds, four violas, three ’cellos, and three double-basses to maintain a proper balance of tone against two or three flutes, two oboes, two bassoons, four horns, two trumpets, three trombones, a tuba, and tympani. An orchestra with six first violins should not attempt music orchestrated in the romantic style. It would be much better for such an orchestra to omit two horns and add two violins, and confine itself to music suitable to such an array of instruments. When there are only six first violins it is not wise to attempt works which call for divisions of those six into four parts. It is always absurd to hear an orchestra with three ’cellos trying to “fake” the opening measures of Rossini’s “William Tell” overture, and in the tutti the trombone rages like a lion. It is generally conceded in this country that a concert orchestra requires about 60 stringed [Pg 128] instruments to give a proper balance to the wood and brass. I have already spoken of the constitution of the Boston Symphony Orchestra, which has 58 strings on a basis of 16 first violins. The Chicago Orchestra has 61, and the New York Philharmonic Society, 78. The London Philharmonic has 54, the Vienna Philharmonic, 68, and the Paris Conservatoire, 60.
Balance of tone in performance means the same thing as it does in orchestration. It’s about having equal dynamic strength among the different parts of the band. As mentioned earlier, it results partly from good orchestration and partly from the conductor’s skill, but it also depends somewhat on the makeup of the orchestra. The typical theater orchestra clearly shows the negative effects of poor balance among the instruments. The frustrating attempts of two first violins, one second, one viola, one cello, and one double bass to produce enough sound to be heard in loud passages against the powerful sound of a cornet, a trombone, and a set of timpani are as pointless as they are comical. Such struggles are even more noticeable on a larger scale when modern symphonic music is played by an orchestra with six first violins. It’s not feasible for six firsts, six seconds, four violas, three cellos, and three double basses to keep a correct balance of tone against two or three flutes, two oboes, two bassoons, four horns, two trumpets, three trombones, a tuba, and timpani. An orchestra with six first violins should avoid music orchestrated in the romantic style. It would be much better for this type of orchestra to drop two horns and add two violins and focus on music suitable for such an arrangement of instruments. When there are only six first violins, it’s unwise to attempt works that require dividing those six into four parts. It always sounds ridiculous to hear an orchestra with three cellos trying to "fake" the opening measures of Rossini's “William Tell” overture while the trombone blares like a lion in the tutti. It is generally accepted in this country that a concert orchestra needs about 60 string instruments to achieve a proper balance with the woodwinds and brass. I have already mentioned the setup of the Boston Symphony Orchestra, which has 58 strings based on 16 first violins. The Chicago Orchestra has 61, and the New York Philharmonic Society has 78. The London Philharmonic has 54, the Vienna Philharmonic has 68, and the Paris Conservatoire has 60.
Given a proper array of instruments, the preservation of balance of tone is due chiefly to the conductor, though it is also necessary that the players should not be troubled with individual ambition. The occasional solo affords the individual player an opportunity to display his powers, but at all other times he should be content to sacrifice his glory for the general result. A good orchestra is in this respect like a perfect boat-crew; every man in it should be part of a machine to produce a single effect. Whenever one man in a boat-crew is seized with a notion that he can pull the whole boat himself, the crew goes to pieces and loses the race. So in an orchestra, if the second trombonist, for example, is convinced that the audience ought to hear his part, he destroys the balance of the performance and oversets the composer’s purpose. Of course, a conductor must do all he can to see that the ambitious second trombonist does not mis-behave, but it requires a real esprit de corps in an orchestra to maintain an ideal balance of tone. Brass is blatant in forte passages if allowed to have its own way, and wood, unrestrained, is frequently too strong in moderato or piano bits.
Given a proper set of instruments, the preservation of tonal balance is mainly the conductor's responsibility, though the players also need to avoid individual ambition. Occasional solos give individual players a chance to showcase their skills, but at all other times, they should be willing to set aside their personal glory for the overall result. A good orchestra is like a perfectly matched rowing crew; everyone should function as part of a machine to create a unified sound. If one member of a rowing crew thinks he can propel the entire boat by himself, the crew falls apart and loses the race. Similarly, in an orchestra, if the second trombonist believes the audience needs to hear his part more prominently, he disrupts the balance of the performance and undermines the composer's intent. Of course, a conductor must do whatever possible to ensure the ambitious second trombonist behaves appropriately, but it takes a genuine esprit de corps within the orchestra to maintain an ideal tonal balance. Brass instruments can be too loud in forte passages if allowed to dominate, and woodwinds can often overpower during moderato or piano sections if not properly restrained.

CHARLES LAMOUREUX.
CHARLES LAMOUREUX.
[Pg 129] Plenty of strings is the only remedy for a bad balance which careful playing will not correct, and a plenty of strings is to be found only in large concert orchestras. Even in opera-houses the strings are often too few, while in theatres they nearly always are. The average theatrical manager knows very little about music and cares less. A business manager who knew something of the tone art was once engaged by a manager who controlled a travelling exhibition of “Midsummer Night’s Dream,” with all Mendelssohn’s music. He thought his exhibition worthy of the attention of the metropolis, but the business manager said to him:
[Pg 129] Having plenty of string instruments is the only solution for a poor balance that careful playing can't fix, and you can only find a lot of strings in large concert orchestras. Even in opera houses, the strings are often lacking, and in theaters, they almost always are. The average theatrical manager knows very little about music and cares even less. A business manager with some knowledge of music was once hired by a manager running a traveling production of “Midsummer Night’s Dream,” featuring all of Mendelssohn’s music. He believed his production deserved the attention of the big city, but the business manager told him:
“If we go into New York, we’ll have to increase the orchestra.”
“If we go to New York, we’ll need to expand the orchestra.”
“What for?” replied the manager. “We have all sorts of instruments now, haven’t we?”
“What for?” replied the manager. “We have all kinds of tools now, don’t we?”
“But we ought to have more first violins.”
“But we should have more first violins.”
“What! more than two?”
“What! More than two?”
But, after all, the theatre is hardly the place to look for art in music. The concert-hall and the opera-house are its homes, but owing to [Pg 130] the conditions which surround the performance of opera in most places, only the concert orchestra can be expected to show the highest possibilities of performance. In such an orchestra we may expect to find a proper distribution of instruments, and having that, we should demand a perfect solidity and balance of tone. I can hardly put too much emphasis on the necessity of good tone. Although the mere quality of sound belongs to the lowest department of musical excellence, the sensuous, it is nevertheless an instrument of the greatest power in the presentation of musical thought. There is something vital in a noble tone, something enthralling and inspiring. One recognizes it immediately when it is the voice of a distinguished singer, and I have seen audiences moved to amazing enthusiasm by a glorious voice which had neither dramatic intelligence nor vocal cunning to aid the potent spell of its pure quality. An orchestra should be a mighty singer in every sense, and it must have the first requisite of one—a fine voice. There should be nothing cheap or vulgar in its tone. It should be one grand flow of gorgeous, all-surrounding sound, smooth, sweet, mellow, and pure, whether heard in the aërial whisper of the last bars of the “Lohengrin” prelude or the thunderous peal of the “Kaisermarsch.” [Pg 131]
But really, the theater isn't the best place to find art in music. The concert hall and the opera house are where it truly lives, but because of the circumstances surrounding opera performances in most places, we can only expect the concert orchestra to deliver the highest level of performance. In a quality orchestra, we should see a proper distribution of instruments, and with that, we should demand a perfect solidity and balance of tone. I can't stress enough how important good tone is. While the quality of sound is one of the most basic aspects of musical excellence—it's about the sensory experience—it's still a powerful tool for expressing musical ideas. There's something essential about a rich tone, something captivating and inspiring. You can instantly recognize it when it comes from a talented singer, and I've seen audiences become incredibly enthusiastic over a beautiful voice that lacked dramatic insight or vocal skill yet had the incredible charm of its pure sound. An orchestra should be a powerful singer in every way, and it needs the most important requirement of one—a beautiful voice. Its tone should never be cheap or vulgar. Instead, it should be a magnificent flow of rich, encompassing sound—smooth, sweet, mellow, and pure—whether it’s in the gentle whisper of the final bars of the “Lohengrin” prelude or the thunderous crash of the “Kaisermarsch.”
Tone being assured, the next traits of vital importance in orchestral performance are precision and unanimity. Precision is a feature of attack, while unanimity refers to those parts of a passage not included in the attack. Both are dependent upon the elementary business of keeping together. If the players of an orchestra are not at all times absolutely at one in their work, there can be neither precision nor unanimity. Precision is keeping absolutely together in beginning and finishing, whether it be a detached chord or tone, or a phrase. Unanimity is keeping together, in time and force and all other requirements, between the beginning and the end. The act of commencing a tone is called the attack. This should be so precise that the tone seems to be produced by a single instrument, not by a number. If it is a detached tone, or a phrase like that at the beginning of Beethoven’s C minor symphony, every instrument engaged in its utterance should cease to sound at exactly the same instant. Precision is a matter in which many auditors are deceived. I well remember how I gaped in wonder in my boyish days when I heard an orchestra under Theodore Thomas play a series of staccato chords with such precision that they came out like the cracks of a whip. I have since learned that this is one of the [Pg 132] easiest feats of an orchestra. It is a far greater test of precision to play with absolute sharpness and clearness of cut a passage such as this from the Ninth Symphony:
With confidence in tone, the next key traits for orchestral performance are precision and unanimity. Precision involves how a note starts, while unanimity relates to the parts of a passage not involved in that start. Both depend on the fundamental task of staying together. If orchestra players aren't perfectly aligned at all times, there can be no precision or unanimity. Precision means starting and finishing exactly together, whether it's a single note or a phrase. Unanimity means staying together in timing, intensity, and all other aspects from start to finish. The moment a note starts is called the attack. This should be so precise that it sounds like it's coming from one instrument instead of many. If it's a detached note or a phrase like the one at the beginning of Beethoven’s C minor symphony, every instrument involved should stop playing at the exact same moment. Many listeners can be misled about precision. I remember being amazed in my youth when I heard an orchestra conducted by Theodore Thomas play a series of staccato chords with such exactness that they sounded like whip cracks. I’ve since learned that this is one of the simplest feats for an orchestra. It's a much greater challenge to play a passage like this from the Ninth Symphony with complete sharpness and clarity:

Furthermore, precision is just as necessary to the correct performance of flowing cantabile passages as it is to those of vigorous declamatory style. It belongs to the general department of accuracy, and without accuracy in such features as the duration of sounds, no orchestral playing can have color, force, or finish.
Furthermore, accuracy is just as important for effectively performing smooth, melodic passages as it is for those that are more forceful and expressive. It falls under the broader category of precision, and without precision in aspects like the length of notes, no orchestral performance can achieve richness, power, or polish.
Unanimity, as I have said, means keeping together in matters other than the beginning and ending of a tone or phrase. Attention has been called to the fact that if the notes of a melody and its harmonies are not played in exactly the same time by all the instruments engaged in their performance, the quality of tone is seriously impaired; but it must now be added that further injury comes in the shape of destruction of the outlines of the rhythm. This is such an important factor in all music [Pg 133] that to decrease its clearness is like blurring the outlines of a drawing. When the rhythm of an orchestral composition or the outlines in a painting are destroyed, there remains nothing but a blurred color-scheme. A color-scheme is often very pretty, but it is no more a composition than the view in a kaleidoscope is a landscape.
Unanimity, as I’ve mentioned, means staying in sync with each other in aspects beyond just the beginning and end of a note or phrase. It’s been pointed out that if the notes of a melody and its harmonies aren’t played perfectly in time by all the instruments involved, the quality of the sound suffers significantly; however, it should also be noted that this leads to further damage in the form of a loss of rhythmic clarity. This is such a crucial element in all music that reducing its clarity is like smudging the outlines of a drawing. When the rhythm of an orchestral piece or the outlines in a painting are lost, all that remains is a blurred array of colors. A color scheme can be quite beautiful, but it’s not a composition any more than the view in a kaleidoscope is a landscape. [Pg 133]
Unanimity, furthermore, includes something beyond mere clearness of enunciation. It embraces also accent. In such a phrase as that quoted above from the Ninth Symphony, there are a series of natural accentuations, and it is essential to a brilliant and stirring utterance of the phrase that every instrument in the orchestra should put the accents in the same places and give them the same amount of force. In passages which are not written for the whole orchestra there should be unanimity in accent among those for which they are written. In fact, an orchestra should have absolutely military accuracy in all its work, and this presupposes long and arduous drill and extended association. Permanency is a necessity to fine orchestral work. Men who have played together a long time, even under an inferior conductor, will play with much more precision and unanimity than men newly brought together under the beat of a famous director. The highest results are [Pg 134] attainable only with a permanent orchestra under a competent conductor.
Unanimity also involves more than just clear communication; it includes accents as well. In the phrase mentioned from the Ninth Symphony, there are several natural accents, and for the phrase to be delivered brilliantly and powerfully, every instrument in the orchestra must emphasize those accents in the same spots and with equal intensity. In sections not featuring the entire orchestra, those playing must also share the same accentuation. Essentially, an orchestra needs to have military-level precision in all its performances, which requires extensive practice and long-term collaboration. Consistency is crucial for high-quality orchestral work. Musicians who have played together for a long time, even with a less skilled conductor, will perform with much greater precision and unity than those who are newly assembled under a renowned director. The best results can only be achieved with a permanent orchestra led by a capable conductor. [Pg 134]
But with all this precision and unanimity the playing of an orchestra should be flexible. As I have said in another volume, “The music should never sound rigid, but should seem to come in a sinuous stream of purling sound.” The average concert-goer would probably describe the playing of an orchestra deficient in flexibility as “stiff,” and that is a very expressive way of putting it. It will be remembered that in “H. M. S. Pinafore” the only person who was invariably right was Dick Deadeye, but everyone applauded Buttercup’s assertion that he was “a little triangular.” An orchestra must always be correct, but it need not be triangular. Inflexibility is usually the result of bad conducting.
But despite all this precision and agreement, an orchestra's performance should be flexible. As I mentioned in another book, “The music should never sound rigid, but should flow like a smooth stream of sound.” The average concert-goer would probably describe an orchestra that lacks flexibility as “stiff,” which is a very expressive way to put it. It will be remembered that in “H. M. S. Pinafore,” the only person who was always right was Dick Deadeye, but everyone applauded Buttercup’s claim that he was “a little triangular.” An orchestra must always be accurate, but it doesn't have to be rigid. Inflexibility usually comes from poor conducting.
A martinet, with phlegmatic temperament, can make an orchestra play as inflexibly as a street piano. A conductor of excessively melting temperament will often melt his orchestra so that its playing will be as sweet, as flexible, and as limp as hot taffy.
A strict conductor, with a calm demeanor, can make an orchestra play as rigidly as a street piano. A conductor with a super laid-back personality will often soften his orchestra’s playing so that it sounds as sweet, flexible, and limp as hot taffy.
And this brings us to the all-important question of light and shade. The fundamental element of light and shade is the distribution of force and speed. An orchestra is capable of a pianissimo, which is like the [Pg 135] softest whisper of a summer evening’s breeze, and of a fortissimo, which is like the booming of a thunder-storm. There is an infinitesimal scale of gradations between these two extremes, and these should all be properly employed. Of course, their use is guided by the conductor, but they form a part of the technics of orchestral playing, and hence must be described here. All lovers of music know what effects are brought about by skilful use of alterations of tempo—the accelerando and ritardando—and by the combination of these with gradations of force. In the application of these devices an orchestra should be adept. The placing of the effects is, of course, indicated in the score, or, if not, must be the result of the judgment and taste of the conductor; but the manner of producing them is the work of the performers. It requires frequent rehearsal to get these effects made with precision, unanimity, and smoothness of tone, yet they should be so made. An orchestra should sing like a great singer, and it should be able to produce all the delicate shades of song as a human voice can.
And this brings us to the crucial question of light and shade. The key element of light and shade is how force and speed are distributed. An orchestra can play a pianissimo, which is like the softest whisper of a summer evening breeze, and a fortissimo, which is like the rumble of a thunderstorm. There is a tiny scale of gradations between these two extremes, and they should all be used properly. Of course, their use is guided by the conductor, but they are part of the skills needed for orchestral playing, so they must be discussed here. All music lovers know the effects created by skillfully changing the tempo—accelerando and ritardando—and by combining these with gradations of force. An orchestra should be skilled in using these techniques. The placement of effects is usually indicated in the score, or, if not, it should be decided by the conductor's judgment and taste; however, how to produce them is up to the performers. It takes frequent rehearsal to achieve these effects with precision, unity, and smoothness of tone, but that is essential. An orchestra should sing like a great vocalist and be able to produce all the subtle nuances of song just like a human voice can. [Pg 135]
But an orchestra has many voices, and the composer often takes advantage of this fact. He frequently calls upon his instrument to sing several melodies simultaneously, or, as in the case of a fugal work, [Pg 136] different parts of the same melody at the same time. This kind of writing calls for a distinct delivery of the middle voices. Even in compositions which are not polyphonic, there are often subsidiary melodic fragments in parts other than those which are playing the principal theme. These fragments should be heard; composers do not write them by accident. They should blossom out spontaneously as exuberant exfoliations of the harmonic garden. They should not be thrust obstreperously in the faces of the auditors, but they should not be permitted to escape notice. The middle voices are sadly neglected at times. Some conductors seem to confine their whole study of a score to hunting for the principal theme and bringing that out, while the delicious bits of counterpoint, which the composer has been at no small pains to devise, are left to take care of themselves. Such conductors remind me of a professional musician who was engaged in a discussion of Richard Wagner in the corridor of the Metropolitan Opera House, while inside the orchestra was playing the vorspiel to “Die Meistersinger.”
But an orchestra has many voices, and the composer often takes advantage of this. He frequently asks his instruments to play several melodies at once, or, in the case of a fugue, different parts of the same melody simultaneously. This type of writing requires a clear delivery of the middle voices. Even in pieces that aren’t polyphonic, there are often additional melodic fragments in sections other than the ones featuring the main theme. These fragments should be audible; composers don’t include them by chance. They should emerge naturally as vibrant expressions of the harmonic landscape. They shouldn't be forced onto the audience, but they shouldn’t be overlooked either. The middle voices are often overlooked. Some conductors seem to focus solely on highlighting the main theme, neglecting the beautiful counterpoints that the composer has painstakingly crafted. Such conductors remind me of a professional musician who was discussing Richard Wagner in the hallway of the Metropolitan Opera House while the orchestra inside was playing the prelude to “Die Meistersinger.”
“It is a pity,” said this wise man, in a condescending manner; “but Wagner knew absolutely nothing about counterpoint.”
“It’s a shame,” said this wise man, in a condescending tone; “but Wagner really didn’t know anything about counterpoint.”
And at that very instant the orchestra was singing five different [Pg 137] melodies at once; and, as Anton Seidl was the conductor, they were all audible.
And at that exact moment, the orchestra was playing five different melodies at the same time; and since Anton Seidl was the conductor, they were all clearly heard.
Light and shade, as we roughly call them—the German “nuancirung” (nuancing) is far better—depend also on phrasing. In singing, phrasing means the division of the melody into groups of notes, so that breath can be taken. Now, phrasing is obviously quite as vital to wind-instrument players as to singers, because the former, too, must have intervals to take breath. Obviously, if the several players stop to take breath, they should cease to sound their instruments at the same instant, and begin again with equal precision. A similar grouping of notes is made in the performance of bowed instruments by the movements of the bow. All violin-players know that there is a difference in the results produced by the up-stroke and those by the down-stroke. Phrasing in the orchestra, then, is the technical treatment of the natural groups of tones which form the component parts of a melody in such a way that they shall come out clearly and symmetrically and in a vocal style. Here again we come upon the technical part of a conductor’s work. It is he who regulates the phrasing. The distribution of up and down strokes of the bow is in a general way left to the concert-master, the leader of the first [Pg 138] violins, but he is, of course, subject to the direction of the conductor. Many composers of the present day mark the bowing in particular passages, but most of them content themselves with indicating such things as slurred notes and staccati, or special effects, such as playing near the bridge, or with the point of the bow. The legato of stringed instruments is indicated in a score by a curved line drawn over or under the passages, thus:
Light and shadow, as we often refer to them—the German term “nuancirung” (nuancing) captures it better—also rely on phrasing. In singing, phrasing refers to breaking the melody into groups of notes to allow for breathing. Phrasing is just as crucial for wind-instrument players as it is for singers since they also need moments to breathe. Clearly, if multiple players need to breathe, they should stop playing at the same moment and start again with the same precision. A similar grouping of notes occurs in the performance of bowed instruments through bow movements. Every violinist knows that the results differ between the up-stroke and the down-stroke. Thus, phrasing in the orchestra is the technical approach to the natural groupings of tones that make up a melody, ensuring they are delivered clearly, symmetrically, and in a vocal style. Here we encounter another technical aspect of a conductor's role. He is the one who manages the phrasing. The distribution of up and down strokes of the bow is generally left to the concertmaster, the leader of the first violins, but he must follow the conductor’s guidance. Many modern composers specify bowing for particular sections, but most simply indicate details like slurred notes, staccatos, or special effects, such as playing near the bridge or with the tip of the bow. The legato of string instruments is represented in a score with a curved line drawn over or under the passages, like this:

Detached notes are indicated by dots, while lightly detached ones, to be played with a single stroke, are indicated by dots with a slur, or legato mark, over them, thus:
Detached notes are shown with dots, while lightly detached notes, which are played with a single stroke, are shown with dots and a slur or legato mark over them, like this:

All these details of bowing and of breathing in the wind-instrument choir should be carefully regulated. They are elementary parts of the technic of orchestral performance, and they contribute to the production of smoothness, elegance, and refinement in the playing of a [Pg 139] band, as well as to force, brilliancy, and expression. Furthermore, all demands of the composer in regard to the use of particular instruments or the uncommon treatment of instruments should be respected. If the result is bad, it is the composer’s fault. But it is usually good. When Hans Sachs, in “Die Meistersinger,” makes David a journeyman cobbler, he smacks the boy’s ear with his broad hand, and Wagner imitates the ringing in the offended member by the whizzing note of a stopped horn. To play that note unstopped would be to defeat the composer’s intention. It would be equally wrong to neglect to put mutes on where directed to do so. Sometimes composers call for very curious performances, but their wishes should be respected as far as possible. For instance, in his “Lelio, ou le retour à la vie,” Berlioz has written a passage for clarinet “con sordino,” and has directed that the instrument should be muted by being “wrapped in a bag of cloth or leather.” His desire was to give the clarinet a veiled and distant sound, and his wishes should be carried out. In another place Berlioz calls for tympani drum-sticks with heads of sponge. Wagner calls for tenor tubas in the funeral march of “Die Götterdämmerung,” and Mozart [Pg 140] calls for a mandolin to accompany Don Giovanni’s “Deh vieni.” Such requirements should always be fulfilled, and so should all directions as to the manner of performance.
All these details about bowing and breathing in the wind instrument section should be carefully managed. They are basic elements of orchestral performance technique and contribute to the overall smoothness, elegance, and refinement of the music, as well as to its power, brilliance, and expression. Additionally, all requests from the composer regarding the use of specific instruments or unconventional techniques should be honored. If the outcome is poor, it reflects on the composer. However, it typically turns out well. When Hans Sachs, in “Die Meistersinger,” makes David a journeyman cobbler, he gives the boy a slap on the ear, and Wagner mimics the ringing in the injured ear with a whizzing note from a stopped horn. Playing that note without stopping would undermine the composer’s intention. It would also be wrong to ignore the need for mutes where specified. Sometimes composers ask for unusual performances, but their requests should be honored as much as possible. For example, in his “Lelio, ou le retour à la vie,” Berlioz has written a section for clarinet “con sordino,” instructing that the instrument should be muted by being “wrapped in a bag of cloth or leather.” He wanted the clarinet to have a muted and distant sound, and his wishes should be followed. In another instance, Berlioz calls for tympani drumsticks with sponge heads. Wagner requests tenor tubas in the funeral march of “Die Götterdämmerung,” while Mozart asks for a mandolin to accompany Don Giovanni’s “Deh vieni.” These kinds of requirements should always be met, as should all instructions regarding the performance style.
We are in the habit of thinking that what may be called the virtuoso orchestra is a product of our own time, but perhaps we flatter ourselves. It is very certain that the orchestra of the Paris Conservatoire played with splendid precision and with much fire half a century ago, and there are other orchestras in Europe which have to live up to some pretty old traditions. It was only last September (1898) that the Dresden Court Orchestra celebrated its three hundred and fiftieth anniversary. To be sure, when it was established by the Elector Maurice it was a singing choir, whose members learned to play instruments in order to supply accompaniments; but it developed into an orchestra, and as such it helped to produce Heinrich Schütz’s “Seven Last Words of Christ,” and his “Daphne,” which was the first German opera. The Esterhazy orchestra, under Haydn, was no mean band, and the famous Mannheim orchestra, under Stamitz, revealed possibilities of performance which did much toward forming Mozart’s symphonic style. The Leipsic Gewandhaus orchestra dates back to 1743, when it numbered sixteen players and gave its concerts in a private house. These concerts [Pg 141] were interrupted by the Seven Years’ War, but were resumed in 1763 with an orchestra of thirty. The first concert in the new Gewandhaus rooms took place on September 29, 1781. Since that time the seasons have been regular. Mendelssohn was the conductor from 1835 to 1843, and Neils W. Gade from 1844 to 1848. The development of style and technic in the performances of this orchestra had very considerable influence on the advance of orchestral playing throughout Europe. Other notable German organizations are the Berlin Philharmonic Orchestra and the orchestra of the opera at Munich. The Vienna Philharmonic is celebrated for its strings.
We tend to believe that what we call the virtuoso orchestra is a modern invention, but maybe we’re giving ourselves too much credit. It’s clear that the orchestra at the Paris Conservatoire played with remarkable precision and passion over fifty years ago, and there are other orchestras in Europe that have to uphold some pretty old traditions. Just last September (1898), the Dresden Court Orchestra celebrated its 350th anniversary. When it was founded by Elector Maurice, it started as a singing choir, whose members learned to play instruments to provide accompaniment, but it evolved into an orchestra, and it helped produce Heinrich Schütz’s “Seven Last Words of Christ” and his “Daphne,” the first German opera. The Esterhazy orchestra, under Haydn, was quite impressive, and the famous Mannheim orchestra, under Stamitz, showcased performance possibilities that greatly influenced Mozart’s symphonic style. The Leipsic Gewandhaus orchestra dates back to 1743, when it had sixteen players and held concerts in a private house. These concerts were interrupted by the Seven Years’ War but resumed in 1763 with an orchestra of thirty. The first concert in the new Gewandhaus took place on September 29, 1781. Since then, the seasons have been consistent. Mendelssohn was the conductor from 1835 to 1843, and Neils W. Gade from 1844 to 1848. The development of style and technique in the performances of this orchestra had a significant impact on the progress of orchestral playing throughout Europe. Other notable German groups include the Berlin Philharmonic Orchestra and the opera orchestra in Munich. The Vienna Philharmonic is renowned for its strings.
In France the progress of orchestral playing received its first impetus from the labors of François Joseph Gossec (1733-1829), whose extraordinarily long and active life enabled him to see not only the blossom, but some of the early fruit of his efforts. He was the first French composer of symphonies, and in 1770 founded the “Concert des Amateurs.” He did much toward developing good orchestral playing in Paris, and prepared the way for the famous François Antoine Habeneck (1781-1849), who, in 1828, founded the “Société des Concerts du Conservatoire.” [Pg 142]
In France, the growth of orchestral performance got its first boost from François Joseph Gossec (1733-1829), whose remarkably long and active life allowed him to witness not only the beginning but also some of the early successes of his work. He was the first French composer of symphonies, and in 1770, he established the “Concert des Amateurs.” He contributed significantly to improving orchestral performance in Paris and paved the way for the renowned François Antoine Habeneck (1781-1849), who founded the “Société des Concerts du Conservatoire” in 1828. [Pg 142]
Orchestral playing has never reached a high plane in England, but the London Philharmonic Society has an important history because of the famous works written for it, among them symphonies and overtures by Cherubini, Spohr’s second symphony, Beethoven’s Ninth Symphony, and Mendelssohn’s Italian symphony. In America orchestral performances have always been popular since the foundation of the New York Philharmonic Society in 1842. The labors of such admirable conductors as Theodore Eisfeld, Carl Bergmann, and, most of all, Theodore Thomas, did much to develop a high degree of skill among orchestral performers and a wide appreciation on the part of the public. The debt of the country to Mr. Thomas is one that it will carry to the end of its musical development. The foundation of the Boston Symphony Orchestra, in 1880, by Colonel Henry L. Higginson, of Boston, gave the United States its first concert orchestra established on a permanent basis, and the organization has come to be regarded as one of the leading orchestras of the world. The Chicago Orchestra, directed by Theodore Thomas, is its only rival in America.
Orchestral music has never really excelled in England, but the London Philharmonic Society has a significant history thanks to the famous works composed for it, including symphonies and overtures by Cherubini, Spohr’s second symphony, Beethoven’s Ninth Symphony, and Mendelssohn’s Italian symphony. In America, orchestral performances have always been well-liked since the New York Philharmonic Society was founded in 1842. The efforts of notable conductors like Theodore Eisfeld, Carl Bergmann, and especially Theodore Thomas helped develop a high level of skill among orchestral musicians and a widespread appreciation from the public. The country owes a great deal to Mr. Thomas, a debt that will last throughout its musical development. The founding of the Boston Symphony Orchestra in 1880 by Colonel Henry L. Higginson in Boston created the United States' first concert orchestra on a permanent basis, and the organization has become known as one of the world’s leading orchestras. The Chicago Orchestra, led by Theodore Thomas, is its only competition in America.

From a photograph by Falk.
From a photo by Falk.
THEODORE THOMAS.
THEO THOMAS.
[Pg 143] Nothing more excellently pictures the conditions under which an orchestra comes to the perfection of its work than a few words in one of Schumann’s comments on music in Leipsic: “Before we take leave of the Gewandhaus concerts for half a year,” he says, “we must award a crown of merit to the forty or fifty orchestral members. We have no solo-players like Brod in Paris or Harper in London; but even these [Pg 144] cities can scarcely boast such fine, united playing. And this results from the nature of circumstances. Our musicians here form a family; they see each other and practise together daily; they are always the same, so that they are able to play a Beethoven symphony without notes. Add to these a concert-master who can conduct such scores from memory, a director who knows them by, and reveres them at, heart, and the crown is complete.” [Pg 145]
[Pg 143] Nothing illustrates the conditions under which an orchestra achieves its best work better than a few words from Schumann’s reflections on music in Leipzig: “Before we wrap up the Gewandhaus concerts for six months,” he says, “we must give a shout-out to the forty or fifty orchestra members. We don’t have soloists like Brod in Paris or Harper in London; yet, even those cities can hardly claim such exceptional, cohesive playing. This is due to the circumstances. Our musicians here are like family; they see each other and practice together every day; they are always the same, so they can perform a Beethoven symphony from memory. Add to this a concertmaster who can conduct such scores from memory, and a director who knows and truly appreciates them, and the achievement is complete.” [Pg 145]
PART III
How the Orchestra is Directed
How the Orchestra is Conducted
[Pg 146]
[Pg 147]
[Pg 146]
[Pg 147]
XII
Development of the Conductor
It is not so easy to define the functions of the conductor of an orchestra as it may seem to be, because at present there is a general tendency to exaggerate one element of his labor, namely, the interpretative. “Readings” are the order of the day, and we are invited to consider Mr. Paur’s reading of Beethoven’s C minor symphony, Mr. Nikisch’s interpretation of the same, and again Mr. Gericke’s, and to compare them one with another, as we might compare Mr. Barnay’s performance of Hamlet with that of Wilson Barrett. The conductor’s magnetism, his personality, his style, even the cut of his cuffs have thrust themselves between the public and the immortal works of the masters, until it seems as if there must come a reaction which will drive us back to the ancient time-beater. Perhaps it will be advisable, before considering conducting in the abstract, to trace briefly the development of the conductor. [Pg 148]
It is not easy to define the role of an orchestra conductor as it might seem, because there is a current trend to overemphasize one aspect of their work, specifically the interpretative one. “Readings” are in vogue, and we’re encouraged to consider Mr. Paur’s interpretation of Beethoven’s C minor symphony, Mr. Nikisch’s take on it, and again Mr. Gericke’s, comparing them like we would compare Mr. Barnay’s performance of Hamlet with Wilson Barrett’s. The conductor’s charisma, their personality, their style, even the way they dress have come between the audience and the timeless works of the masters, leading to the feeling that a backlash may come that will return us to the simple time-beater. Before diving into the theory of conducting, it might be wise to briefly outline how the role of the conductor has evolved. [Pg 148]
It is impossible to tell when the conductor made his appearance in music. There seems to have been the widest diversity in the customs of different places and different times. In modern music, which may fairly date from the time when vocal and instrumental composition started upon lines of independent development, namely, at the beginning of the seventeenth century, the conductor was at first nothing more than a leader. He was one of the performers whom the rest followed. His function is preserved to-day by the leader of the college glee-club. Yet long before the year 1600 there certainly were conductors who used the baton. An ancient manuscript in a Parisian library contains an illustration (which the reader will find reproduced in Emil Naumann’s “History of Music”) showing Heinrich von Meissen, a minnesinger who died in 1318, conducting a choir of singers and players. He is seated on a raised platform and is using a long baton in his left hand and the extended finger of his right. His attitude and facial expression clearly express his intent to guide those below him, or correct someone who is going astray. Two or three of the figures in the choir seem to be repeating his beat.
It’s hard to say when the conductor first showed up in music. There seems to have been a wide variety of practices in different places and times. In modern music, which really started when vocal and instrumental composition began to develop independently, around the early seventeenth century, the conductor was initially just a leader. He was one of the performers that everyone else followed. This role is still seen today in the leader of a college glee club. However, even before 1600, there were certainly conductors who used a baton. An old manuscript in a Parisian library includes an illustration (which you can find reproduced in Emil Naumann’s “History of Music”) showing Heinrich von Meissen, a minnesinger who died in 1318, conducting a group of singers and players. He is seated on a raised platform, using a long baton in his left hand and pointing with his right finger. His posture and facial expression clearly show that he intends to guide those below him or correct someone who is going off track. Two or three members of the choir appear to be following his beat.
What became of conductors of this kind between 1318 and 1600 I have [Pg 149] been unable to discover. The early operatic performances in Italy, however, were conducted by the harpsichordist, who played the chords sustaining the dry recitative and led the rest of the performers in the orchestral passages. This method of conducting followed Italian opera into Germany and France. Lully’s works were conducted in this manner, and when young Pelham Humphreys, one of the gentlemen of the King’s Chapel, returned from his studies in France, “a young monsieur,” as Pepys notes, and made fun of the performances of his former companions because they could not keep time, he must have shown them how his master, Lully, conducted. At any rate, the conducting of operatic performances at the harpsichord was common in the time of his pupil, Purcell, and when Handel, who had been writing Italian operas for the Germans, went to London, he, too, conducted his own works while sitting at the harpsichord. Heinrich Schütz must certainly have learned this method of conducting when he went down to Italy to get the score of Peri’s “Daphne” for the delectation of the Dresden court, even if he had not known it before. This would account for the introduction into Germany of the Italian method of opera conducting, and it was continued, of course, at Hamburg under Reinhard Keiser and afterward [Pg 150] under Handel. Sufficiently numerous pen-pictures of Handel have come down to us, and we know that he conducted the performances of his operas in Germany sitting at the harpsichord.
What happened to conductors of this type between 1318 and 1600 remains unknown to me. However, the early opera performances in Italy were led by the harpsichordist, who played the chords that supported the dry recitative and directed the other performers during the orchestral sections. This conducting style followed Italian opera into Germany and France. Lully’s works were conducted this way, and when young Pelham Humphreys, a member of the King’s Chapel, returned from his studies in France, “a young monsieur,” as Pepys describes him, teased his former colleagues because they couldn’t keep time; he must have shown them how his mentor, Lully, conducted. In any case, conducting operatic performances at the harpsichord was common during the time of his student, Purcell, and when Handel, who had been composing Italian operas for the Germans, arrived in London, he also conducted his own works while seated at the harpsichord. Heinrich Schütz must have learned this conducting technique when he went to Italy to get the score of Peri’s “Daphne” for the enjoyment of the Dresden court, even if he hadn’t known it before. This explains the introduction of the Italian method of opera conducting in Germany, which continued, of course, in Hamburg under Reinhard Keiser and later under Handel. Numerous descriptions of Handel have been preserved, and we know that he conducted the performances of his operas in Germany while sitting at the harpsichord.
How did these harpsichordists conduct? Undoubtedly, sometimes with a nod of the head, sometimes with a wave of the hand, and occasionally, perhaps, with a most emphatic stamp of the foot. Not a little light is thrown upon the various methods of conducting by the records of the practices of the church musicians. It appears that even in the days of Handel and Bach there were different ways of conducting church music. Johann Bähr, concert-master at Weissenfels, says, in a book published in Nuremberg in 1719, that “one man conducts with the foot, another with the head, a third with the hand, some with both hands, some again take a roll of paper, and others a stick.” It is perfectly clear, from other remarks of Bähr, that these different methods were applied to different kinds of performances. A Nuremberg engraving, published certainly before 1725, shows a music-conductor with a roll of music in each hand directing the performance of a motet from a score. There is an inscription in verse which shows very plainly that this was a real conductor. “Silent myself, I cause the music I control,” is one of the [Pg 151] lines whose meaning is not doubtful. There are other pictures, of about the same date, which show the church-music conductor standing in the midst of a group of singers and players in front of the organ and directing with a roll of music. In some cases the leader of the choir used a violin, with which he could keep the singers on the pitch.
How did these harpsichordists conduct? Clearly, sometimes with a nod of the head, sometimes with a wave of the hand, and occasionally, perhaps, with a strong stamp of the foot. There's a lot to learn about the different methods of conducting from the records of church musicians' practices. Even in the days of Handel and Bach, there were various ways to conduct church music. Johann Bähr, concertmaster at Weissenfels, stated in a book published in Nuremberg in 1719 that “one person conducts with the foot, another with the head, a third with the hand, some with both hands, some take a roll of paper, and others use a stick.” It's clear from Bähr's other comments that these different methods were used for different types of performances. A Nuremberg engraving, published definitely before 1725, shows a conductor with a roll of music in each hand directing the performance of a motet from a score. An inscription in verse clearly indicates that this was a true conductor: “Silent myself, I cause the music I control.” This line leaves no doubt about its meaning. There are other pictures from around the same time showing the church-music conductor standing among a group of singers and players in front of the organ, directing with a roll of music. In some cases, the choir leader used a violin to help keep the singers on pitch.
But it seems as if the quiet style of conducting at the harpsichord, as practised in the opera-houses, must have commended itself to the German church musicians as eminently suited to the sanctuary, for, after 1730, the conductors of sacred music ceased to stand and beat time continually. The custom of conducting all kinds of performances from the harpsichord spread. Sometimes the time was indicated by motions of the hand, at others by the sound of the instrument. Thus, in Germany, undemonstrative harpsichord conducting became popular, while in ever-theatrical France, where the eye must always be fed, the practice of conducting with the baton became general. This led to the scathing remark of Rousseau: “The Opera in Paris is the only theatre in Europe where they beat the time without keeping it; in all other places they keep time without beating it.” The influence of Hasse’s conducting of [Pg 152] the Dresden orchestra had much to do with the common adoption of the harpsichord method in Germany. In the diagram of the Dresden orchestra given in Chapter XV. the reader will see that there were two harpsichords. The conductor sat at the one in the centre; the player who performed the figured bass part sat at the other.
But it seems like the quiet way of conducting at the harpsichord, practiced in the opera houses, must have appealed to the German church musicians as particularly fitting for the sanctuary, because after 1730, the conductors of sacred music stopped standing and constantly keeping time. The habit of conducting all sorts of performances from the harpsichord spread. Sometimes the time was signaled by hand movements, at other times by the sound of the instrument. So, in Germany, subtle harpsichord conducting became popular, while in always-theatrical France, where visual appeal is essential, using a baton for conducting became common. This led to Rousseau’s sharp comment: “The Opera in Paris is the only theater in Europe where they beat the time without keeping it; in all other places they keep time without beating it.” The influence of Hasse’s conducting of the Dresden orchestra had a lot to do with the widespread adoption of the harpsichord method in Germany. In the diagram of the Dresden orchestra given in Chapter XV, the reader will see that there were two harpsichords. The conductor sat at the one in the center; the player who performed the figured bass part sat at the other.
In his famous “Life of Bach,” Dr. Philip Spitta, to whose indefatigable labors of research I am indebted for the above information as to methods of church conducting, says: “When Bach entered on his duties he had the harpsichord in the Thomaskirche [in Leipsic], which had become useless, set in order forthwith, and got the Council to expend the sum of six thalers a year upon keeping it regularly tuned, but it was out of use again in the year 1733.” In regard to the use of the harpsichord for conducting. Dr. Spitta quotes the words of Bach’s son, Philipp Emmanuel, who wrote:
In his well-known "Life of Bach," Dr. Philip Spitta, to whom I owe a great deal of thanks for the above information about church conducting methods, states: “When Bach started his duties, he immediately had the harpsichord in the Thomaskirche [in Leipzig], which had become unusable, repaired and got the Council to spend six thalers a year to keep it regularly tuned. However, it was out of use again by 1733.” Regarding the use of the harpsichord for conducting, Dr. Spitta quotes Bach’s son, Philipp Emanuel, who wrote:
“The notes of the clavier [the German name for any instrument of the piano family], which stands in the middle, surrounded by the musicians, are clearly heard by all. For I myself know that even performances on a large scale, where the performers are far apart, and in which many very moderate musicians take part voluntarily, can be kept in order simply by the tone of the harpsichord. If the first violinist stands, as he [Pg 153] should, near the harpsichord, it is difficult for any confusion to ensue.... If, however, anybody begins to hurry or drag the time, he can be corrected in the plainest possible way by means of the clavier; while the other instruments have enough to do with their own parts because of the number of passages and syncopations; and especially the parts which are in tempo rubato by this means get the necessary emphatic up-beat of the bar marked for them. Lastly, by this method—since the musicians are not hindered by the noise of the clavier from perceiving the slightest nuances of time—the pace can be slightly lessened, as is often necessary; and the musicians who stand behind or near the clavier have the beat of the bar given out in the most evident, and consequently the most emphatic, way before their eyes by both hands at once.”
“The notes from the keyboard instrument in the center, surrounded by the musicians, can be clearly heard by everyone. I know from experience that even large performances, where the musicians are spaced apart and many moderately skilled players participate voluntarily, can be organized just through the sound of the harpsichord. If the first violinist positions themselves, as they should, close to the harpsichord, it’s hard for any confusion to arise. If someone starts to rush or slow down the tempo, they can be easily adjusted through the keyboard; meanwhile, the other instruments have enough to focus on with their own parts due to the numerous passages and syncopations. This is especially true for parts that use tempo rubato, which receive the necessary emphasis for the upbeat of the measure. Lastly, with this method—since the musicians are not distracted by the keyboard sounds from noticing the smallest nuances of timing—the tempo can be slightly reduced when needed; and the musicians who are behind or near the keyboard get the measure’s beat clearly and emphatically brought to their attention by both hands simultaneously.”
These words are singularly enlightening as to the exact methods and advantages of harpsichord conducting, and they go far toward explaining the reasons why this method survived as long as it did. It continued to be used, as we shall presently see, long after the time-beater had become a fixed institution and even in conjunction with his work. Undoubtedly, this was because the older orchestral players had become [Pg 154] so thoroughly schooled to follow the harpsichordist that they could not be induced to give their whole attention to the time-beater and the counting of their own rests. Gradually, however, as the wind choir of the modern orchestra increased in power, the harpsichord was unable to make itself heard, and it had to give way to a method of conducting which appealed wholly to the eye. It was doubtless owing to the continued existence of old musicians trained in the early school that for a time the harpsichord and the baton were employed simultaneously. It is not at all unlikely that in some instances a distinguished composer, whose work was undergoing the ordeal of a first hearing, was invited to sit at the harpsichord, where he pretended much and did little, while his presence added to the interest of the public, and someone else really conducted the performance with a baton. The first violin, too, played an important part in the conducting of an orchestra, so much so that to this day he is known either as the concert-master or the leader, although his functions have wholly changed.
These words shed light on the specific methods and benefits of conducting with a harpsichord, and they help explain why this method lasted as long as it did. As we'll see shortly, it continued to be used long after the time-beater became a standard role, even alongside the work of the time-beater. This was likely because the older orchestral players were so used to following the harpsichordist that they couldn't fully focus on the time-beater and managing their own rests. However, as the power of the wind section in the modern orchestra grew, the harpsichord became too quiet to be heard, leading to a conducting style that relied entirely on visual cues. It was probably the presence of older musicians trained in the earlier style that allowed for a time when the harpsichord and baton were used together. It’s quite possible that in some cases, a prominent composer, whose piece was being heard for the first time, was invited to sit at the harpsichord, pretending to be involved while actually contributing little, but his presence added to the event's appeal, with someone else actually conducting the performance with a baton. The first violin also played a crucial role in conducting the orchestra, so much so that to this day he’s known as either the concertmaster or the leader, although his responsibilities have completely changed.
At one time he was the only conductor that some orchestras had. Part of the time he played, leading the others by the motions of his bow and by raising and lowering the neck of his violin on the beats. Again he [Pg 155] would cease to play and conduct with the violin bow. He was known as the leader of the orchestra, and his descendant exists in the contemporaneous theatre, where the first violinist of the little orchestra of eight or ten pieces is the leader. Some concert-goers will doubtless recall the fact that both Johann and Eduard Strauss conducted their dance-music in this manner.
At one point, he was the only conductor that some orchestras had. Sometimes he played, guiding the others with the movements of his bow and by raising and lowering the neck of his violin to mark the beats. At other times, he would stop playing and conduct with the violin bow. He was known as the leader of the orchestra, and his role still exists in today’s theater, where the first violinist of a small orchestra of eight or ten musicians is the leader. Some concert-goers will likely remember that both Johann and Eduard Strauss conducted their dance music this way. [Pg 155]
In Haydn’s day the performance of symphonic music enlisted both harpsichordist and time-beater, and at the famous London concerts for which the genial master composed some of his best symphonies, he himself sat at the harpsichord, while Salomon, the manager of the entertainments, beat time. That a similar method should have been employed in the performance of vocal works even in the present century is not surprising, but we must bear in mind that it was applied to compositions whose scores contain no clavier parts. At Vienna, in 1808, Haydn’s “Creation” was performed with Kreuzer at the harpsichord and Salieri conducting. In 1815 Beethoven’s “Mount of Olives” was given in the same city with Umlauf at the piano and Wranitzky conducting. At the Berlin Singakadamie Zelter used to beat time while one of his pupils was at the harpsichord. The practice of conducting from the piano, even [Pg 156] without the time-beater, clung tenaciously to life, for it is on record that Mendelssohn, at a concert of the London Philharmonic Society in the Argyll Rooms, on May 25, 1829, conducted his symphony in C minor from a piano. It may be as well to note here that the eminent composer, Ludwig Spohr, in 1820 introduced the modern manner of conducting in England. He stood at a desk at the front of the stage and directed with a baton. He describes in his autobiography the general opposition of the Philharmonic musicians which he had to overcome in order to begin this practice. “Henceforth,” he says, “no one was ever again seen seated at the piano during the performance of symphonies and overtures.” He was not informed of Mendelssohn’s piano conducting.
In Haydn's time, symphonic music performances included both a harpsichord player and a conductor, and at the famous London concerts where the friendly maestro created some of his best symphonies, he played the harpsichord while Salomon, the concert manager, conducted. It's not surprising that a similar approach was used for vocal works even in this century, but it's important to note that this was for compositions that don’t have keyboard parts in their scores. In Vienna, in 1808, Haydn’s “Creation” was performed with Kreuzer at the harpsichord and Salieri conducting. In 1815, Beethoven’s “Mount of Olives” was presented in the same city with Umlauf at the piano and Wranitzky conducting. At the Berlin Singakadamie, Zelter would beat time while one of his students played the harpsichord. The practice of conducting from the piano, even without a timekeeper, stuck around for a long time; it’s recorded that Mendelssohn conducted his symphony in C minor from a piano at a concert of the London Philharmonic Society in the Argyll Rooms on May 25, 1829. It’s worth mentioning here that the notable composer Ludwig Spohr introduced modern conducting practices in England in 1820. He stood at a podium at the front of the stage and conducted with a baton. In his autobiography, he describes the resistance he faced from the Philharmonic musicians when trying to start this practice. “From now on,” he says, “no one would ever again be seen seated at the piano during symphonies and overtures.” He was not aware of Mendelssohn’s conducting from the piano.
We have now come to the period when the mere time-beater began to give way to the interpreting conductor, the director who invites you to consider his especial “reading” of this or that work and be wise. Before we leave the time-beater, however, let me remind the reader that his function is by no means to be despised, and in the case of some suave and gentle classical works it would be well if he presided over the performances of some of our present orchestras. Berlioz has said: “The talent of the beater of time, without demanding very high musical [Pg 157] attainments, is nevertheless sufficiently difficult to obtain; and very few persons really possess it. The signs that a conductor should make—although generally simple—nevertheless become complicated under certain circumstances by the division and even the subdivision of the time of the bar.” Berlioz has given us, in the concluding chapter of his admirable work on orchestration, an essay on the art of the time-beater, which is well worth reading. It is sufficient to say here that the old-fashioned time-beater’s work was complete when he indicated the correct tempo, and plainly marked the beginning and necessary subdivisions of each bar.
We have now reached a time when the simple timekeeper is being replaced by the interpreting conductor, the director who encourages you to consider his unique “interpretation” of this or that piece and gain insight. Before we move on from the timekeeper, though, let me remind you that their role is not to be underestimated, and for some smooth and gentle classical pieces, it would be beneficial if they led the performances of some of our current orchestras. Berlioz stated: “The skill of the timekeeper, while not requiring very high musical expertise, is still quite difficult to achieve; and only a few people truly possess it. The signals a conductor should give—though generally straightforward—can become complicated under certain situations due to the division and even the subdivision of the bar’s rhythm.” In the final chapter of his excellent work on orchestration, Berlioz provides an essay on the art of timekeeping, which is definitely worth a read. It’s enough to mention here that the old-fashioned timekeeper’s job was complete when they indicated the correct tempo and clearly marked the beginning and necessary divisions of each bar.
When the composer conducted his own works, as was so often the case in the earlier days of symphonic music, there was no need of an interpretative conductor. But when the composer had long passed from the land of the living and the traditions of his readings had become obscured, or when his works were to be introduced in a foreign country—as in the case of Beethoven’s symphonies in France—the interpretative conductor became a necessity. Furthermore, when the art of conducting began to be recognized as a specialty, it was conceded that composers were generally poor conductors of their own works, and [Pg 158] the orchestral director became a distinct species. Hector Berlioz, for example, could not play any instrument save the guitar, and Richard Wagner was only a very poor pianist; yet both were admirable conductors.
When composers conducted their own music, which was common in the early days of symphonic music, there was no need for a separate interpretative conductor. However, once the composer had passed away and the nuances of their interpretations had faded, or when their works were being introduced in a new country—like Beethoven’s symphonies in France—the role of the interpretative conductor became essential. Additionally, as the art of conducting gained recognition as a specialized skill, it became clear that composers were usually not great conductors of their own music, leading to the emergence of the orchestral director as a unique role. For instance, Hector Berlioz could only play the guitar, and Richard Wagner was a mediocre pianist; yet both were outstanding conductors. [Pg 158]
The interpreting conductor came into existence in the early part of the present century. It cannot be said that any one man was the first representative of the species, but rather that it was one of the first-fruits of the romantic movement, that healthy renaissance of musical emotion. Both German capellmeisters and French directors had occupied themselves wholly with the regulation of the technics of the orchestra, and if the tempo was about right and the instruments kept well together and gave the broader effects of light and shade, they were satisfied. But two or three progressive conductors insisted upon further refinement of orchestral performance.
The interpreting conductor emerged in the early part of this century. It's hard to credit any single person as the first representative of this role; rather, it was one of the initial developments of the romantic movement, a vibrant revival of musical emotion. German capellmeisters and French directors had primarily focused on managing the technical aspects of the orchestra, and as long as the tempo was roughly correct and the instruments blended well, producing a good mix of light and shade, they were content. However, a couple of pioneering conductors pushed for greater refinement in orchestral performance.
Johann Karl Stamitz (1719-61), director of the Mannheim orchestra, and François Joseph Gossec (1733-1829), founder of the Concert des Amateurs in Paris, were the two conductors who carried orchestral technics up to the point at which genuine interpretative work became possible by reason of the refinement of the means of expression. It was in studying the means of orchestral expression that these conductors gradually [Pg 159] approached the questions of interpretation. As they polished the phrasing of their orchestras, they began to inquire whether they were applying their nuances in the proper places, and so they advanced toward that point at which the interpreting conductor sits down before a score to study out a complete plan of performance deduced from his conception of the intent of the composer. Gossec founded the Concert des Amateurs in 1770 and was himself the conductor. Symphonies by Toeschi, Vanhall, Stamitz and other composers were produced, and the conductor had at any rate to decide the tempo and place the broader dynamic effects according to his own conception, for these matters were not carefully marked in the scores as they are now.
Johann Karl Stamitz (1719-61), the director of the Mannheim orchestra, and François Joseph Gossec (1733-1829), the founder of the Concert des Amateurs in Paris, were the two conductors who advanced orchestral techniques to the point where genuine interpretative work became possible due to the refinement of expressive means. By studying the tools of orchestral expression, these conductors gradually tackled the questions of interpretation. As they refined the phrasing of their orchestras, they began to ask whether they were applying their nuances in the right places, leading them to the point where the interpreting conductor sits down with a score to devise a complete performance plan based on their understanding of the composer's intent. Gossec established the Concert des Amateurs in 1770 and served as its conductor. Symphonies by Toeschi, Vanhall, Stamitz, and other composers were performed, and the conductor had to make decisions about tempo and place broader dynamic effects based on their own interpretation, since these details were not as precisely marked in the scores as they are today.
Before Gossec’s death the modern interpretative conductor had made his appearance. Spohr, Mendelssohn, and Weber were early representatives of the species. All three of them occupied at different times posts of the highest importance in the department of conducting. Spohr at Cassel, Mendelssohn in the Leipsic Gewandhaus, and Weber at the Dresden Opera were, without doubt, interpreting conductors. They advanced without hesitation beyond the mere study of orchestral technics to the study of the correct style and feeling in the performance. Spohr was an [Pg 160] enthusiast on the subject of Mozart’s music, and he conducted Mozart’s symphonies according to his own ideas. Weber revived old German operas and treated them as he believed their composers would have treated them. Mendelssohn was the resurrector of Bach’s Passion music, which had lain buried for a century, and he was not silent as to his conception of its proper performance.
Before Gossec’s death, the modern interpretative conductor emerged. Spohr, Mendelssohn, and Weber were early examples of this role. All three held prestigious conducting positions at different times. Spohr in Cassel, Mendelssohn at the Leipzig Gewandhaus, and Weber at the Dresden Opera were, without a doubt, interpretative conductors. They confidently went beyond just studying orchestral techniques to explore the right style and expression in performance. Spohr was passionate about Mozart’s music, conducting Mozart’s symphonies according to his own views. Weber revived old German operas, treating them as he believed their composers would have intended. Mendelssohn resurrected Bach’s Passion music, which had been forgotten for a century, and he made his views on its proper performance very clear.
The most conspicuous figure among the early interpreting conductors was unquestionably François Antoine Habeneck (1781-1849), the founder of the Société des Concerts du Conservatoire. Habeneck was compelled to be an interpreter. He was a conductor pure and simple. He had no gospel of his own to preach, but he aimed at making the symphonies of Beethoven known in France, and he was thus forced to become an interpreter of the mighty Ludwig’s thought. He not only brought the Conservatoire orchestra to a remarkably high point of technical ability, but he conducted Beethoven’s music with a force, a sentiment, a nobility of style that carried conviction with it and compelled Paris to acknowledge the genius of the German master. Berlioz, himself a skilful conductor, has rendered homage to Habeneck’s powers, and there is abundant testimony that he was the Richter or the Gericke (or whom you please) of his day. [Pg 161]
The most prominent figure among the early interpreting conductors was undoubtedly François Antoine Habeneck (1781-1849), the founder of the Société des Concerts du Conservatoire. Habeneck had to be an interpreter. He was simply a conductor. He didn’t have a personal vision to share but aimed to make Beethoven's symphonies known in France, thus becoming an interpreter of Ludwig's powerful ideas. He not only elevated the Conservatoire orchestra to an impressive level of technical skill but also conducted Beethoven’s music with a strength, emotion, and elegance that resonated deeply and forced Paris to recognize the genius of the German master. Berlioz, a skilled conductor in his own right, acknowledged Habeneck’s talents, and there is ample evidence that he was the Richter or Gericke (or whoever you prefer) of his time. [Pg 161]
The list of conductors of the Leipsic Gewandhaus concerts shows conclusively that, so far as they were concerned, interpretative conducting began with Mendelssohn. His predecessors were merely good leaders; his successors have all been men of talent, such as Ferdinand Hiller, Julius Rietz, Neils Gade, and Karl Reinecke. In France it is easy to follow the succession of great interpretative conductors. Habeneck conducted the concerts of the Conservatoire until 1848. In 1851 Jules Etienne Pasdeloup founded and conducted the first concert of the Société des Jeunes Artistes du Conservatoire. In 1873 Colonne began his career as a conductor, and in the same year Lamoureux made himself a place. These men are admirable representatives of the genus conductor as known in our day.
The list of conductors of the Leipzig Gewandhaus concerts clearly shows that interpretative conducting really started with Mendelssohn. His predecessors were just good leaders; his successors have all been talented individuals like Ferdinand Hiller, Julius Rietz, Neils Gade, and Karl Reinecke. In France, it’s easy to trace the line of great interpretative conductors. Habeneck led the concerts at the Conservatoire until 1848. In 1851, Jules Etienne Pasdeloup established and conducted the first concert of the Société des Jeunes Artistes du Conservatoire. In 1873, Colonne began his career as a conductor, and the same year, Lamoureux made his mark. These men are excellent representatives of what it means to be a conductor today.
There is no doubt that the art of interpretative conducting received a strong impulse in Germany from the work of Richard Wagner, who entered upon his career as a director at the Magdeburg Theatre in the autumn of 1834. It was not so much by his individual labors as a conductor that Wagner aided in the development of the interpreting art as by his fiery castigation of the mechanical and slovenly work of careless capellmeisters, and his luminous words upon the right method of [Pg 162] directing orchestral performances. In the spread of his doctrines he was mightily aided, first by the admirable conducting of Liszt, and afterward by that of Hans von Bülow, without doubt, one of the best conductors who ever set foot on the platform. His readings of Wagner were, of course, authoritative, and his interpretations of Beethoven carried with them so much conviction that they were regarded as equally so. Dr. Hans Richter, who came into prominence in 1875, carried forward the work, and Germany has since produced a number of the most eminent interpreting conductors. Indeed, there can be no question that the best representatives of the class have been and still are German or Austrian, including Hungarian in the latter.
There's no doubt that the art of interpretative conducting got a significant boost in Germany from Richard Wagner's work, who started his career as a director at the Magdeburg Theatre in the fall of 1834. It wasn't just his individual efforts as a conductor that helped develop this art; it was also his passionate criticism of the mechanical and careless work of sloppy capellmeisters, along with his insightful advice on the proper methods for directing orchestral performances. His ideas spread widely, thanks in part to the excellent conducting of Liszt, and later, Hans von Bülow, who is undoubtedly one of the best conductors to ever take the stage. His interpretations of Wagner were, of course, authoritative, and his readings of Beethoven were so convincing that they were seen as equally authoritative. Dr. Hans Richter, who rose to prominence in 1875, continued this work, and since then, Germany has produced many of the most outstanding interpreting conductors. Indeed, it's clear that the top representatives of this field have been and continue to be German or Austrian, with Hungarian included in the latter.
In the United States all the eminent conductors have been men whose early musical nourishment was obtained in Germany. The conductors of the Philharmonic Society of New York began with Theodore Eisfeld, who came into notice in the season of 1849-50. Subsequently he shared his labors with Carl Bergmann, who became the sole conductor in 1865 and remained in office till the close of the season of 1875-76. Mr. Bergmann was an interpreting conductor and a determined advocate of certain advances in music. Once, when he had been giving his hearers a good deal of Wagner, someone expostulated with him, saying, “But, Mr. Bergmann, the people don’t like Wagner.” “Don’t like Vagner!” answered Bergmann; “den dey must hear him till dey do!”
In the United States, all the top conductors have been men who got their musical training in Germany. The conductors of the New York Philharmonic Society started with Theodore Eisfeld, who gained recognition in the 1849-50 season. He later shared the role with Carl Bergmann, who became the sole conductor in 1865 and held that position until the end of the 1875-76 season. Mr. Bergmann was an interpreting conductor and a strong supporter of certain advancements in music. Once, after he had been playing a lot of Wagner for his audience, someone objected, saying, “But, Mr. Bergmann, the people don’t like Wagner.” “Don't like Wagner!” Bergmann replied; “then they must hear him until they do!”

Copyright by Elliott & Fry.
Copyright by Elliott & Fry.
HANS RICHTER.
Hans Richter.
[Pg 163] Mr. Bergmann’s successor was Leopold Damrosch, who conducted the Philharmonic only a year, but left an imperishable record as the founder of the Oratorio Society and the regenerator of German opera in New York. Of the labors of Theodore Thomas and Anton Seidl it is unnecessary to speak. As interpreting conductors they have not been excelled in America in their especial fields. In Boston, Carl Zerrahn, Georg Henschel, Wilhelm Gericke, Arthur Nikisch, and Emil Paur did notable work as interpreting conductors. The tendency in our day, indeed, has been to do a little too much interpreting, and as a result the conductor has too frequently distracted attention from the music to himself. The public, prone to run after a virtuoso of any kind, has readily bowed the knee at the shrine of the baton-wielder, and we have beheld the curious spectacle of people going not to hear Beethoven or Wagner, but Nikisch or Seidl.
[Pg 163] Mr. Bergmann’s successor was Leopold Damrosch, who led the Philharmonic for just a year but left a lasting legacy as the founder of the Oratorio Society and a revitalizer of German opera in New York. There's no need to elaborate on the contributions of Theodore Thomas and Anton Seidl; as conducting interpreters, they haven’t been surpassed in America in their specific areas. In Boston, Carl Zerrahn, Georg Henschel, Wilhelm Gericke, Arthur Nikisch, and Emil Paur made significant contributions as interpreting conductors. Nowadays, there seems to be a tendency to focus too much on interpretation, causing conductors to often shift the audience's attention from the music to themselves. The public, eager to follow any kind of virtuoso, has quickly become enamored with the conductor, leading to the unusual situation where people go not to experience Beethoven or Wagner, but Nikisch or Seidl.
[Pg 164]
[Pg 164]
XIII
Functions of the Conductor
Perhaps nothing connected with the orchestra is more completely misunderstood by amateurs than the functions of the conductor. I remember that in the days of a certain distinguished orchestral director there were two of his ardent admirers who always occupied seats in the front row, just a little to his left. There they sat, with rapt expressions on their faces, gazing at the conductor. They never took their eyes off him, and I am morally certain they had finally come to think that the whole of every composition emanated from the swaying end of his baton. They overrated the importance of the conductor, but not so much more than the average concert-goer. The first and radical blunder made by the typical music-lover is in supposing that the work of a conductor is done at the performance. In some mysterious way this man with a stick in his hand is supposed to hypnotize, magnetize, or [Pg 165] just vulgarly scare the musicians into playing certain music according to impulses which have just developed in his breast. I have heard people coming out of a concert-room say such things as these:
Maybe nothing related to the orchestra is more misunderstood by amateurs than the role of the conductor. I remember a time when a certain well-known orchestral director had two enthusiastic fans who always sat in the front row, slightly to his left. They were there, with captivated expressions, watching the conductor intently. They never looked away from him, and I'm pretty sure they eventually believed that every piece of music originated from the tip of his baton. They overestimated the conductor's importance, but not much more than the average concert-goer. The first major mistake made by a typical music lover is thinking that a conductor’s job starts and ends during the performance. Somehow, this guy with a stick is expected to hypnotize, magnetize, or just intimidate the musicians into playing music based on feelings that just hit him. I've heard people leaving a concert say things like:
“I thought Mr. Seidl was very cold to-night, didn’t you?”
“I thought Mr. Seidl was really cold tonight, didn’t you?”
“Yes, he was, indeed. That’s why I liked Nikisch so much; he always kept the orchestra on fire.”
“Yes, he really was. That’s why I liked Nikisch so much; he always kept the orchestra energized.”
There is a substratum of truth in all this kind of talk. A conductor of cold temperament will not give highly colored readings, nor will he excite enthusiasm in his orchestra. A conductor of poetic feeling will conduct poetically and he will make his orchestra play so. But neither of them accomplishes his result suddenly and spontaneously at the performance. All that a conductor does at a performance is to remind his players of what he told them at rehearsal. It could not be otherwise, for the beat of the baton and the utterance of the sound by the instruments is almost simultaneous.
There’s a basic truth in all this kind of discussion. A conductor with a cool temperament won’t give vibrant interpretations, nor will he inspire enthusiasm in his orchestra. A conductor with poetic sensitivity will lead in a poetic way and get his orchestra to play that way too. But neither achieves their result suddenly and automatically during the performance. All a conductor does at a performance is remind his players of what he told them in rehearsal. It couldn't be any other way since the beat of the baton and the sound made by the instruments happen almost at the same time.
To remind the musicians of what he has already instructed them to do, the conductor employs certain pantomimic motions and facial expressions, some of which have been so generally used that they are conventional, while others are, of course, peculiar to the individual. [Pg 166] Everyone knows, for example, that Hans von Bülow was fond of conducting with an eye to effect upon the audience, and that some of his pantomime was comic. In a diminuendo I have seen him stoop lower and lower till he was almost hidden behind the music-stand, and at a sudden forte he would spring up again like a jack-in-the-box. No one can ever forget those spasmodic, but tremendously eloquent, jerks of the chin with its long beard which Dr. Leopold Damrosch used to aim at his men when there was a staccato chord to be played. Who does not recall the eloquent hands of Nikisch and the equally eloquent cuffs of Seidl? Thomas, with his occasional sidewise cant of the head, and Richter, with the apparently increasing confusion of his hair and his beard, also come back to my memories of pictorial peculiarities of conductors.
To remind the musicians of what he has already told them to do, the conductor uses various hand gestures and facial expressions, some of which are so commonly used that they’ve become standard, while others are unique to him. [Pg 166] Everyone knows, for instance, that Hans von Bülow liked to conduct with an eye toward how it affected the audience, and some of his gestures were humorous. During a diminuendo, I’ve seen him bend lower and lower until he was nearly out of sight behind the music stand, and then suddenly jump back up like a jack-in-the-box during a forte. No one can forget those jerky, yet incredibly expressive movements of the chin and long beard that Dr. Leopold Damrosch aimed at his musicians when they needed to play a staccato chord. Who doesn’t remember the expressive hands of Nikisch and the equally expressive gestures of Seidl? Thomas, with his occasional sideways tilt of the head, and Richter, with the seemingly growing mess of his hair and beard, also come to mind as memorable characteristics of conductors.
Besides these peculiarities, conductors have their own habits in the use of the baton, and orchestras must necessarily become accustomed to them in order that they may not be misled at critical moments. For it does, indeed, happen sometimes at the public performances that things go wrong, and then the conductor must contrive to set them straight; and he must do it entirely by his pantomime, for the privilege of the [Pg 167] rehearsal, to stop the orchestra and begin again, is no longer his. At the rehearsal he can tell what he desires, but in the concert he must go on. It is at the rehearsal, however, that the real work of the conductor is done. At the performance he must confine himself to beating time, to indicating to those players who have rests when they are to begin again, to a warning look here in case a part is played too loudly, or to an encouraging nod there in case one is not played loudly enough.
Besides these quirks, conductors have their own habits when using the baton, and orchestras need to get used to them so they won’t be confused during critical moments. Sometimes during public performances, things go wrong, and the conductor has to find a way to fix them; he has to do this entirely through his gestures, because he can no longer stop the orchestra and start over like he can during rehearsal. In rehearsal, he can express what he wants, but in the concert, he has to keep going. However, the real work of the conductor happens during rehearsal. At the performance, he has to focus on keeping time, signaling players who have rests when they should start again, giving a warning glance if someone is playing too loudly, or offering an encouraging nod if someone isn't playing loudly enough.
I have often heard persons not unfamiliar with concerts declare that a conductor was of no use because the players never looked at him. This is a rather large statement. The players do not look at the conductor all the time, because they are obliged to occupy themselves chiefly with reading music, but they look at him frequently, and they do so invariably at essential places. Furthermore, they always see him out of the corners of their eyes, as the saying goes, while they are reading the pages before them.
I’ve often heard people who attend concerts say that a conductor is unnecessary because the musicians never pay attention to him. That’s quite an exaggeration. The musicians don’t focus on the conductor all the time because they have to concentrate primarily on reading the music, but they do check in with him frequently, especially at important moments. Additionally, they always catch a glimpse of him out of the corner of their eyes, so to speak, while reading the pages in front of them.
The function of a conductor, as it stands to-day, can best be understood by applying to him the definition given at the beginning of this book. The orchestra is an instrument upon which he performs. Hector Berlioz, the famous French composer, said that the only [Pg 168] instrument upon which he could play was the orchestra, and in that he resembled Richard Wagner, who was an indifferent pianist, and Anton Seidl, who was a very bad one. The conductor plays upon an orchestra, not by waving a baton and magnetizing his men, but by carefully instructing them at rehearsal as to what he desires them to do, and by going over it and over it again till the execution of his design is perfected. A conductor, then, must come to the rehearsal with a completely prepared plan of interpretation. He must know the score thoroughly. He must have analyzed every measure. He must be in the same position as the skilled theatrical stage-manager who has planned every bit of “stage business” for a new play before he goes to the first rehearsal.
The role of a conductor today is best understood by referring to the definition given at the beginning of this book. The orchestra is the instrument he plays. Hector Berlioz, the well-known French composer, stated that the only instrument he could perform on was the orchestra, which he shared with Richard Wagner, who was not a great pianist, and Anton Seidl, who was quite poor at it. The conductor leads an orchestra, not just by waving a baton and commanding his musicians, but by carefully guiding them during rehearsals about what he wants them to do, going over it repeatedly until his vision is fully realized. Therefore, a conductor must arrive at rehearsals with a completely developed interpretative plan. He must know the score inside and out. He must have analyzed every measure. He needs to be like a skilled theater director who has outlined every aspect of the "stage business" for a new play before the first rehearsal.
At the rehearsal he must explain his wishes to the men, and play through each movement of a symphony piece-meal before he undertakes to go through it without a stop. A judicious conductor makes no attempt to put a poetic explanation before his orchestra. He works entirely on the technics of the performance, and leaves the temperament and enthusiasm of his men to do the rest. A conductor once went from another city to Boston to conduct an orchestra at the first appearance in this country [Pg 169] of an eminent pianist, whose pièce de resistance was to be Liszt’s E flat concerto. At the beginning of the scherzo there are some lightly tripping notes for the triangle, which the player struck too heavily to please the conductor’s fancy. He rapped with his baton to stop the orchestra.
At the rehearsal, he needs to communicate his ideas to the musicians and play through each section of a symphony piece by piece before he attempts to conduct it all the way through without stopping. A wise conductor doesn’t try to provide a poetic explanation to his orchestra. He focuses entirely on the technical aspects of the performance and lets the passion and energy of his musicians handle the rest. One conductor traveled from another city to Boston to lead an orchestra for the first performance in this country of a renowned pianist, whose main piece was Liszt’s E flat concerto. At the start of the scherzo, there are some light, quick notes for the triangle, but the player struck them too hard for the conductor’s liking. He tapped with his baton to stop the orchestra. [Pg 169]
“Sir,” he said, gravely, addressing the triangle player, “those notes should sound like a blue-bell struck by a fairy.”
“Sir,” he said, seriously, addressing the triangle player, “those notes should sound like a bluebell struck by a fairy.”
Whereupon the whole body of instrumentalists burst into uncontrollable laughter. I told this story subsequently to a New York musician, a member of Theodore Thomas’s orchestra, and he looked so amazed that I said:
Whereupon the entire group of musicians erupted into uncontrollable laughter. I later shared this story with a musician from New York, a member of Theodore Thomas’s orchestra, and he looked so astonished that I said:
“But doesn’t Mr. Thomas talk to you at rehearsal?”
“But doesn’t Mr. Thomas talk to you during rehearsal?”
“Oh, yes! Oh, certainly!” was the reply.
“Oh, yes! Oh, definitely!” was the reply.
“Well, what does he say?”
"Well, what does he say?"
“He says ‘D——n!’”
“He says ‘Damn!’”
Richard Wagner, who was nothing if not polemic, wrote a book on conducting, in which there are some pregnant assertions, as there are in all his writings. He says: “The whole duty of a conductor is comprised in his ability always to indicate the right tempo. His choice of tempi will show whether he understands the piece or not. With good players again the true tempo induces correct phrasing and expression, [Pg 170] and conversely, with a conductor, the idea of appropriate phrasing and expression will induce the conception of the true tempo.” There is an essential truth in this statement, but its writer did not add those corollaries which are necessary to constitute the whole truth, especially for the amateur. The passage which immediately precedes the above statement explains why Wagner looked upon the tempo as the most important matter for the conductor to decide. He says: “In the days of my youth orchestral pieces at the celebrated Leipsic Gewandhaus concerts were not conducted at all; they were simply played through under the leadership of Concertmeister Mathäi, like overtures and entr’actes at a theatre.” Such performances annoyed and discouraged Wagner; but in 1839 he got a valuable lesson from hearing the Conservatoire orchestra of Paris rehearse a Beethoven symphony under Habeneck. “The scales fell from my eyes,” he says; “I came to understand the value of correct execution, and the secret of a good performance. The orchestra had learned to look for Beethoven’s melody in every bar—that melody which the worthy Leipsic musicians had failed to discover; and the orchestra sang that melody. This was the secret.” A little farther on he says: “The French idea of playing an instrument well is to be able to sing well upon it. And (as already said) [Pg 171] that superb orchestra sang the symphony. The possibility of its being well sung implies that the true tempo had been found; and this was the second point which impressed me at the time. Old Habeneck was not the medium of any abstract æsthetical inspiration—he was devoid of genius; but he found the right tempo while persistently fixing the attention of his orchestra upon the Melos[1] of the symphony. The right comprehension of the Melos is the sole guide to the true tempo.”
Richard Wagner, who was definitely controversial, wrote a book on conducting, featuring some significant points, as all his writings do. He states: “The conductor's main responsibility is to consistently indicate the right tempo. His choices in tempo will show whether he truly understands the piece or not. With talented players, the proper tempo inspires correct phrasing and expression, and on the flip side, a conductor's grasp of appropriate phrasing and expression will lead to an understanding of the true tempo.” There’s a fundamental truth in this statement, but the author didn’t include the necessary corollaries that make up the complete truth, especially for beginners. The section right before this statement clarifies why Wagner viewed tempo as the conductor's most crucial decision. He mentions: “In my younger years, orchestral pieces at the famous Leipzig Gewandhaus concerts were not conducted at all; they were simply played through under the guidance of Concertmaster Mathäi, much like overtures and interludes at a theater.” Such performances frustrated and disheartened Wagner; however, in 1839, he learned a valuable lesson from observing the Conservatoire orchestra in Paris rehearse a Beethoven symphony under Habeneck. “The scales fell from my eyes,” he remarks; “I began to appreciate the importance of correct execution and the secret to a good performance. The orchestra learned to seek out Beethoven’s melody in every bar—that melody which the esteemed Leipzig musicians had failed to find; and the orchestra expressed that melody. This was the secret.” A bit later, he adds: “The French concept of playing an instrument well is being able to sing well on it. And (as mentioned before) that exceptional orchestra sang the symphony. The ability to sing it well suggests that the true tempo was discovered; this was the second point that struck me at the time. Old Habeneck wasn’t the source of any abstract aesthetic inspiration—he lacked genius; but he identified the right tempo while consistently directing the orchestra’s focus on the Melos of the symphony. A proper understanding of the Melos is the only guide to the true tempo.”
[1] Melody in all its aspects.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Melody in every sense.
These words of Wagner’s are excellent, but they may convey an exaggerated conception of the case to an amateur. It is beyond dispute that if the tempo is incorrect, the performance must inevitably be weak or utterly bad; but it does not follow that when the tempo is right, all will be satisfactory. Nevertheless, it is true that the first and most important duty of the conductor is to decide the tempo, and that he can only do by a complete comprehension of the musical character of the composition. In music written since Beethoven’s day the conductor has something to guide him in the matter of tempo, as I shall presently show; but in earlier compositions he will find only such general terms [Pg 172] as allegro, adagio, or andante. He will not even discover such attempts at specification as andante con moto, allegro pesante, or presto ma non troppo.
These words from Wagner are great, but they might give someone inexperienced an exaggerated idea of the situation. It's clear that if the tempo is wrong, the performance will be weak or completely off; however, just because the tempo is right doesn’t mean everything will be good. Still, it's true that the conductor’s first and most important job is to decide the tempo, which can only be done by fully understanding the musical character of the piece. In music composed since Beethoven, the conductor has some guidance regarding tempo, as I will explain shortly; but in earlier works, they will only find general terms like allegro, adagio, or andante. There won’t even be more specific terms like andante con moto, allegro pesante, or presto ma non troppo. [Pg 172]
These directions are not sufficiently precise. Wagner himself tells how he wrote “Mässig” (moderate) in the score of “Das Rheingold,” with the result that the drama took three hours under the opera conductor. “To match this,” he adds, “I have been informed that the overture to ‘Tannhäuser,’ which, when I conducted it at Dresden, used to last 12 minutes, now lasts 20.” Wagner notes that Sebastian Bach did not customarily indicate the tempo at all, “which in a truly musical sense is perhaps best.” But to leave all movements without tempo marks would be to assume that all conductors were truly gifted. Since Beethoven’s latter days it has been the custom of composers to indicate the correct tempo by what is known as the metronome mark.
These instructions aren't clear enough. Wagner himself describes how he wrote “Mässig” (moderate) in the score of “Das Rheingold,” which led to the drama running three hours under the opera conductor. “To compare,” he adds, “I've been told that the overture to ‘Tannhäuser,’ which, when I conducted it in Dresden, used to last 12 minutes, now lasts 20.” Wagner observes that Sebastian Bach didn't usually specify the tempo at all, “which, in a true musical sense, might be the best approach.” However, leaving all movements without tempo markings would suggest that all conductors were genuinely talented. Since Beethoven's later years, it has become standard for composers to indicate the appropriate tempo using what’s called the metronome mark.
A metronome is an instrument which can be set to tick off with a pendulum any number of beats from forty to two hundred and eight a minute. A composer desiring to indicate a tempo uses a formula like this: M. M.
A metronome is a device that can be adjusted to tick at any speed between forty and two hundred and eight beats per minute. A composer who wants to specify a tempo uses a notation like this: M. M.
= 78.
= 78 BPM.
The letters M. M. mean Maelzel’s Metronome (the instrument). The note (in this case a minim) means that the beats of the pendulum are to be [Pg 173] regarded as representing minims, crotchets, or quavers, as the case may be. The figure indicates the number of beats per minute. In the above formula the composition would probably be one written in two-fourth time, that is, with one minim to a bar, and the metronome mark would indicate that seventy-eight minims, and hence in this case seventy-eight bars, were to be played each minute.
The letters M. M. stand for Maelzel’s Metronome (the instrument). The note (in this case a half note) means that the beats of the pendulum represent half notes, quarter notes, or eighth notes, depending on the situation. The figure shows the number of beats per minute. In the above example, the piece would likely be in two-four time, which means one half note per measure, and the metronome mark would indicate that seventy-eight half notes, and thus seventy-eight measures, should be played each minute.
A metronome mark must not be understood as requiring a rigid adherence to its prescription in every bar of a movement. It is simply a method of expressing the general rate of progress. A conductor could not count every bar by the metronome without abandoning all attempts at accelerandi or ritardandi, and generally reducing his performance to a mathematical state of rectangularity. All flexibility, elegance, and nuance would disappear from such a rendering.
A metronome mark shouldn't be seen as something that needs to be followed strictly in every measure of a piece. It's just a way to indicate the overall tempo. A conductor couldn't count every measure with the metronome without losing the ability to speed up or slow down, which would make the performance feel overly mechanical and rigid. All the flexibility, grace, and subtlety would vanish from such a performance.
For dance-music played at a ball, strict adherence to the metronome mark throughout a composition would be admissible; and it would be really desirable in the case of a military march, in which the tactics prescribe the cadence as one hundred and twenty steps a minute; but it is not to be tolerated in artistic concert music. The metronome mark establishes the general movement, and that is all. [Pg 174]
For dance music played at a ball, sticking closely to the metronome marking throughout a piece is acceptable; it is even preferable for a military march, where the standard is one hundred and twenty steps per minute. However, this shouldn't be enforced in artistic concert music. The metronome marking sets the overall tempo, and that's all it should do. [Pg 174]
Any music-lover who desires to find out the right tempo of a metronomed composition can do so by using a watch with a second hand. If he times the number of measures to be played in five or ten seconds, he can get at the tempo. Similarly, he can “hold the watch” on a conductor in the performance of any piece with an established tempo. Here again, however, he must beware of exaggerated accuracy.
Any music lover who wants to find out the right tempo of a piece with a metronome can do so by using a watch with a second hand. If they time how many measures are played in five or ten seconds, they can determine the tempo. Similarly, they can "time" a conductor during the performance of any piece with a known tempo. However, they should be cautious about striving for overly precise accuracy.
If the metronome mark, for example, is a dotted crotchet equal to 104, as in the allegro of the first movement of Beethoven’s Seventh Symphony, and the conductor takes the tempo at 108 or 109, there is no ground for serious complaint. But if he should take it at 134, as I once heard it taken by an eminent conductor, the music-lover has ground for a vigorous protest. The reader might amuse himself and get an immense amount of suggestive information by playing some well-known compositions at exaggerated tempi. He would speedily be convinced that Wagner was right in believing that the chief duty of the conductor was to ascertain the correct tempo.
If the metronome mark, for example, is a dotted quarter note set at 104, like in the allegro of the first movement of Beethoven’s Seventh Symphony, and the conductor takes it at 108 or 109, there's no real cause for serious complaint. But if he were to take it at 134, like I once heard from a famous conductor, the music lover has every reason to protest strongly. The reader might find it entertaining and enlightening to play some well-known compositions at exaggerated tempos. They would quickly be convinced that Wagner was right in believing the main job of the conductor is to determine the correct tempo.
But Wagner is not quite explicit enough when he says that this is the conductor’s whole duty. The whole duty of the conductor is to regulate [Pg 175] every item of the orchestral performance. It must be done according to his design. You may say that this prevents all individual warmth on the part of the players, but it need not do so. The conductor is the stage-manager; the instrumentalists are the actors. They play their parts as the conductor tells them to play them; but that need not prevent them from entering fully into the spirit of the work.
But Wagner isn't quite clear enough when he claims that this is the conductor’s entire responsibility. The conductor's complete duty is to manage every aspect of the orchestral performance. It should be done according to his vision. You might argue that this stifles the individual expressiveness of the players, but it doesn’t have to. The conductor is the stage manager; the instrumentalists are the actors. They perform their roles as the conductor directs them; however, that doesn't mean they can't fully engage with the spirit of the piece.
The conductor’s conception of a composition is to be revealed through the performance by means of the distributions of light and shade, the relative importance given to the outer and inner voices of the score, by the placing of the climaxes of force and speed, and by the detailed accentuation of every phrase. It is at the rehearsals that the conductor imparts to the men of his orchestra his wishes in these matters, and causes them to go over and over certain passages till they are played to his satisfaction. He cannot do any of this at a performance. There he can only beat time, and in doing so remind his men, as I have already said, of what he told them at the rehearsals.
The conductor's vision for a piece of music is expressed through the performance by controlling the dynamics of light and shade, emphasizing the significance of the outer and inner voices in the score, positioning the climaxes of power and speed, and carefully accentuating each phrase. It’s during rehearsals that the conductor communicates his desires to the orchestra members, having them practice certain sections repeatedly until they meet his standards. He can’t do any of this during a performance. There, he can only keep the tempo and remind the musicians, as I mentioned earlier, of what he instructed them during rehearsals.
The conductor must see to it that significant passages allotted to instruments not playing the leading melody are brought out. Many of the most beautiful effects of orchestral compositions are contrapuntal, and [Pg 176] they are too often lost through the incapacity or negligence of conductors. It requires close and sympathetic study of a score to find these bits. Who can ever forget how eloquently they were all made to speak in the Wagner dramas by Anton Seidl, and that, too, without ever overbalancing the voices of the singers? The whole warp and woof of the Wagner scores is polyphonic, the motives cross and recross one another in a never-ceasing double, triple, or quadruple counterpoint; and to give each its proper weight in the scale of force, requires, on the part of a conductor, complete knowledge, perfect appreciation, and absolute command of his forces.
The conductor needs to ensure that important sections assigned to instruments not playing the main melody are highlighted. Many of the most stunning effects in orchestral pieces are contrapuntal, and they are often overlooked due to the inability or carelessness of conductors. It takes careful and attentive study of a score to identify these elements. Who can forget how expressively Anton Seidl made them all resonate in the Wagner dramas, without ever overshadowing the singers' voices? The entire fabric of Wagner's scores is polyphonic, with motives intertwining in a continuous double, triple, or quadruple counterpoint; giving each one its proper significance in terms of power requires a conductor to have complete knowledge, deep appreciation, and total control over their musicians. [Pg 176]
In concluding the discussion of this topic let me add that the conductor is responsible for the general excellence of the work of his orchestra in its fundamental qualities. He must see that the balance of tone is preserved, by preventing one choir from playing too loudly to the detriment of another. He must insist upon proper bowing by the strings and equally proper blowing by the wind. And he must persistently drill his orchestra in precision and unanimity until these things become automatic, like the attack of a good singer. He is one of the princes in the kingdom of music, this man who turns his back upon [Pg 177] us all that he may play with his little stick upon this hundred-voiced instrument; and if sometimes we lose ourselves in hysterical wonder at the results which he produces, and come to think that the baton is a magician’s wand, perhaps we are not so much to blame after all. [Pg 178]
In wrapping up this discussion, I want to emphasize that the conductor is accountable for the overall quality of his orchestra’s performance. He needs to ensure that the sound balance is maintained, preventing one section from overpowering another. He must demand correct bowing from the strings and proper blowing from the winds. Additionally, he must consistently train his orchestra to achieve precision and unity until these elements become second nature, much like a skilled singer’s attack. He is one of the key figures in the world of music, this person who turns his back to us to conduct this complex instrument with his baton; and if we sometimes find ourselves in awe of the stunning results he creates, thinking of the baton as a magician’s wand, perhaps we shouldn’t feel too guilty about it. [Pg 177] [Pg 178]
[Pg 179]
[Pg 180]
[Pg 179]
[Pg 180]
PART IV
How the Orchestra Grew
How the Orchestra Evolved
[Pg 181]
[Pg 181]
XIV
From Peri to Handel
The orchestra of to-day is the outcome of a long series of developments. In a general manner it may be said that the first combinations of instruments were without special purpose. The reader should bear in mind that for several centuries the whole labor of artistic composers was directed toward the production of unaccompanied church music. The centuries preceding the seventeenth produced little, if any, purely instrumental music. There were some compositions for clavichord, one of the precursors of the piano, and many for the organ; but these were wholly modelled on the great contrapuntal choral works of the church. The style was similar, and the method of development of musical ideas was the same.
The orchestra today is the result of a long series of developments. Generally speaking, the earliest combinations of instruments didn’t have a specific purpose. It's important to remember that for several centuries, the main focus of artistic composers was on creating unaccompanied church music. The centuries leading up to the seventeenth produced very little, if any, purely instrumental music. There were some pieces for the clavichord, an early type of piano, and many for the organ; however, these were entirely based on the great contrapuntal choral works of the church. The style was similar, and the way musical ideas were developed was the same.
When these old composers first wrote for small combinations of instruments, they produced works which could be sung just as readily as they could be played; and, indeed, it was not uncommon for them to [Pg 182] write over their compositions, “Da cantare e sonare”—“to sing or to play.” When the thing was sung it was “cantata,” and when it was played it was “sonata.” But these early “sonatas” were in no respect like those of Beethoven.
When these early composers first created music for small groups of instruments, they wrote pieces that could be sung just as easily as they could be played. In fact, it was pretty common for them to label their compositions “Da cantare e sonare”—“to sing or to play.” When the piece was sung, it was called a “cantata,” and when it was played, it was referred to as a “sonata.” However, these early “sonatas” were nothing like those of Beethoven. [Pg 182]
The manner of composing for the orchestra naturally developed side by side with an appreciation of the true functions and relations of the various instruments. It is impossible to separate the two processes. Consider that composers had for centuries written only for the human voice heard in masses, and you will readily perceive that it must have taken some time for them to discover that melodic ideas suitable for singing were not always adapted to the utterance of instruments. After the discovery of that fact there would necessarily follow a realization that the method of developing musical ideas in compositions for voices was not the best one for instrumental writing. And then would come also a perception of the fact that certain melodic ideas were best suited to certain instruments; that what a horn could utter most eloquently, was enfeebled if intrusted to an oboe, and that a thought which was poetic in the pallid, moonlight accents of the flute, became vulgar if pealed out by a trombone. [Pg 183]
The way of composing for the orchestra naturally evolved alongside an understanding of the true roles and relationships of the different instruments. You can't really separate these two processes. Keep in mind that for centuries, composers had only written for the human voice in choral settings, so it makes sense that it took them a while to realize that melodies meant for singing weren't always suitable for instruments. Once they figured that out, it followed that the techniques used to develop musical ideas for voice weren't the best for instrumental compositions. They also came to see that specific melodic ideas worked better with certain instruments; for instance, what a horn could express beautifully would sound weak if played on an oboe, and a musical idea that seemed poetic in the soft, moonlit tones of a flute would come off as crude if blared by a trombone. [Pg 183]
Modern orchestration owes the kaleidoscopic glories of its instrumental coloring to the mastery which composers have attained over the characteristics of the various instruments. One effect of the long series of experiments made by their predecessors was the establishment of the constitution of the orchestra itself, as well as of the methods of writing for it. As composers came to understand better the nature of each individual instrument, they also acquired a certainty as to the proper place of each in the general scheme. Those which were unnecessary or feeble were set aside, and the inevitable selection and survival of the fittest followed.
Modern orchestration owes its vibrant instrumental colors to the expertise composers have developed in understanding the unique qualities of different instruments. One outcome of the extensive experiments carried out by their predecessors was the formation of the orchestra itself, along with the techniques used to compose for it. As composers gained a deeper understanding of each individual instrument, they also became certain of where each one fit into the overall structure. Those that were unnecessary or weak were eliminated, leading to the natural selection and survival of the fittest.
It is very difficult, indeed, to ascertain the dates at which the various instruments made their appearance in the orchestra, or to determine by whom each was introduced. Frequently an instrument was employed in some now forgotten composition, and then laid aside for a time before it came to be habitually used. The works of the great composers do not afford safe guidance in this matter, for it was often some obscure writer who first perceived the true value of an instrument. Yet it is possible to trace the general growth of the orchestra, and this is really the most important thing to do.
It’s really hard to figure out the dates when different instruments showed up in the orchestra or who brought each one in. Often, an instrument was used in some now-forgotten piece and then put away for a while before it became a regular part of the lineup. The works of the great composers aren’t always reliable for this, since it was often a lesser-known writer who first recognized the true value of an instrument. Still, we can trace the overall development of the orchestra, and that’s what really matters.
In the thirteenth, fourteenth, and fifteenth centuries the forerunners [Pg 184] of many of the instruments of the modern orchestra were in use in Europe. The early forms of the instruments of the viol family were employed and the bassoon, schalmei (ancestor of the clarinet), horns, trumpets, and kettle-drums are mentioned and illustrated in some of the early books. The harp, of course, was known wherever the troubadour or the gleeman travelled, and that was all over Europe. But there was no system of combining these instruments in any manner that could possibly be recognized as leading toward our orchestra. A troubadour used a harp or a viol to accompany his song. The nobleman carried a hunting horn of brass—the forerunner of the present French horn—and the noble lady went to the chase with a silver horn of smaller size. Drummers and trumpeters found occupation in military organizations, and the town piper sounded the Christmas chorale from the church-tower. The banquets of the nobles were enlivened by instrumental music, but of its artistic nature we cannot form any satisfying conception. The instruments were simply those that chanced to be at hand, and they must have played together in a very rude and elementary style, for we know that prior to the beginning of the seventeenth century no one wrote for an orchestra of any kind. [Pg 185]
In the 13th, 14th, and 15th centuries, many of the early versions of today's orchestral instruments were being used in Europe. The initial forms of the viol family were played, and instruments like the bassoon, schalmei (an ancestor of the clarinet), horns, trumpets, and kettle-drums were mentioned and illustrated in some of the early books. The harp was, of course, known wherever troubadours or gleemen traveled, and that was all over Europe. However, there was no system for combining these instruments in a way that could be considered a precursor to our modern orchestra. A troubadour would use a harp or a viol to accompany his song. The nobleman carried a brass hunting horn—the ancestor of today’s French horn—and the noble lady used a smaller silver horn while hunting. Drummers and trumpeters had roles in military groups, and the town piper played Christmas carols from the church tower. Nobles’ banquets featured instrumental music, but we can’t form a clear idea of its artistic quality. The instruments were simply whatever were available, and they likely played together in a very rough and basic style, as we know that before the 17th century, no one composed for any kind of orchestra.
The first compositions for groups of instruments resembled our chamber music rather than our orchestral compositions. It is the desire of the writer to adhere as closely as possible to the story of the orchestra pure and simple, so nothing need be said here about the instruments employed in these early works. The modern orchestra really began to take shape toward the end of the sixteenth century in pieces of dramatic form, the precursors of the modern opera. In 1565 Striggio and Corteccia scored their intermezze (light plays with much music) for 2 gravicembali (embryo pianos), 4 violins, half-a-dozen different sizes of lutes and lyres, half-a-dozen flutes and flageolets, 3 violas of different registers, 4 cornets, of different powers, 4 trombones, and several minor instruments. The fatal defect of this orchestra was its deficiency in stringed instruments played with a bow, and its large force of brass. It must have been painfully weak in the bass and extremely poor in sustaining power. But as no system of instrumentation had begun to appear at this time, its playing must have been of the most rudimentary kind. As an accompaniment for voices, if it was ever used all at once, it was probably both thin and noisy.
The first ensembles for groups of instruments were more similar to today’s chamber music than to orchestral compositions. The writer aims to stay as true as possible to the straightforward history of the orchestra, so there is no need to discuss the instruments used in these early works. The modern orchestra really started to develop toward the end of the sixteenth century with pieces in dramatic form, which were the forerunners of modern opera. In 1565, Striggio and Corteccia arranged their intermezzi (light musical plays) for 2 harpsichords (early pianos), 4 violins, several different sizes of lutes and lyres, half-a-dozen flutes and flageolets, 3 violas of different ranges, 4 cornets of varying pitches, 4 trombones, and several minor instruments. The main flaw of this orchestra was its lack of string instruments played with a bow and its heavy emphasis on brass. It must have been painfully weak in the bass and very poor in sustaining sound. But since there was no established system of instrumentation at this time, its performance must have been quite basic. As an accompaniment for voices, if it was ever used all at once, it likely sounded both thin and noisy.
Jacopo Peri, in his “Eurydice” (1600), the first opera performed in public, employed an orchestra consisting of a harpsichord, a lute, a [Pg 186] theorbo (a kind of large lute), a large lyre, and three flutes. But there was little, if anything, in his work which influenced his successors. He used his instruments merely to supply the simplest kind of chord accompaniment to a primitive species of dramatic recitative. Emilio del Cavaliere in the same year produced his oratorio “La Rappresentazione dell’ Anima e Corpo,” and his orchestra consisted of a double lyre, a harpsichord, a bass lute, and two flutes. One interesting fact about this orchestra is that it was concealed, like that at Bayreuth. But the instruments were not used as a modern composer would have employed even so simple an assembly. Cavaliere, for instance, recommended that a violin should play in unison with the soprano voice throughout the work.
Jacopo Peri, in his “Eurydice” (1600), the first opera performed in public, used an orchestra made up of a harpsichord, a lute, a theorbo (a type of large lute), a large lyre, and three flutes. However, there was little, if anything, in his work that influenced those who came after him. He used his instruments mainly to provide the most basic kind of chord accompaniment to a simple form of dramatic recitative. Emilio del Cavaliere, in the same year, created his oratorio “La Rappresentazione dell’ Anima e Corpo,” with an orchestra that included a double lyre, a harpsichord, a bass lute, and two flutes. One interesting detail about this orchestra is that it was hidden, like the one at Bayreuth. But the instruments weren’t used in the way a modern composer would handle even such a simple setup. For example, Cavaliere suggested that a violin should play in unison with the soprano voice throughout the entire piece.
The foundation of the modern orchestra may fairly be attributed to Claudio Monteverde, born at Cremona, 1568, died in Venice, 1643. He was distinctively an operatic writer, and it was in the search after dramatic effects that he discovered the relative values of some of the important instruments, and invented some of the most familiar orchestral devices. In his “Orfeo,” produced in 1608, he employed the following list of instruments: 2 harpsichords, 2 bass viols, 10 tenor viols, 1 double harp, “2 little French violins,” 2 large guitars, 2 [Pg 187] organs of wood, 2 viole di gamba, 1 regal, 4 trombones, 2 cornets, 1 octave flute, 1 clarion, and 3 trumpets with mutes.
The foundation of the modern orchestra can largely be credited to Claudio Monteverde, who was born in Cremona in 1568 and died in Venice in 1643. He was primarily an opera composer, and in his quest for dramatic effects, he uncovered the specific roles of various important instruments and created some of the most well-known orchestral techniques. In his opera “Orfeo,” which premiered in 1608, he used the following instruments: 2 harpsichords, 2 bass viols, 10 tenor viols, 1 double harp, 2 small French violins, 2 large guitars, 2 wooden organs, 2 viols da gamba, 1 regal, 4 trombones, 2 cornets, 1 octave flute, 1 clarion, and 3 trumpets with mutes. [Pg 187]
The array of brass in this orchestra is formidable, but we must remember that Monteverde did not use it as a modern writer would. The system of combination which has been developed had hardly begun in his day, and most of “Orfeo” is accompanied by a simple figured bass, so that we are left to infer that the orchestral performers played very much as they pleased through many pages of the work.
The brass section in this orchestra is impressive, but we have to remember that Monteverdi didn't use it like a modern composer would. The combination techniques that we have today were barely in place back then, and most of “Orfeo” is backed by a simple figured bass, which suggests that the orchestra members played pretty freely through many parts of the piece.
The “two little French violins” were undoubtedly such violins as we know to-day, and this is generally regarded as their first appearance in the orchestra; for the four violins enumerated in the intermezzo orchestra of 1565 were most probably members of the old viol family, and not such instruments as we now call violins. To be sure, Monteverde’s violins played a very small part, but even that master himself learned something from experience in their use, for in later works we find him depending more and more upon his bowed instruments. The title “French” should not be misleading. The first of the famous violin makers was Gasparo di Salo (1542-1610), the founder of the Brescian school. Brescia is in Lombardy, which province was continually [Pg 188] in the throes of French invasion. That may easily account for the term “French” as applied to these violins.
The “two little French violins” were definitely the same kind of violins we know today, and this is generally seen as their first appearance in the orchestra. The four violins listed in the intermezzo orchestra of 1565 were probably members of the older viol family, not the instruments we now call violins. It's true that Monteverdi’s violins played a very minor role, but even he learned something from working with them, as later works show he relied more and more on his bowed instruments. The title “French” might be misleading. The first famous violin maker was Gasparo di Salo (1542-1610), who founded the Brescia school. Brescia is in Lombardy, a region that was continuously dealing with French invasions, which may explain the term “French” used for these violins.
It was in his “Tancredi e Clorinda,” produced in 1624, that Monteverde introduced many novel effects, showing that he had begun to appreciate the expressive powers of his instruments. One of these was the tremolo for bowed instruments. It is said that this passage “so astonished the performers that at first they refused to play it.” In the scene of the combat in the opera, the composer, using three violas and a double-bass, wrote a descriptive accompaniment to the recitative. Rhythmic figures, syncopations, alternating scales, as well as the tremolo and the pizzicato, were employed in this, the first independent dramatic orchestration of which we have any record. The real significance of the work lies in the fact that Monteverde here opened up the realm of special instrumental effects, as distinguished from vocal ones, and also indicated the fundamental value of the stringed instruments played with bows.
It was in his “Tancredi e Clorinda,” produced in 1624, that Monteverde introduced many new effects, showing that he had started to recognize the expressive potential of his instruments. One of these was the tremolo for bowed instruments. It's said that this passage “so stunned the performers that they initially refused to play it.” In the combat scene of the opera, the composer used three violas and a double bass to create a descriptive backdrop for the recitative. Rhythmic patterns, syncopations, alternating scales, as well as the tremolo and pizzicato, were used in this, the first independent dramatic orchestration we have any record of. The real significance of the work lies in the fact that Monteverde opened up the world of special instrumental effects, distinct from vocal ones, and also highlighted the fundamental importance of string instruments played with bows.
This truth having been acquired, and the purely military value of trumpets and drums being already known, it was inevitable that composers should move gradually but slowly toward the establishment of [Pg 189] the string and brass choirs of the modern orchestra. The wood-wind came to its position more slowly, chiefly because of the rude and difficult system of fingering, which made the instruments troublesome to learn. The value of their tonal differences was not perceived at an early date, and indeed it was not until near the middle of the eighteenth century that any direct attempts at tone-coloring were made.
Once this truth was understood, and it became clear how valuable trumpets and drums were in a purely military context, it was only a matter of time before composers gradually began to establish the string and brass sections of the modern orchestra. The woodwinds took longer to reach their current status, primarily due to the complicated and difficult fingering system, which made the instruments hard to learn. Their tonal differences weren’t recognized early on, and it wasn't until around the mid-eighteenth century that any real attempts at exploring tone color were made. [Pg 189]
The establishment of the string quartet was really the first vital step toward the arrangement of the orchestra of to-day, and this step was the direct result of Monteverde’s experiments. For a time there was a tolerable system in which viols of various kinds were used. The thorough-bass was played by the deeper-toned viols, and the harpsichord filled out the harmonies. It must be remembered that at the end of the sixteenth century and beginning of the seventeenth, there were two kinds of viola, the viola da gamba (held between the knees), and the viola da braccia (held at the shoulder), and there were a dozen or more species of these two kinds. But the study of the special characters of instruments led to the selection for permanent use of the best of these. The bass viol became our double-bass; the tenor viola da gamba, the violoncello; the tenor viola da braccia, the viola, and so on. The [Pg 190] violin began to make known its value, and after that progress was steady.
The creation of the string quartet was really the first crucial step toward forming today’s orchestra, and this development was a direct result of Monteverdi’s experiments. For a while, there was a decent system in which various types of viols were used. The deeper-toned viols played the thorough-bass, while the harpsichord enriched the harmonies. It’s important to note that at the end of the sixteenth century and the beginning of the seventeenth, there were two types of viola: the viola da gamba (held between the knees) and the viola da braccia (held at the shoulder), with a dozen or more variations of these two types. However, studying the unique characteristics of instruments led to the selection of the best ones for regular use. The bass viol became our double bass; the tenor viola da gamba became the violoncello; the tenor viola da braccia became the viola, and so on. The violin began to show its worth, and from that point, progress was steady. [Pg 190]
In 1649 Cavalli, in his opera “Giasone,” wrote an accompaniment for two violins and a bass in a style which endured for half a century. Only a few years now elapsed before the modern string quartet, in its primitive form, found its way into the orchestra. Alessandro Scarlatti, born in 1659, was one of the great geniuses of Italy, and founded that style of opera of which Bellini, Donizetti, and Rossini were the most popular modern exponents. He enlarged and improved almost every department of operatic writing, and contributed much to the development of the orchestral part.
In 1649, Cavalli wrote an accompaniment for two violins and a bass in his opera “Giasone,” setting a style that lasted for fifty years. Just a few years later, the modern string quartet, in its early form, began to appear in orchestras. Alessandro Scarlatti, born in 1659, was one of Italy's great geniuses and established a style of opera that Bellini, Donizetti, and Rossini later became famous for. He expanded and enhanced nearly every aspect of operatic writing and made significant contributions to the orchestral components.
In its general features his orchestra was not unlike that of to-day. Violins, violas, and basses were its foundation, but their employment was naturally crude. The ’celli always played in unison with the basses, and so, for the most part, did the violas; but there were many instances in which he used his violas independently and even in two parts. The oboe was the principal wind-instrument, while the bassoons were used to strengthen the bass and were seldom heard alone. Flutes were introduced for their special character.[2] Scarlatti’s use of[Pg 191] violas independent of the basses and in real parts led him toward the true distribution of the string quartet, and in several of his operas we find him writing accompaniments for two violins, viola, and bass in a style which has been employed frequently by all subsequent composers.
In general, his orchestra was similar to today's orchestras. Violins, violas, and basses formed the foundation, but their use was pretty basic. The cellos always played the same notes as the basses, and usually, the violas did too; however, there were many times he used the violas on their own and even in two parts. The oboe was the main wind instrument, while the bassoons were there to support the bass and were rarely heard alone. Flutes were added for their unique sound. Scarlatti’s use of violas independently from the basses and in actual parts pushed him towards the true structure of the string quartet, and in several of his operas, he composed accompaniments for two violins, viola, and bass in a style that has been commonly used by all composers since.
It is not possible to say that Scarlatti invented this style, for it must have been the result of long experimenting; but he saw its superiority and used it so systematically that it was copied by his successors together with other salient features of his style. The chief importance of this manner of writing was its establishment of the proper distribution of the four notes of a chord among the four instruments. The balance and solidity of tone thus gained was of vital importance to the development of orchestral writing, and of the orchestra itself. Scarlatti gave the treble part to the first violin, the alto to the second, the tenor to the viola, and the bass to the bass; and that is what composers have done ever since. About the same time we find Alessandro Stradella writing, in a manner afterward employed in their concerti grossi by Bach and Handel, for two solo violins and a solo violoncello, with an accompaniment of violins, violas, and basses. [Pg 192]
It can't be said that Scarlatti invented this style, as it likely resulted from a lot of experimentation; however, he recognized its advantages and applied it so systematically that his successors adopted it along with other key aspects of his style. The main significance of this approach to writing was its clear distribution of the four notes of a chord among the four instruments. The balance and richness of tone that resulted were crucial for the development of orchestral writing and the orchestra itself. Scarlatti assigned the treble part to the first violin, the alto to the second, the tenor to the viola, and the bass to the bass; and this is how composers have operated ever since. Around the same time, we see Alessandro Stradella composing in a style later used by Bach and Handel in their concerti grossi, featuring two solo violins and a solo cello, accompanied by violins, violas, and basses. [Pg 192]
In France the most important musician of the period was Jean Baptiste Lully (1633-87), who was also a composer of operas. His orchestra was less elastic than Scarlatti’s, yet it was of a type which survived for many years. Its foundation was a body of strings, violins playing the upper parts, and viols of different registers the middle and lower parts. These were supported by a harpsichord, to which was given a figured-bass part. Trumpets, flutes, and oboes were employed to increase the volume of tone and to produce certain obvious color-effects. For example, trumpets were heard in martial passages and oboes in pastoral scenes. Tympani came into the orchestra at this time also. It cannot be said that Lully showed genius for orchestral writing, and for that reason his orchestra is an excellent example of the conventional arrangement of the day. The use of the harpsichord goes to show that composers of that time did not know how to get a full and sonorous harmony out of the purely orchestral instruments, and their attempts to supply the deficiency with the tinkling percussive notes of the keyed instrument were foredoomed to failure.
In France, the most significant musician of the time was Jean Baptiste Lully (1633-87), who was also an opera composer. His orchestra was less flexible than Scarlatti's but was a style that lasted for many years. It was built around a string section, with violins playing the higher parts and violas of various registers handling the middle and lower parts. These were backed by a harpsichord, which played a figured-bass part. Trumpets, flutes, and oboes were used to boost the sound and create distinct color effects; for instance, trumpets featured in military sections and oboes in pastoral scenes. Timpani also joined the orchestra during this period. While Lully did not demonstrate a genius for orchestration, his setup serves as a great example of the typical arrangement of the time. The inclusion of the harpsichord highlights that composers then struggled to achieve a rich and sonorous harmony with just orchestral instruments, and their attempts to compensate with the thin, percussive notes of the keyboard instrument were destined to fall short.
Giovanni Legrenzi, a famous Venetian composer (1625-90), employed what looked like a fairly rational orchestra. It consisted of 19 violins, 2 [Pg 193] violas, 2 viole di gamba, 4 large lutes, 2 cornets, 1 bassoon, and 3 trombones. The chief shortcoming of this orchestra, aside from its deficiency in wood-wind, is its want of stringed basses. A most important contributor to the development of the orchestra at this period was Arcangelo Corelli (1653-1713). He was a great violinist, and, in composing for the violin as a solo and chamber-music instrument, he explored its resources and illustrated its relation to other instruments. Some of his important works were: “Twelve Sonatas for Two Violins and Violoncello, with Bass for the Organ” (Rome, 1683), “Twelve Chamber Sonatas for Two Violins, Violoncello, and Violone, or Cembalo” (Rome, 1685), and “Concerti Grossi,” for two solo violins and solo violoncello, with accompaniment for additional instruments (1712). In these works Corelli did much to point the way toward modern chamber music and its forms, and in doing so contributed directly toward that understanding of the relative powers and limits of the members of the string quartet without which good orchestral writing is impossible.
Giovanni Legrenzi, a well-known Venetian composer (1625-90), had what appeared to be a fairly organized orchestra. It included 19 violins, 2 violas, 2 viols, 4 large lutes, 2 cornets, 1 bassoon, and 3 trombones. The main drawback of this orchestra, besides the lack of woodwinds, was the absence of string basses. A key figure in the development of the orchestra during this time was Arcangelo Corelli (1653-1713). He was an exceptional violinist, and by composing for the violin as both a solo and chamber music instrument, he explored its capabilities and demonstrated its relationship with other instruments. Some of his notable works include: “Twelve Sonatas for Two Violins and Violoncello, with Bass for the Organ” (Rome, 1683), “Twelve Chamber Sonatas for Two Violins, Violoncello, and Violone, or Cembalo” (Rome, 1685), and “Concerti Grossi,” for two solo violins and solo violoncello, with additional instrument accompaniment (1712). In these pieces, Corelli significantly influenced the path toward modern chamber music and its forms, contributing directly to the understanding of the strengths and limitations of the members of the string quartet, which is essential for good orchestral writing.
We have now reached the beginning of the eighteenth century. The typical orchestra of the time consisted of strings, distributed in the fashion set by A. Scarlatti, but not always with a correct adjustment [Pg 194] of the number of each kind, two pairs of wind-instruments, and the harpsichord as the impotent agent to fill out the harmonies. It was at this period that two great composers arose and exerted an influence which affected the entire subsequent development of music. These composers were George Frederick Handel (1685-1759) and Johann Sebastian Bach (1685-1750). Both of these writers made improvements in the orchestra and in orchestral music. Something has already been said about their methods of writing for the orchestra, but the reader will pardon some repetition of facts which throw light on the constitution of the orchestral body under these composers. Bach was essentially a polyphonic writer, and he treated his orchestral instruments as if they were voices. Each one had an essentially melodic part to sing, and the beautiful interweaving of these voice parts constitutes one of the never-ending charms of the great master’s music. He contrasted with this style passages of extreme simplicity, in which the strings and the keyed instrument—organ or clavier—were used.
We have now arrived at the early eighteenth century. The typical orchestra of this time consisted of strings, arranged according to the method established by A. Scarlatti, although the numbers of each type were not always correctly balanced, two pairs of wind instruments, and the harpsichord serving as the weak element to complete the harmonies. It was during this period that two great composers emerged who had a significant impact on the future development of music. These composers were George Frederick Handel (1685-1759) and Johann Sebastian Bach (1685-1750). Both of these composers made advancements in the orchestra and orchestral music. Some information has already been shared about their approaches to writing for the orchestra, but the reader will forgive some repetition of details that shed light on the makeup of the orchestral ensemble under these composers. Bach was primarily a polyphonic composer, treating his orchestral instruments as if they were voices. Each instrument had its own melodic part to perform, and the beautiful interweaving of these melodic lines is one of the enduring appeals of the great master's music. He contrasted this style with moments of extreme simplicity, where the strings and the keyboard instrument—either the organ or keyboard—were utilized.
Handel, on the other hand, was chiefly a composer of operas and oratorios, and his orchestral style was developed to a considerable extent in the direction of building up huge climaxes by means of mass [Pg 195] effects. It may be said, therefore, with some reservation, yet with general correctness, that Bach’s orchestral style has afforded later composers a model for solo effects in the orchestra, while for solidity and sonority of the entire instrumental body Handel has been mainly followed. One of the forms in which Bach exercised his genius was the Concerto Grosso, in which two or three solo instruments, instead of one, are heard with orchestral accompaniment. In 1721 Bach wrote six of these works, known as the Brandenburg Concertos. Only one of these, the first, would be regarded as an orchestral work in our time. The others belong rather to the department of chamber music, though by increasing the number of instruments in each part they may be made to have an orchestral effect. The first concerto, however, was written for the string quartet, aided by the double-bass and the violino piccolo (a little violin with a high compass), two horns, two oboes, bassoon, and harpsichord. These instruments were employed in three groups: horns, wood, and strings; but one must remember that Bach’s polyphonic method of using his wind-instruments was altogether different from the manner in which the same instruments are now employed.
Handel, on the other hand, was mainly a composer of operas and oratorios, and he developed his orchestral style significantly towards creating huge climaxes through mass effects. It can be said, with some reservation yet with general accuracy, that Bach’s orchestral style has provided later composers a model for solo effects in the orchestra, while Handel has primarily been followed for the solidity and richness of the entire instrumental body. One way Bach showcased his genius was through the Concerto Grosso, where two or three solo instruments are featured instead of just one, accompanied by the orchestra. In 1721, Bach wrote six of these works, known as the Brandenburg Concertos. Only one of these, the first, would be considered an orchestral work today. The others lean more towards chamber music, although by increasing the number of instruments in each part, they can achieve an orchestral effect. The first concerto was written for the string quartet, supported by the double bass and the violino piccolo (a small violin with a higher range), two horns, two oboes, a bassoon, and a harpsichord. These instruments were used in three groups: horns, woodwinds, and strings; however, it’s important to note that Bach’s polyphonic approach to using his wind instruments was completely different from how they are used now.
In his church music Bach combined the orchestra and the organ. As Dr. [Pg 196] Spitta points out in his biography of Bach, the organ in these works occupied a position similar to that of the string quartet in the modern orchestra. “Just as the wind-instruments group themselves round this as a centre,” he says, “so all the instruments grouped themselves round the organ. The relations were different, however, in this way: that the organ remained always in the background, its effect being merely that of power, and that on this background the other instruments were seen not so much as solo instruments, but rather as choric groups. One of these groups was the quartet of strings, another the oboes and bassoon, a third the cornet and trombones, and a fourth the trumpets (or sometimes horns) and the drums.” Bach’s method of writing for the orchestra did not influence his immediate successors very greatly, for the reason that his retired life and modest position prevented his works from becoming generally known until long after his death. Sir John Hawkins’s “History of Music,” published in England in 1776, contains only half a page about Bach, communicated to the author by one of Bach’s sons, a resident of London.
In his church music, Bach combined the orchestra and the organ. As Dr. [Pg 196] Spitta points out in his biography of Bach, the organ in these works had a role similar to that of the string quartet in today’s orchestra. “Just as the wind instruments gather around this as a center,” he says, “all the instruments gathered around the organ. However, the relationships were different in that the organ always stayed in the background, its effect being purely one of power, and against this background, the other instruments were seen not so much as solo instruments, but as choral groups. One of these groups was the string quartet, another the oboes and bassoon, a third the cornet and trombones, and a fourth the trumpets (or sometimes horns) and drums.” Bach’s approach to orchestration didn’t significantly influence his immediate successors because his quiet lifestyle and humble position kept his works from becoming widely known until long after his death. Sir John Hawkins’s “History of Music,” published in England in 1776, contains only half a page about Bach, which was shared with the author by one of Bach’s sons living in London.
Handel, on the other hand, enjoyed a world-wide fame during his life, and his works were studied by musicians far and near. Handel employed, [Pg 197] though very rarely all at once, all the instruments used in the modern orchestra except the clarinet. He approached more nearly than Bach to the modern methods of orchestral contrast in massive effects of instrumental color, yet he did not reach the fundamental principles on which the distribution of the instruments in the orchestra of to-day rest. Perhaps the most important difference is to be found in the large number of wind-instruments employed by Handel, who used them frequently in masses simply to reinforce the strings. The number of oboes and bassoons, for instance, was much larger in Handel’s orchestra than in a modern band. This was due partly to the inferior power of the instruments of his time, but equally to the different method of his scoring. The brass instruments were used by both Bach and Handel differently from the manner in which modern composers employ them. The reader will recall that they wrote trumpet parts of such high compass that players of to-day cannot perform them. In conclusion, as to Bach and Handel it should be noted that their orchestration is rarely heard. Most of their great works, such as the “St. Matthew Passion” and “The Messiah,” are performed now with modern orchestral arrangements, not according to the original scores.
Handel, on the other hand, gained worldwide fame during his lifetime, and musicians from all over studied his works. Handel used, although very rarely all at the same time, almost all the instruments in the modern orchestra except the clarinet. He came closer than Bach to contemporary techniques of orchestral contrast in creating powerful effects with instrumental color, but he didn't fully achieve the foundational principles on which today's orchestral arrangement is based. One of the main differences lies in the large number of wind instruments Handel used, often in significant numbers just to support the strings. For example, the number of oboes and bassoons in Handel's orchestra was much greater than in a modern band. This was partly due to the lesser power of the instruments of his time, but also because of his unique scoring style. The brass instruments were used by both Bach and Handel in a way that differs significantly from how modern composers use them. Readers may remember that they wrote trumpet parts that are so high that contemporary players cannot perform them. In conclusion, regarding Bach and Handel, it’s important to note that their orchestration is seldom heard in its original form. Most of their major works, like the “St. Matthew Passion” and “The Messiah,” are now performed with modern orchestral arrangements rather than following the original scores.
[Pg 198]
[Pg 198]
XV
From Haydn to Wagner
The constitution of the orchestra in the early part of the eighteenth century, then, had reached the basis on which it now rests, except for the fact that the harpsichord was still used. There was, however, a complete and well-organized body of strings, similar to that which we have to-day. The violoncello alone had not attained its true position. It was not always included, and generally when it was, it played in unison with the double-basses. To the body of strings were added such wind-instruments as the composer desired—two oboes, two bassoons, and two horns being, perhaps, the most familiar assortment. Two trumpets and a pair of kettle-drums were introduced when brilliant militant passages were to be written. Trombones were not heard in symphonic compositions, and the harp seemed to have fallen into oblivion. The clarinet had not yet entered the orchestra. Flutes were used often. The [Pg 199] systematic use of wood-wind instruments in pairs was just beginning. The delay in this vital matter was due to the hold which the polyphonic style of composition still had. It was only when the musical world gave up writing fugues and canons and turned its attention to the harmonic style, in which a song-like melody is supported by an accompaniment built on chords, that the value of the wind choir in the formation of these chords was appreciated. That fact once known, composers speedily established the balance of power between wind and strings, and arranged a suitable list of wind-instruments.
The orchestra's setup in the early eighteenth century had solidified into the foundation we recognize today, except that the harpsichord was still in use. There was a complete and well-organized group of string instruments, similar to what we have now. However, the violoncello had not yet taken its rightful place; it wasn't always included, and when it was, it typically played the same notes as the double basses. The string section was complemented by various wind instruments as desired by the composer—two oboes, two bassoons, and two horns being the most common selection. Two trumpets and a pair of kettle drums were added for lively military sections. Trombones weren't used in symphonic music, and the harp seemed to have been forgotten. The clarinet had not yet made its way into the orchestra. Flutes were frequently utilized. The systematic use of woodwind instruments in pairs was just beginning. The delay in this crucial aspect was due to the lingering influence of the polyphonic style of composition. It wasn't until the music world shifted away from writing fugues and canons to focus on harmonic style, where a song-like melody is supported by chord-based accompaniment, that the value of the woodwind section in creating these chords was recognized. Once this understanding emerged, composers quickly established a balance of power between the woodwinds and strings, along with a suitable list of wind instruments.
The orchestral symphony came into existence about the middle of the eighteenth century, and with its advent we find the orchestra of Bach and Handel slightly modified and differently employed. Joseph Haydn (1732-1809) is credited with being the father of the symphony, and he established the real basis of the modern orchestra. Yet something was due to the labors of two or three other men. Of these, I have already mentioned one of the most important, Johann Karl Stamitz, a Bohemian, who in 1745 became leading violin and director of the orchestra of the Elector of Mannheim. He spared no efforts to teach his strings to play with precision and refinement, to phrase beautifully, and to make all the shades of piano and forte. His orchestra became the best in Europe, [Pg 200] and his methods survived him. Mozart heard at Mannheim for the first time in his life artistic orchestral performance, and he was deeply influenced by it.
The orchestral symphony emerged around the middle of the eighteenth century, and with it, we see the orchestra of Bach and Handel slightly changed and used differently. Joseph Haydn (1732-1809) is recognized as the father of the symphony, establishing the foundation of the modern orchestra. However, credit is also due to the work of a few other individuals. One of the most significant was Johann Karl Stamitz, a Bohemian who became the leading violinist and director of the Elector of Mannheim's orchestra in 1745. He worked tirelessly to ensure his string players performed with precision and elegance, crafted beautiful phrasing, and expressed all the nuances of soft and loud dynamics. His orchestra became the finest in Europe, and his techniques continued on after his time. Mozart experienced his first true orchestral performance in Mannheim, which had a profound impact on him. [Pg 200]
Another, who has been mentioned and who exercised much influence on the orchestra through his study of its capacities, was François Joseph Gossec (1733-1829). He was a student of the orchestra in early life, and his first symphony was performed five years before Haydn’s. How much insight into orchestral effect Gossec possessed may be judged from the fact that in his “Messe des Morts” (1760) he wrote the “Tuba Mirum” for two groups of instruments, one of wind-instruments concealed outside the church, and the other of strings inside, the latter accompanying the former with a tremolo in the high register.
Another influential figure in the orchestra, mentioned earlier, was François Joseph Gossec (1733-1829). He studied the orchestra early in his life, and his first symphony debuted five years before Haydn's. The depth of Gossec's understanding of orchestral effects can be seen in his “Messe des Morts” (1760), where he composed the “Tuba Mirum” for two groups of instruments: one set of wind instruments hidden outside the church and another set of strings inside, with the strings providing a tremolo in the high register to accompany the wind instruments.
Haydn’s first symphony was written in 1759 for first and second violins, violas, basses, two oboes and two horns. His last symphony was composed in 1795, and by that time he had at his command the whole symphonic orchestra as it stood when Beethoven took up the work of orchestral development. Between the dates of Haydn’s first and last symphony, Mozart had lived the whole of his wonderful life, and Haydn, who at first had been his master, had in the end become his pupil. [Pg 201]
Haydn's first symphony was written in 1759 for first and second violins, violas, basses, two oboes, and two horns. His last symphony was composed in 1795, and by that time, he had mastered the entire symphonic orchestra as it existed when Beethoven began his work in orchestral development. Between the years of Haydn's first and last symphony, Mozart lived his entire remarkable life, and Haydn, who had initially been his mentor, ultimately became his student. [Pg 201]
It was from Mozart that Haydn learned the use of the clarinet, and we find it employed in his last symphonies. The clarinet proper, which was the successor of the schalmei or shawm, is said to have been invented by Johann Denner, of Nuremberg, in 1690. The claim is doubtful, yet the modern instrument probably originated about that time. Many improvements have been made in it, the most notable being the application to it by Klosé, in 1843, of the Boehm system of fingering.
It was from Mozart that Haydn learned how to use the clarinet, and we can see it used in his last symphonies. The clarinet, which replaced the schalmei or shawm, is said to have been invented by Johann Denner from Nuremberg in 1690. This claim is uncertain, but the modern instrument likely emerged around that time. Many improvements have been made to it, with the most significant being Klosé's adoption of the Boehm fingering system in 1843.
Haydn’s familiar symphony in D, written in London in 1795, is scored for 2 flutes, 2 oboes, 2 clarinets, 2 bassoons, 2 horns, kettle-drums, violins, violas, ’cellos, and bassos. It is a fact that Haydn first employed 2 clarinets and a bassoon as the wood-wind choir in his first mass, written in 1751 or 1752, but it was Mozart who revealed the real capacity of the clarinet and established its position in the orchestra. Haydn, however, must be credited with immense advances in the development of the orchestra, because in developing the symphonic form, he was constantly experimenting and discovering the values of the various instruments and their relations to one another. Some of the symphonies composed after he had been a symphonic writer for years, show great reticence in their scoring. For example, the symphony known [Pg 202] as the “Queen of France,” written for Paris in 1786, is scored for 2 horns, 2 oboes, 1 flute, 2 bassoons, and string quartet. The introduction to the “Creation,” one of the master’s latest works, is scored for 2 flutes, 2 oboes, 2 clarinets, 2 bassoons, a contra-bassoon, 2 horns, 2 trumpets, 3 trombones, tympani, and the usual strings. But when he was writing this oratorio Haydn needed a large orchestra for his newly invented effects of instrumental description. In the “Creation” and “The Seasons” he made the orchestra paint chaos, winter storms, and spring peace. He naturally sought for more instrumental voices, and employed the complete orchestra of his time.
Haydn’s well-known symphony in D, composed in London in 1795, is arranged for 2 flutes, 2 oboes, 2 clarinets, 2 bassoons, 2 horns, kettledrums, violins, violas, cellos, and double basses. It's noteworthy that Haydn was the first to use 2 clarinets and a bassoon in the woodwind section of his first mass, written in 1751 or 1752, but it was Mozart who truly showcased the clarinet's capabilities and secured its role in the orchestra. Nevertheless, Haydn deserves credit for significant advancements in orchestral development because he was always experimenting with and discovering the value of different instruments and how they interacted with one another while shaping the symphonic form. Some of the symphonies he composed after years of writing in this style have very restrained scoring. For instance, the symphony nicknamed the “Queen of France,” composed in Paris in 1786, is arranged for 2 horns, 2 oboes, 1 flute, 2 bassoons, and a string quartet. The introduction to “The Creation,” one of his later masterpieces, includes 2 flutes, 2 oboes, 2 clarinets, 2 bassoons, a contrabassoon, 2 horns, 2 trumpets, 3 trombones, timpani, and the usual strings. However, while composing this oratorio, Haydn required a large orchestra for his newly developed instrumental effects. In “The Creation” and “The Seasons,” he used the orchestra to depict chaos, winter storms, and the tranquility of spring. He naturally sought more instrumental voices and utilized the full orchestra of his time.
Much of Haydn’s success in developing the orchestra and the art of writing for it was due to his long occupancy of the post of director of music under Prince Esterhazy. Haydn was appointed to this post at Eisenstadt in 1761, and retained it till 1790. He had at his disposal a small company of singers, capable of performing opera or oratorio, and a small orchestra. In 1766 this orchestra numbered 17 instruments: 6 violins and violas, 1 violoncello, 1 double-bass, 1 flute, 2 oboes, 2 bassoons, and 4 horns. It was subsequently enlarged to 22 and 24, including trumpets and kettle-drums when needed. From 1776 to 1778 [Pg 203] there were also clarinets. That this arrangement did not prevail all over Europe even at that time is shown by the distribution of instruments and seating-plan of the orchestra at Dresden under Hasse, near the close of the last century. This plan is reproduced from Jahn’s “Life of Mozart.”
Much of Haydn’s success in developing the orchestra and mastering the art of writing for it was thanks to his long tenure as music director under Prince Esterhazy. Haydn was appointed to this position in Eisenstadt in 1761 and held it until 1790. He had a small group of singers available, capable of performing opera or oratorio, along with a small orchestra. In 1766, this orchestra had 17 instruments: 6 violins and violas, 1 cello, 1 double bass, 1 flute, 2 oboes, 2 bassoons, and 4 horns. It was later expanded to 22 and then 24 instruments, including trumpets and kettle drums as needed. From 1776 to 1778, there were also clarinets. The fact that this setup wasn’t common across Europe at that time is illustrated by the instrument distribution and seating plan of the orchestra in Dresden under Hasse near the end of the last century. This plan is reproduced from Jahn’s “Life of Mozart.”

1—Conductor’s harpsichord. | 7—Oboes. |
2—Second harpsichord. | 8—Flutes. |
3—Violoncelli. | a—Violas. |
4—Double-basses. | b—Bassoons. |
5—First Violins. | c—Horns. |
6—Second Violins. | d—Trumpets and drums on platforms. |
The preponderance of bassoons in the Dresden orchestra was due to the fact that it was an opera orchestra, and in it Handelian ideas still prevailed. Haydn, meanwhile, was proceeding along the true symphonic path, and an orchestra of 2 flutes, 2 oboes, 2 clarinets, 2 bassoons, 2 horns, 2 trumpets, tympani, and strings fairly represents the result of his contributions to its development up to the time when Mozart took up the work. It should be added that even Haydn was not sufficiently trustful of his instrumental army to leave it without the weak support [Pg 204] of the harpsichord, and he frequently sat at this instrument during the performance of his symphonies and played with the orchestra, with extremely bad effect.
The dominance of bassoons in the Dresden orchestra was because it was an opera orchestra, and Handel's ideas still held sway there. Meanwhile, Haydn was following the true path of symphonies, and an orchestra of 2 flutes, 2 oboes, 2 clarinets, 2 bassoons, 2 horns, 2 trumpets, timpani, and strings accurately reflects his contributions to its development until Mozart took over. It's worth noting that even Haydn didn't fully trust his instrumental ensemble, as he often felt the need for the additional support of the harpsichord. He frequently played this instrument during performances of his symphonies, which ended up sounding quite poor. [Pg 204]
Wolfgang Amadeus Mozart (1756-1791) applied his amazing genius to the development of the orchestra, as well as to all other departments of musical art. His work was rather that of exploring the capacities of the instruments in use than adding new ones to the extant list. That was in keeping with Mozart’s entire career. He was not a reformer; he took what he found and put genuine life into it. He found clarinets, for example, and he illustrated, to the conviction of all subsequent composers, their true place in the orchestra.
Wolfgang Amadeus Mozart (1756-1791) used his incredible talent to enhance the orchestra and other areas of music. His approach focused more on exploring the capabilities of the existing instruments rather than adding new ones to the list. This reflected Mozart’s entire career. He wasn’t a reformer; he took what he found and brought it to life. For instance, he discovered clarinets and demonstrated to all future composers their rightful place in the orchestra.
Indeed, he made a complete revelation of the powers of wind-instrument choirs in his suites and divertimenti for them, so that Haydn once complained to Kalkenbrenner: “I have only learnt the proper use of wind-instruments in my old age, and now I must pass away without turning my knowledge to account.” Mozart’s three greatest symphonies are those composed in the summer of 1788, the E flat major, G minor, and C (“Jupiter”). The E flat is scored for 1 flute, 2 clarinets, 2 bassoons, 2 horns, 2 trumpets, tympani, and strings. The G minor is written for 1 flute, 2 oboes, 2 bassoons, 2 horns, and strings, but [Pg 205] owing to Mozart’s insight into the effect of combinations, this small orchestra sounds marvellously full and noble. Clarinets were afterward added. The “Jupiter” symphony is scored for 1 flute, 2 oboes, 2 bassoons, 2 horns, 2 trumpets, tympani, and strings.
Indeed, he fully showcased the capabilities of wind instrument ensembles in his suites and divertimenti for them, leading Haydn to once express to Kalkenbrenner: “I’ve only learned how to properly use wind instruments in my old age, and now I have to leave this world without putting my knowledge to use.” Mozart’s three greatest symphonies are those written in the summer of 1788, the E flat major, G minor, and C (“Jupiter”). The E flat is arranged for 1 flute, 2 clarinets, 2 bassoons, 2 horns, 2 trumpets, timpani, and strings. The G minor consists of 1 flute, 2 oboes, 2 bassoons, 2 horns, and strings, but because of Mozart’s understanding of the impact of combinations, this small orchestra sounds incredibly rich and majestic. Clarinets were added later. The “Jupiter” symphony is arranged for 1 flute, 2 oboes, 2 bassoons, 2 horns, 2 trumpets, timpani, and strings.
It will be seen from this that although Mozart established the place of the clarinet, he did not invariably make use of it, while even up to the date of these last symphonies, the trombone had not assumed a position in the symphonic orchestra. Mozart was always moderate in his use of this instrument. In his “Don Giovanni” he reserves his trombones to accompany the ghost of the Commendatore. In “Die Zauberflöte” they are used more freely, as, indeed, they always were in religious or masonic music. In “Die Zauberflöte” Mozart also used basset-horns, the tenor of the clarinet, now obsolete. In fact, at all times in the early and classical periods, a larger array of instruments was called into service in the operatic than in the symphonic orchestra. It is only since the romantic composers began to paint in gorgeous tone-coloring, rather than work out intellectual plans of thematic development, that the symphonic band has equalled the operatic in the variety of its component elements. [Pg 206]
It’s clear that while Mozart established the clarinet’s role, he didn’t always use it. Even up to his last symphonies, the trombone hadn’t taken its place in the symphonic orchestra. Mozart was always careful with this instrument. In “Don Giovanni,” he only uses the trombones to accompany the ghost of the Commendatore. In “Die Zauberflöte,” they are used more freely, as they typically were in religious or Masonic music. In “Die Zauberflöte,” Mozart also included basset-horns, the tenor version of the clarinet, which is now outdated. Throughout the early and classical periods, a wider range of instruments was commonly used in operas than in symphonic works. It wasn't until the romantic composers started focusing on rich tone colors instead of strictly following intellectual ideas for thematic development that the symphonic ensemble matched the operatic orchestra in its variety of instruments. [Pg 206]
The development of the orchestra in the hands of the greatest of all symphonic composers, Ludwig van Beethoven (1770-1827), was of immense importance. Beethoven did not add greatly to the array of instruments, but he demonstrated the true relationships of the various bodies, and he enlarged them and their scope according to his desire for greater utterance. In the First Symphony, C major (1800), and the Second, D major (1803), he employs the same orchestra: 2 flutes, 2 oboes, 2 clarinets, 2 bassoons, 2 horns, 2 trumpets, tympani, first and second violins, violas, and basses. It is worthy of note that the ’cello is not specified. In the Third Symphony, “Eroica,” E flat major (1805), he used the same orchestra, except that he added a third horn part and wrote “violoncello e basso.”
The development of the orchestra by the greatest symphonic composer, Ludwig van Beethoven (1770-1827), was extremely significant. Beethoven didn't significantly increase the number of instruments but showcased the true relationships among different sections and expanded them, seeking greater expression. In the First Symphony, C major (1800), and the Second, D major (1803), he used the same orchestra: 2 flutes, 2 oboes, 2 clarinets, 2 bassoons, 2 horns, 2 trumpets, timpani, first and second violins, violas, and cellos. Notably, the cello is not specifically mentioned. In the Third Symphony, “Eroica,” E flat major (1805), he maintained the same orchestra but added a third horn part and indicated “cello and bass.”
It is believed that three horns were employed in the symphonic orchestra for the first time in this work. Mozart used four in “Idomeneo” (1781). The Fourth Symphony, B flat (1807), is a smaller work, and its orchestra is the same as that of the First and Second, except that only one flute is required and the ’cello is named. The great Fifth Symphony, C minor (1808), is scored for 1 piccolo, 2 flutes, 2 oboes, 2 clarinets, 2 bassoons, contra-bassoon, 2 horns, 2 trumpets, 3 trombones, drums, and strings. Sir George Grove notes that [Pg 207] “the piccolo, trombones, and contra-fagotto are employed in the finale only, and make their appearance here for the first time in the symphonies. The contra-fagotto was first known to Beethoven in his youth at Bonn, where the Elector’s orchestra contained one. He has employed it also in ‘Fidelio,’ in the Ninth Symphony, and elsewhere.”
It’s believed that this work was the first to use three horns in the symphonic orchestra. Mozart utilized four in “Idomeneo” (1781). The Fourth Symphony in B flat (1807) is a smaller piece and has the same orchestration as the First and Second, except it only requires one flute and names the cello. The renowned Fifth Symphony in C minor (1808) includes 1 piccolo, 2 flutes, 2 oboes, 2 clarinets, 2 bassoons, a contra-bassoon, 2 horns, 2 trumpets, 3 trombones, drums, and strings. Sir George Grove points out that [Pg 207] “the piccolo, trombones, and contra-bassoon are used only in the finale and make their first appearance here in the symphonies. Beethoven was first introduced to the contra-bassoon in his youth in Bonn, where the Elector’s orchestra had one. He also used it in ‘Fidelio,’ the Ninth Symphony, and other works.”
The Sixth Symphony, known as the “Pastoral” (1808), is scored for 1 piccolo, 2 flutes, 2 oboes, 2 clarinets, 2 bassoons, 2 horns, 2 trumpets, 2 trombones, drums, and strings. The piccolo and trombones were used for special descriptive effects in this work, and when he came to write the great Seventh Symphony (1813), Beethoven employed the same array of instruments as he had in his First and Second symphonies. The same orchestra sufficed for the Eighth Symphony (1814), but the Titanic Ninth (1824) demanded a larger instrumental body. The score calls for 1 piccolo, 2 flutes, 2 oboes, 2 clarinets, 2 bassoons, 1 contra-bassoon, 4 horns, 2 trumpets, 3 trombones, tympani, triangle, cymbals, bass drum, and strings. Four horns are here used for the first time in the symphonic orchestra, and their introduction completed the development of the classical body of instruments.
The Sixth Symphony, called the “Pastoral” (1808), is arranged for 1 piccolo, 2 flutes, 2 oboes, 2 clarinets, 2 bassoons, 2 horns, 2 trumpets, 2 trombones, drums, and strings. The piccolo and trombones were used for specific descriptive effects in this piece, and when it came time to write the impressive Seventh Symphony (1813), Beethoven used the same set of instruments as in his First and Second symphonies. The same orchestra was sufficient for the Eighth Symphony (1814), but the monumental Ninth (1824) required a larger instrumental ensemble. The score includes 1 piccolo, 2 flutes, 2 oboes, 2 clarinets, 2 bassoons, 1 contrabassoon, 4 horns, 2 trumpets, 3 trombones, tympani, triangle, cymbals, bass drum, and strings. Four horns are used here for the first time in the symphonic orchestra, and their addition completed the evolution of the classical set of instruments.
When the romantic writers began to advance along the path opened by [Pg 208] Beethoven and to seek for broader and more influential emotional expression, they introduced one or two more instruments for special effects. The English horn was known to Bach in its primitive form of oboe da caccia. It was used by Gluck in his “Orfeo” and “Telemacho,” but, as Berlioz notes, without apparent appreciation of its tone-quality. In its modern form it was introduced into the orchestra by Rossini in “William Tell” (1829), and Meyerbeer in “Robert le Diable” (1831). Modern symphonic writers use it freely. Its employment in their music is probably due to the demonstration of its utility by the eminent French composer, Hector Berlioz (1803-69), who had a truly wonderful insight into the powers of all orchestral instruments, and who laid down the principles of the post-Beethovenian style of orchestral writing. We find Schubert, Schumann, Mendelssohn, and other immediate followers of Beethoven using precisely the same orchestra, sometimes with two horns and sometimes with four, and seldom without trombones, throughout an entire work. Berlioz, however, began at once to give variety to the instrumental body. For instance, so small a work as his arrangement for orchestra of Weber’s “Invitation à la Valse” is scored for 1 piccolo, 1 flute, 2 oboes, 2 clarinets, 4 bassoons, 4 horns, 1 cornet, 1 trumpet, 3 trombones, 2 harps, tympani, and strings. The harp, as we have noted, had been used in the opera, but Berlioz was the first to explore its possibilities. Many of Berlioz’s other advances in the use of orchestral instruments were owing to the introduction, in 1832, of the system of boring and keying wind-instruments invented by Theobald Boehm. This system vastly increased the agility of these instruments and improved their intonation.
When the romantic writers started to follow the path opened by [Pg 208] Beethoven and sought out broader and more impactful emotional expression, they added one or two more instruments for special effects. The English horn had been known to Bach in its early form as the oboe da caccia. It was used by Gluck in his “Orfeo” and “Telemacho,” but, as Berlioz pointed out, without any real appreciation of its tone quality. In its modern version, it was introduced into the orchestra by Rossini in “William Tell” (1829) and Meyerbeer in “Robert le Diable” (1831). Modern symphonic composers use it extensively. Its inclusion in their music is likely due to the demonstration of its usefulness by the notable French composer, Hector Berlioz (1803-69), who had an incredible understanding of the capabilities of all orchestral instruments and established the principles of the post-Beethoven orchestral writing style. We see Schubert, Schumann, Mendelssohn, and other direct successors of Beethoven using the same orchestra, sometimes with two horns and sometimes with four, and hardly ever without trombones throughout an entire piece. However, Berlioz quickly started to add variety to the instrumental group. For example, even a small work like his orchestration of Weber’s “Invitation à la Valse” includes 1 piccolo, 1 flute, 2 oboes, 2 clarinets, 4 bassoons, 4 horns, 1 cornet, 1 trumpet, 3 trombones, 2 harps, timpani, and strings. The harp had been used in opera, but Berlioz was the first to explore its potential. Many of Berlioz’s other innovations in the use of orchestral instruments were due to the introduction, in 1832, of the boring and keying system for wind instruments invented by Theobald Boehm. This system greatly enhanced the agility of these instruments and improved their intonation.

From a photograph by Reutlinger.
From a photo by Reutlinger.
BERLIOZ.
Berlioz.
[Pg 209] Naturally, some of Berlioz’s ideas were borrowed from the operatic composers, who frequently employed unusual combinations for dramatic effects. In the “Quorum hodie” of his “Requiem,” for instance, Berlioz calls for 3 flutes, 8 tenor trombones, and strings to accompany a chorus. The “Dies Iræ” of the same mass calls for 4 small brass bands to be placed at the corners of the main instrumental body, and for 14 kettle-drums tuned to different notes. But at present we are more concerned with the direct development of the orchestra than with special combinations. The bass clarinet was seldom used till Adolph Sax, the famous instrument-maker, perfected its construction. Meyerbeer, who was a great friend of Sax, introduced the instrument in his opera scores. He gives to it a fine declamatory passage in “Les [Pg 210] Huguenots” (Act V.), and gives it a melodic part in the coronation march in “Le Prophète.” It was Wagner, however, who fully illustrated the capacity of this noble instrument, and by his employment of it, both as a solo singer and a fundamental bass of the wood-wind, led contemporaneous symphonic writers to employ it freely.
[Pg 209] Naturally, some of Berlioz’s ideas were taken from operatic composers, who often used unusual combinations for dramatic effects. In the “Quorum hodie” of his “Requiem,” for example, Berlioz calls for 3 flutes, 8 tenor trombones, and strings to accompany a chorus. The “Dies Iræ” of the same mass asks for 4 small brass bands to be placed at the corners of the main instrumental group, and for 14 kettle-drums tuned to different notes. But right now, we are more focused on the direct development of the orchestra rather than specific combinations. The bass clarinet was rarely used until Adolph Sax, the well-known instrument-maker, improved its design. Meyerbeer, a great friend of Sax, included the instrument in his opera scores. He gives it a beautiful declamatory passage in “Les [Pg 210] Huguenots” (Act V.), and a melodic part in the coronation march of “Le Prophète.” However, it was Wagner who fully showcased the potential of this remarkable instrument, and through his use of it, both as a solo voice and a foundational bass in the woodwind section, he encouraged contemporary symphonic composers to use it more freely.
The brass choir has been enlarged since Beethoven’s day by the addition of the bass tuba, an instrument which came into use only after Sax had perfected its mechanism. Before that the ophicleide, a bass instrument of the keyed bugle family, was occasionally employed. Mendelssohn calls for it in the score of his “Midsummer Night’s Dream,” and Berlioz has four in the score of his “Requiem.” These parts are now played on tubas. Additional trumpets are often used to strengthen the brass, and Wagner even caused tenor tubas to be made to give certain tone-tints, together with sonority, to the funeral march of “Götterdämmerung.” All kinds of instruments of percussion are introduced when their peculiarities are desired, and, as already said, bells, gongs, triangles, and even the vulgar xylophone, find something to do in the modern orchestra.
The brass section has grown since Beethoven's time with the addition of the bass tuba, an instrument that only became common after Sax improved its design. Before that, the ophicleide, a bass instrument from the keyed bugle family, was sometimes used. Mendelssohn calls for it in the score of his “Midsummer Night’s Dream,” and Berlioz has four in the score of his “Requiem.” These parts are now played on tubas. Extra trumpets are often added to enhance the brass, and Wagner even had tenor tubas made to provide specific tonal colors and richness to the funeral march of “Götterdämmerung.” Various percussion instruments are included when their unique sounds are needed, and as mentioned earlier, bells, gongs, triangles, and even the less refined xylophone all have a role in the modern orchestra.
In the first opera, Peri’s “Eurydice,” as we have seen, the orchestra consisted of a harpsichord, a large guitar, a viol, a large lute, and [Pg 211] three flutes. Two centuries and a half later, in 1850, the overture to Wagner’s “Lohengrin” called for 3 flutes, 2 oboes, 1 English horn, 2 clarinets, 1 bass clarinet, 3 bassoons, 4 horns, 3 trumpets, 3 trombones, 1 bass tuba, kettle-drums, cymbals, and strings. In the third act of “Die Walküre” the same composer calls for 2 piccolos, 2 flutes, 3 oboes, 1 English horn, 3 clarinets, 1 bass clarinet, 3 bassoons, 8 horns, 4 trumpets, 1 bass trumpet, 4 trombones, 1 contra-bass tuba, 4 kettle-drums, cymbals and bass drum, harp and strings. How this enormous growth has been accomplished the author has endeavored to outline. The reader will perceive, however, that the fundamental arrangement of the orchestra, as left to us by Haydn and Mozart, has not been altered, but simply extended. As I have already noted, the aims of the romantic composers in the direction of tone-coloring have led to this extension. Yet by means of modern methods of instrumentation, glowing results can be obtained from the symphonic orchestra employed by Beethoven. An excellent instance of this is the “Symphonic Pathétique” of Tschaikowsky, which adds only the bass tuba to Beethoven’s orchestra. Gounod, in his “Redemption,” a richly orchestrated work, employs 2 flutes, 2 oboes, 2 clarinets, 2 [Pg 212] bassoons, 4 horns, 2 trumpets, 3 trombones, tympani, bass drum and cymbals, strings and organ in one of the most effective passages. On the other hand, Jean Louis Nicode, in the “Phosphorescent Lights” movement of his symphonic ode “The Sea”—a movement of purely descriptive and imitative music—calls for a concealed brass band consisting of 3 trumpets, 7 trombones, and a bass tuba, together with 1 piccolo, 2 flutes, 2 oboes, 2 clarinets, 2 bassoons, 4 horns, 2 tenor tubas, 1 bass tuba, 2 pairs of kettle-drums, 1 pair of cymbals, 1 triangle, 1 bass drum, 1 gong, 1 set of bells, 2 harps, and the usual strings.
In the first opera, Peri’s “Eurydice,” the orchestra was made up of a harpsichord, a large guitar, a viol, a large lute, and three flutes. Fast forward two and a half centuries to 1850, and Wagner’s “Lohengrin” overture required 3 flutes, 2 oboes, 1 English horn, 2 clarinets, 1 bass clarinet, 3 bassoons, 4 horns, 3 trumpets, 3 trombones, 1 bass tuba, kettle drums, cymbals, and strings. In the third act of “Die Walküre,” the same composer specified 2 piccolos, 2 flutes, 3 oboes, 1 English horn, 3 clarinets, 1 bass clarinet, 3 bassoons, 8 horns, 4 trumpets, 1 bass trumpet, 4 trombones, 1 contrabass tuba, 4 kettle drums, cymbals, bass drum, harp, and strings. The author has tried to outline how this significant expansion occurred. However, the reader will notice that the basic structure of the orchestra, as established by Haydn and Mozart, remains unchanged, only extended. As previously mentioned, the ambitions of romantic composers towards tone-coloring have led to this extension. Yet, with modern instrumentation techniques, brilliant results can be achieved with the symphonic orchestra used by Beethoven. A great example of this is Tschaikovsky's “Symphonic Pathétique,” which only adds the bass tuba to Beethoven’s orchestra. Gounod, in his richly orchestrated work “Redemption,” uses 2 flutes, 2 oboes, 2 clarinets, 2 bassoons, 4 horns, 2 trumpets, 3 trombones, timpani, bass drum, cymbals, strings, and organ in one of the most impactful sections. On the other hand, Jean Louis Nicode, in the “Phosphorescent Lights” movement of his symphonic ode “The Sea”—a movement of purely descriptive and imitative music—calls for a concealed brass band consisting of 3 trumpets, 7 trombones, and a bass tuba, along with 1 piccolo, 2 flutes, 2 oboes, 2 clarinets, 2 bassoons, 4 horns, 2 tenor tubas, 1 bass tuba, 2 pairs of kettle drums, 1 pair of cymbals, 1 triangle, 1 bass drum, 1 gong, 1 set of bells, 2 harps, and the usual strings.
The proportion of power and the balance of tone in the orchestra are preserved by having more stringed than wind instruments. It requires many violins and basses to balance the wood and brass in a forte passage, and, furthermore, the strings themselves lack solidity if there are only a few. As an example of a well-balanced orchestra, we may take the Boston Symphony, which is organized as follows: 16 first violins, 14 second, 10 violas, 10 violoncellos, 8 double-basses, 3 flutes, 2 oboes, 1 English horn, 3 clarinets, 3 bassoons, 4 trumpets, 4 horns, 3 trombones, 2 tenor tubas, 2 bass tubas, 1 contra-bass tuba, 2 pairs of tympani, 1 bass-drum, 1 pair of cymbals, 1 harp. The additional wind-instruments are, of course, used only in compositions [Pg 213] which call for them. An excellent example of a great festival orchestra was that conducted by Theodore Thomas at the New York Music Festival of 1882. It consisted of 50 first violins, 50 second violins, 36 violas, 36 violoncellos, 40 double-basses, 6 harps, 6 flutes, 2 piccolos, 7 oboes, 2 English horns, 6 clarinets, 2 bass clarinets, 6 bassoons, 2 contra-bassoons, 9 horns, 2 Sax horns, 11 cornets, 3 trumpets, 1 bass trumpet, 9 trombones, 3 tubas, 4 pairs of kettle-drums, 2 bass drums, 2 pairs of cymbals, 3 small drums, and 2 triangles.
The balance of power and tone in the orchestra is maintained by having more string instruments than wind instruments. It takes a lot of violins and basses to match the woodwinds and brass during a loud passage, and if there are only a few strings, they don't have enough presence. A good example of a well-balanced orchestra is the Boston Symphony, which is structured like this: 16 first violins, 14 second violins, 10 violas, 10 cellos, 8 double basses, 3 flutes, 2 oboes, 1 English horn, 3 clarinets, 3 bassoons, 4 trumpets, 4 horns, 3 trombones, 2 tenor tubas, 2 bass tubas, 1 contrabass tuba, 2 pairs of timpani, 1 bass drum, 1 pair of cymbals, and 1 harp. The extra wind instruments are only used in pieces that require them. A prime example of a large festival orchestra was the one conducted by Theodore Thomas at the New York Music Festival in 1882. It included 50 first violins, 50 second violins, 36 violas, 36 cellos, 40 double basses, 6 harps, 6 flutes, 2 piccolos, 7 oboes, 2 English horns, 6 clarinets, 2 bass clarinets, 6 bassoons, 2 contrabassoons, 9 horns, 2 sax horns, 11 cornets, 3 trumpets, 1 bass trumpet, 9 trombones, 3 tubas, 4 pairs of kettledrums, 2 bass drums, 2 pairs of cymbals, 3 small drums, and 2 triangles.
[Pg 215]
[Pg 215]
PART V
How Orchestral Music Grew
How Orchestral Music Evolved
[Pg 217]
[Pg 217]
XVI
From Bach to Haydn
A book on the orchestra might be regarded as complete without this chapter, yet it seems to the author that a few suggestions as to the nature and aims of the different kinds of orchestral music heard at concerts may not be unwelcome to the reader. It is always desirable to know what to listen for in a musical composition, because many disappointments are thus avoided. A person who hopes to hear in a Bach fugue the gorgeous masses of tone which are characteristic of a contemporaneous orchestral piece, will certainly declare Bach to be a dry and uninteresting composer. Equally he who hopes to discover in Rimsky-Korsakow’s “Scheherezade” suite the intellectual development of the Eighth Symphony, will assert that the talented Russian is no composer at all.
A book about the orchestra might seem incomplete without this chapter, but the author believes that some insights into the nature and goals of the different types of orchestral music played at concerts could be useful for the reader. It's always helpful to know what to listen for in a piece of music, as doing so can prevent many disappointments. Someone expecting to experience the rich tonal layers typical of contemporary orchestral music in a Bach fugue will likely find Bach dull and uninteresting. Similarly, a person looking for the intellectual complexity of the Eighth Symphony in Rimsky-Korsakov’s “Scheherezade” suite will likely claim that the talented Russian composer isn’t a composer at all.
The compositions of Johann Sebastian Bach (1685-1750) lie a little to one side of the direct path of orchestral development, and many of them [Pg 218] were contemporaneous with works which are in form and treatment of a more modern style. Nevertheless, Bach’s works mark the epoch from which any review of orchestral music must start. During the Middle Ages the artistic composers of music were almost wholly absorbed in writing for the Roman Catholic Church. Their compositions were for voices without accompaniment, and consisted of great Gothic structures of polyphonic music. In this kind of music every voice was at the same instant engaged in singing different parts of the same melody, the melody being so cunningly made that these different phrases, when heard together, would produce harmony. It was late in the sixteenth century that instrumental music began to develop independently, and the composers employed for it the same style as they had used in their church masses. Early instrumental music is polyphonic, and the full and final development of this style of composition is found in the fugues and concerti grossi of Bach. Handel also wrote concerti grossi, and they, too, partake of the polyphonic character.
The compositions of Johann Sebastian Bach (1685-1750) sit slightly off the main track of orchestral development, and many of them [Pg 218] were created alongside works that are more modern in both form and style. Still, Bach’s works represent the starting point for any study of orchestral music. During the Middle Ages, composers were almost entirely focused on writing for the Roman Catholic Church. Their music was for unaccompanied voices and consisted of large, Gothic polyphonic structures. In this type of music, each voice sang different parts of the same melody at the same time, crafted in such a way that the various phrases produced harmony when heard together. It wasn't until the late sixteenth century that instrumental music began to evolve independently, with composers applying the same style they had used for their church masses. Early instrumental music is polyphonic, and the full and ultimate expression of this compositional style is found in Bach’s fugues and concerti grossi. Handel also composed concerti grossi that share this polyphonic quality.
The essential trait of this kind of music is the interweaving of the various melodic voice-parts and the effects obtained by their working against one another. Polyphonic writing is the most profound and serious style of composition, and it is also that which best endures the [Pg 219] test of time. Modern composers have fully realized that fact and have introduced a new polyphony into their works. It is what is called free counterpoint, by which is meant the working together of several voices which do not sing different parts of the same melody at the same time, but only at points suitable to the composer’s purpose, while at other points new melodic ideas may be introduced. But in the early polyphonic music the listener will hear chiefly the interweaving of voice-parts of the same melody, and he will miss all the beauty and intellectual finish of these works if he seeks simply for the sensuous sweetness of instrumental tints. Usually the orchestral color is distinguished by sobriety, and the profoundly thoughtful nature of contrapuntal music causes a general austerity of instrumental diction. I have already mentioned the historical fact that orchestral tone-coloring began with Mozart. But this was necessarily the case, for the early contrapuntal writers were too wholly absorbed in the development of form to study the resources of color. The operatic writers were the first to seek for color-effects, just as they were the first to use abrupt changes of rhythm and startling dissonances in their search after dramatic expression. [Pg 220]
The key feature of this type of music is the blending of various melodic voices and the effects created by them interacting with each other. Polyphonic writing is the most profound and serious style of composition, and it also stands the test of time the best. Modern composers have recognized this and have introduced a new type of polyphony into their works. This is known as free counterpoint, meaning that several voices work together without singing different parts of the same melody simultaneously, but rather at points that suit the composer’s intention, while at other moments, new melodic ideas can be introduced. However, in early polyphonic music, the listener primarily hears the blending of voice parts of the same melody, and will miss all the beauty and intellectual finesse of these works if they only look for the pleasing sweetness of instrumental colors. Typically, orchestral color is characterized by restraint, and the deeply thoughtful nature of contrapuntal music leads to a general seriousness in instrumental expression. I have already pointed out the historical fact that orchestral tone-coloring began with Mozart. This was inevitable, as early contrapuntal composers were too focused on developing form to explore the resources of color. The operatic composers were the first to pursue color effects, just like they were the first to use sudden changes in rhythm and striking dissonances in their quest for dramatic expression.
The working out of formal perfection filled the early classic as well as the late polyphonic period, but the form was different. With the birth of opera there entered into modern music a new power, that of the vocal solo with subordinate accompaniment; and composers at once sought for a new form in which they could cast their melodic ideas so that they would be interesting and artistic when sung by one voice instead of several. The development of these monophonic forms occupied the early classical composers. They obtained their most pregnant suggestion from the operatic aria da capo. In this kind of song there are three sections, the first and third being the same melody, and the middle one being different and contrasting. This form suggested to instrumental composers the cycle, which lies at the foundation of most instrumental compositions of the classic period. The classic overture, for example, consisted of three movements (without breaks), slow, fast, and slow, or fast, slow, and fast. And it was customary to repeat in the last one the principal melodic idea of the first. The first movement of a symphony or a piano sonata (for a symphony is a sonata for orchestra) is built on a similar plan. Certain melodic ideas, called themes or subjects, are set forth in the first section. Then follows a middle section called the free fantasia or “working-out,” and [Pg 221] in this the melodic subject-matter is literally worked out. It is submitted to various processes of musical development, such as changes of harmony, changes of rhythm, different instrumental treatments, polyphonic expression, etc., till there is nothing more to say, and then the third section restates the original matter in its first shape and adds a coda (tail-piece), by which the movement is brought to a conclusion. The development of this form was aided by the instrumental suite, a form which consisted of series of dances of different kinds. These suites helped the symphonic composers to perceive the value of alternating different sorts of movements, so that symphonies began with an allegro, constructed on the cyclical pattern just described, and continued with an adagio, a minuet, and a finale.
The pursuit of formal perfection characterized both the early classical and late polyphonic periods, although the style was different. With the emergence of opera, a new force entered modern music: the vocal solo accompanied by other instruments. Composers immediately looked for a new structure that could showcase their melodic ideas in a way that would be captivating and artistic when sung by a single voice instead of multiple voices. Early classical composers focused on developing these monophonic forms. They drew significant inspiration from the operatic aria da capo. This type of song consists of three sections, where the first and third share the same melody, while the middle section is different and provides contrast. This structure inspired instrumental composers to create cycles, which form the basis of most instrumental works from the classical period. For example, the classic overture typically comprised three uninterrupted movements: slow, fast, and slow, or fast, slow, and fast, often repeating the main melodic idea from the first movement in the last one. The first movement of a symphony or a piano sonata (since a symphony is essentially a sonata for orchestra) follows a similar blueprint. The first section introduces certain melodic ideas, known as themes or subjects. This is followed by a middle section referred to as the free fantasia or “working-out,” where the melodic ideas undergo various forms of musical development, including changes in harmony, rhythm, and different instrumental treatments, alongside polyphonic expressions, until there’s nothing more to add. The third section then restates the original material in its initial form and includes a coda (tail-piece) that wraps up the movement. The evolution of this structure was further influenced by the instrumental suite, which consisted of a series of different dances. These suites helped symphonic composers recognize the value of varying movement types, leading to symphonies that began with an allegro based on the cyclical structure described earlier, followed by an adagio, a minuet, and a finale.
The development of this form occupied the attention of instrumental composers from, say the publication of Corelli’s first sonata (so-called), in 1685, till the close of the seventeenth century. By that time it was fully developed, and was ready for such modifications as might be suggested by the entrance of a new purpose into the field of instrumental composition. The symphonies of Haydn and Mozart and the [Pg 222] first two of Beethoven belong to this period of the development of the symphonic form, which is also known as the Classic Period.
The development of this musical form caught the attention of instrumental composers from the time Corelli published his first sonata in 1685 until the end of the seventeenth century. By then, it was fully developed and set for adaptations based on new purposes in instrumental composition. The symphonies of Haydn and Mozart, along with the first two by Beethoven, are part of this time in the evolution of the symphonic form, which is also referred to as the Classic Period. [Pg 222]
The lover of music who desires to listen with intelligence and to bring the faculty of judgment to the guidance of his fancy, should study the history of music, because from an acquaintance with that subject he will acquire a correct point of view. It is impossible in the limits of two short chapters in a volume of this size to do more than indicate in the most general manner the salient points in the development of orchestral music. Therefore, I must content myself with inviting the reader to note that these two early periods of musical history, the Polyphonic and the Classic, were occupied chiefly with the labors of composers engaged in the establishment of methods. Two general classes of forms, the polyphonic and the monophonic, were developed, and the manner of elaborating musical ideas and of instrumental technic suitable to each was fairly established. But it cannot be said that the early classic composers advanced beyond the exclusively musical limits of their art. The music-lover will look in vain for the note of profound human emotion in the symphonies of Haydn and Mozart.
The music enthusiast who wants to listen thoughtfully and apply their judgment to their enjoyment should study music history, as it will give them a better perspective. In just two short chapters of a book this size, it's impossible to cover more than the most general highlights of orchestral music's development. Therefore, I can only invite the reader to pay attention to the fact that these two early periods of music history, the Polyphonic and the Classic, were mainly focused on the efforts of composers who were establishing methods. Two main types of forms, polyphonic and monophonic, were developed, and the ways of developing musical ideas and suitable instrumental techniques for each were fairly established. However, the early classic composers didn't really push beyond the purely musical boundaries of their art. The music lover will find little trace of deep human emotion in the symphonies of Haydn and Mozart.
The dramatic power of unsupported instrumental music had not yet been [Pg 223] felt by composers, because they were engaged, not in studying the capacity of their art for the symbolism of ideas extraneous to itself, but in exploring its purely æsthetic resources. Music was still to them an end, not a means. They sought only for beauty, and they aimed at producing it by the employment of the technical details of forms and idioms peculiar to their own art. While the polyphonic writers had utilized the interweaving of different parts of the same melody, the classic composers exercised their taste, ingenuity, and feeling in developing melodic subjects in a vocal solo style, with a support of harmonies built on chords, of which the melody was an inseparable part. Their orchestral method differed from that of the polyphonic school because their manner of composing compelled a change. Bach’s way of using every instrument as a solo voice was no longer available. The melodic subjects of a symphony must always predominate. Now they flow to us from the strings, now from the wood, again from the brass; but always with chord harmonies. Hence, we find the classic composers using wind-instruments in pairs and making different combinations of the various groups of instruments, so that simultaneously with the process of thematic development and working-out (which is the drawing of the [Pg 224] symphonic tone-picture), there is a constant change of the color-scheme, and thus the melodic and harmonic details are heightened by a judicious use of the tonal qualities of the voices which sing them to us. The skill of composers in using these tonal qualities and the technical expertness of orchestral players grew so fast that in the course of time, as we shall see, they came to a position of undue prominence in orchestral music; but this state of affairs was largely hastened by the employment of vivid color-effects by the romanticists in their endeavors to obtain dramatic utterance from the orchestra.
The dramatic impact of instrumental music without support had not yet been recognized by composers, as they were focused, not on examining how their art could symbolize ideas beyond itself, but on exploring its purely aesthetic qualities. To them, music was still an end in itself, not a means to an end. They sought beauty and aimed to create it using the technical aspects of forms and styles unique to their art. While polyphonic composers had woven together different parts of the same melody, classical composers showcased their taste, creativity, and emotion by developing melodic themes in a solo vocal style, supported by harmonies built on chords that were inseparable from the melody. Their orchestral methods differed from those of the polyphonic school, necessitating a change in their compositional approach. Bach's technique of using each instrument as a solo voice was no longer applicable. In a symphony, melodic themes must always take precedence. These themes might come from the strings, woodwinds, or brass, but they are always accompanied by chord harmonies. Thus, we see classical composers using wind instruments in pairs and creating various combinations of instrument groups, allowing for simultaneous thematic development and a constantly shifting color scheme. As a result, the melodic and harmonic details are enhanced by skillful use of the tonal qualities of the instruments that present them. The composers' ability to utilize these tonal qualities and the technical skill of orchestral players developed so quickly that, over time, they became overly prominent in orchestral music. This shift was accelerated by the romanticists' use of vivid color effects in their pursuit of dramatic expression through the orchestra.
The music-lover who listens to orchestral music of the classic period must not expect anything but a clear and perspicuous presentation of music for its own sake. Sunny transparency is the chief characteristic of the instrumentation of Haydn and Mozart, while the technical construction of their works makes it incumbent upon the listener to follow the purely musical working-out of the subjects announced. The instrumental color-scheme is neither wide nor brilliant, but it is as admirably adapted to the subject-matter as the subdued greens of Corot are to his peaceful bucolic scenes. To appreciate thoroughly the works of Haydn and Mozart a music-lover should have the fundamental [Pg 225] principles of musical form at his fingers’ ends, and he should know the voices of the instruments. The rest is child’s play. The knowledge of musical form is indispensable to the right enjoyment of all music, but it is peculiarly necessary in these classic works, in which pure beauty of form was the ultimate object.
The music lover who enjoys orchestral music from the classical period should expect nothing more than a clear and straightforward presentation of music for its own sake. Bright transparency is the main feature of the instrumentation in Haydn and Mozart, while the technical structure of their compositions requires the listener to follow the purely musical development of the themes presented. The instrumental color palette isn't very broad or flashy, but it's perfectly suited to the material, much like the muted greens of Corot enhance his peaceful rural scenes. To fully appreciate the works of Haydn and Mozart, a music lover should have a solid grasp of the basic principles of musical form and be familiar with the sounds of the instruments. The rest is easy. Understanding musical form is essential for truly enjoying all music, but it’s especially important in these classical works, where pure beauty of form was the ultimate goal.
[Pg 226]
[Pg 226]
XVII
From Beethoven to Richard Strauss
Of the early classic writers only Haydn and Mozart have survived the test of time, and neither of them figures frequently in contemporaneous concert programmes. This is a pity, for their music would often serve as a corrective to a taste which is inclined to clamor ceaselessly for “ginger hot i’ the mouth.” But it is beyond dispute that the romantic composers awaken more sympathetic chords in the modern bosom. Beethoven is the connecting link between the classic and romantic schools.
Of the early classical composers, only Haydn and Mozart have stood the test of time, and neither is often seen in today’s concert programs. This is unfortunate because their music could frequently help balance a taste that endlessly demands “spicy excitement.” However, it’s undeniable that the romantic composers resonate more with modern audiences. Beethoven serves as the bridge between the classical and romantic styles.
His First and Second Symphonies belong to the former; the rest to the latter. The modern romantic school of music sprang from Beethoven’s “Eroica” symphony, his opera “Fidelio,” Schubert’s marvellous songs, and Weber’s “Der Freischütz.” In so far as purely orchestral music is concerned, however, Beethoven was the master of them all. It was he who [Pg 227] first showed musicians how to project emotion through the orchestral melos. If Mendelssohn’s fanciful little piano pieces are songs without words, then Beethoven’s Third, Fifth, Sixth and Seventh symphonies are dramas without text.
His First and Second Symphonies are part of the first category; the others belong to the second. The modern romantic music movement originated from Beethoven’s “Eroica” Symphony, his opera “Fidelio,” Schubert’s amazing songs, and Weber’s “Der Freischütz.” When it comes to purely orchestral music, Beethoven was the greatest of them all. He was the one who first showed musicians how to express emotion through orchestral melodies. If Mendelssohn’s whimsical little piano pieces are instrumental songs, then Beethoven’s Third, Fifth, Sixth, and Seventh symphonies are dramas without dialogue.
In form and technical method these works follow the general plan of the classic symphonies of Haydn and Mozart. Indeed, the C minor symphony of Beethoven is the finest and most fully developed specimen of that form. But Beethoven made certain changes which came from the nature of his search after emotional expression. He modulated into foreign keys with greater freedom than his predecessors, and he made wider gaps between the keys of his successive movements. A complex and changeful harmonic basis has always been associated with emotional expression in music. Simple harmonies are restful, peaceful, and suggestive of serenity of the soul; frequent modulations and unfinished cadences express uneasiness of mind—largely because they create it.
In terms of form and technique, these works adhere to the general structure of classic symphonies by Haydn and Mozart. In fact, Beethoven's C minor symphony is the most outstanding and fully developed example of that style. However, Beethoven made some changes that reflected his pursuit of emotional expression. He transitioned between keys with more freedom than his predecessors and created wider gaps between the keys of his successive movements. A complex and variable harmonic foundation has always been linked to emotional expression in music. Simple harmonies are calming, peaceful, and evoke a sense of tranquility; frequent key changes and unfinished endings convey a sense of restlessness—largely because they create that feeling.
In addition to this advance, Beethoven also found it possible to knit the melodic structure of his works much more firmly. He introduced his second subjects, for instance, by means of transitional passages made [Pg 228] out of some of the materials of his first subjects. His working-out processes were infinitely broader and grander than those of his predecessors, and they invariably led to strenuous and stimulating climaxes, not found in the earlier symphonies. Beethoven substituted for the old minuet movement the scherzo, which resembles the minuet in form, but differs wholly from it in spirit. The word scherzo means “jest,” and the movement was at first intended to be humorous or playful; but Beethoven sometimes gave it the grim mystery of tragic suspense, as in the Fifth Symphony.
In addition to this progress, Beethoven also managed to strengthen the melodic structure of his works. He introduced his second themes, for example, through transitional passages made from some of the materials of his first themes. His development processes were much broader and more grand than those of his predecessors, and they consistently led to intense and exciting climaxes that weren’t found in earlier symphonies. Beethoven replaced the old minuet movement with the scherzo, which has a similar structure to the minuet but differs completely in character. The term scherzo means “joke,” and the movement was initially meant to be humorous or playful; however, Beethoven sometimes infused it with a dark mystery of tragic suspense, as in the Fifth Symphony.
Beethoven’s manner of instrumentation has already been discussed to some extent. It is necessary only to add that it shows a profounder insight into the special character of each instrument than that of any writer who preceded him. This was the result of the composer’s search after influential emotional expression, and of his complete dependence for it upon his instruments. The advances of Beethoven in the treatment of orchestral forms led the romantic composers to perceive that they could make still larger changes without infringing the fundamental laws upon which the artistic development of musical ideas proceeded.
Beethoven's approach to instrumentation has already been talked about to some degree. It’s important to note that he had a much deeper understanding of the unique qualities of each instrument than any writer before him. This came from the composer’s quest for powerful emotional expression and his total reliance on his instruments for that. Beethoven's progress in handling orchestral forms made the romantic composers realize they could implement even bigger changes without violating the basic principles that guide the artistic development of musical ideas.
Robert Schumann’s symphonies are notable examples of the methods [Pg 229] adopted by the romantic writers. His symphony in D minor is intended to be played without any pauses between the consecutive movements, and melodic material introduced in one movement is employed in the development of another. Thus the principal theme of the first movement recurs in a significantly modified form in the last, and an idea heard in the introduction is repeated with much meaning in the scherzo.
Robert Schumann's symphonies are great examples of the techniques used by romantic writers. His symphony in D minor is meant to be played without any pauses between the consecutive movements, and melodies introduced in one movement are used in the development of another. For instance, the main theme of the first movement reappears in a notably changed form in the last movement, and an idea heard in the introduction is revisited with greater significance in the scherzo. [Pg 229]
These innovations were the direct result of attempts to give to music a more definite emotional force, and they were brought about by Beethoven’s convincing demonstration of the dramatic expressiveness of orchestral music. The highly wrought overtures of Weber, as well as those of Beethoven, had an additional value in showing later composers how to utilize the suggestive power of a title in combination with characteristic methods of instrumental utterance. Haydn, in his “Creation,” had invented some of the now conventional figures of orchestral utterance, such as the rolling of waves and the raging of storms. Beethoven’s storm in the “Pastoral” symphony went farther, and, mild as it sounds now, was a remarkable achievement in its day. Spohr began to write symphonies with descriptive titles such as the “Leonore” [Pg 230] (founded on a poem by Burger) and “The Power of Sound.” Mendelssohn wrote descriptive overtures such as “Fingal’s Cave,” and in his “Midsummer Night’s Dream” music suggested how far the purely illustrative powers of orchestral song might go.
These innovations came about because people wanted to give music a stronger emotional impact, largely influenced by Beethoven's powerful examples of how expressive orchestral music could be. The intricate overtures of Weber, as well as those of Beethoven, also helped later composers understand how to combine the evocative nature of a title with distinctive ways of playing instruments. Haydn, in his “Creation,” created some of the now-standard techniques in orchestral music, like depicting the rolling of waves and the fury of storms. Beethoven's storm in the “Pastoral” symphony took this further and, though it may sound mild now, was quite groundbreaking for its time. Spohr started composing symphonies with descriptive titles like “Leonore” (inspired by a poem by Burger) and “The Power of Sound.” Mendelssohn crafted descriptive overtures such as “Fingal’s Cave,” and in his “Midsummer Night’s Dream,” his music explored just how far the purely illustrative capabilities of orchestral music could reach.
It required very little experimenting in this kind of composition to show musicians that the prescribed forms of the classic symphony and overture were unsuited to it. It was quite impossible to embody in music, developed strictly on lines designed for the exploitation of pure musical beauty, a series of emotions which moved according to wholly different laws. The famous pianist, Franz Liszt, to meet the requirements of the new school, invented the symphonic poem, a composition symphonic in style, but smaller in extent and without any pause between the movements. These are welded together by connecting matter which causes the passage from one to the other to be barely perceptible. The movements themselves are distributed wholly according to the sequence of the principal emotional moods of the story which is to be illustrated. The fundamental laws of musical form are, of course, observed; but conventional formulæ are not followed. [Pg 231]
It didn’t take much experimentation in this type of composition to show musicians that the traditional forms of the classical symphony and overture didn't really fit. It was nearly impossible to express a range of emotions in music that was developed solely around principles meant to showcase pure musical beauty, especially since those emotions followed completely different rules. The well-known pianist, Franz Liszt, to satisfy the needs of the new style, created the symphonic poem, which is symphonic in nature but shorter and has no breaks between movements. These sections are seamlessly connected, making the transition from one to another hardly noticeable. The movements themselves follow the sequence of the main emotional themes of the story being represented. While the basic laws of musical form are still respected, traditional formulas are not adhered to. [Pg 231]
Liszt employed all the symphonic devices of thematic development in his symphonic poems, and his immediate imitators followed his example. But many later composers have abandoned almost the whole symphonic scheme, so that the works of the first masters of the romantic school belong to a period of transition between the late classicists and the ultra-romanticists of our time.
Liszt used all the orchestral techniques of theme development in his symphonic poems, and his direct followers emulated him. However, many later composers have largely moved away from traditional orchestral structures, making the works of the early masters of the romantic era a bridge between the late classical composers and the ultra-romantic composers of today.
The reader must not understand me as intending to say that the form of the classic symphony has been universally abandoned. On the contrary, one of the most agreeable of living composers, Antonin Dvořák, clings to it, and there are many others who still find that they can say all they wish to say through the medium used by Beethoven. Brahms was the finest recent exponent of the classic symphony. But there is undoubtedly a growing tendency among composers to make their orchestral works vast color-pictures. The themes in these works are subjected to little or no real musical development, but are brought forward again and again in new instrumental garbs, and instead of reaching climaxes by devices of melodic evolution, the composers aim at producing dramatic effects by imposing or vivid instrumental coloring.
The reader shouldn't think that I mean the classic symphony form has been completely abandoned. On the contrary, one of the most delightful composers today, Antonin Dvořák, still holds onto it, and there are many others who still feel they can express everything they want through the style used by Beethoven. Brahms was the greatest modern example of the classic symphony. However, there is definitely a growing trend among composers to create their orchestral works as expansive color-pictures. The themes in these pieces often undergo little to no real musical development, but are reintroduced repeatedly in different instrumental forms, and instead of building climaxes through melodic evolution, the composers tend to focus on producing dramatic effects through striking instrumental colors.
At the same time these composers employ a most complex polyphony, for [Pg 232] their scores teem with melodic utterance in all the principal voices. Richard Strauss, of Munich, is the leading writer of this school of orchestral colorists. His works show supreme mastery of the technics of orchestration, the most intimate acquaintance with the special characteristics of the various instruments, and a really remarkable knowledge of the results to be gained by the mixture of tone-tints. It is the opinion of the present writer that Strauss seeks to express in music things which cannot, and some which ought not, to be so expressed; but that is a matter which need not be discussed here. It is undeniable that in form and treatment this composer’s works are in the direct line of the general tendency of orchestral music in our day, and it is equally undeniable that his mastery of the technics of the present style of writing is greater than that of any other composer.
At the same time, these composers use an incredibly complex polyphony, as their scores are filled with melodic expression in all the main voices. Richard Strauss from Munich is the top composer in this group of orchestral colorists. His works demonstrate an exceptional skill in orchestration, a deep understanding of the unique characteristics of various instruments, and an impressive knowledge of the effects achieved through blending tone colors. In my opinion, Strauss tries to express in music ideas that cannot—and some that shouldn't—be expressed this way; however, that’s a discussion for another time. It’s clear that in terms of form and treatment, his works align with the current trends in orchestral music, and it’s also clear that his command of contemporary writing techniques surpasses that of any other composer.
I have endeavored in this brief survey of orchestral music to show the reader how it began with the most rigid and logical forms, in which the laws of thematic evolution were applied with the intent to attain purely musical beauty; and how, as the technics of instrumentation became better understood, the employment of instrumental coloring led [Pg 233] composers away from rigorous thematic development toward a species of composition in which dramatic effects were obtained by a more free method of construction and a larger use of color-effects.
I have tried in this brief look at orchestral music to show the reader how it started with strict and logical forms, where the rules of theme development were used to achieve purely musical beauty; and how, as the techniques of instrumentation became better understood, the use of instrumental color led composers away from strict theme development toward a kind of composition where dramatic effects were created through a more flexible approach and a greater use of color effects. [Pg 233]
From this we appear at present to be passing into a period in which these color-effects alone are to be called upon as the means of orchestral expression.
From this, it seems that we are currently entering a phase where these color effects alone will be used as the means of orchestral expression.
It is quite impossible for us who are contemporaneous with this new school to decide as to its value. It is enough for us to recognize its tendencies and watch their evolution. What I have attempted to do in this chapter is to point out briefly to the reader the salient traits of the orchestral music of the different periods, to the end that in listening he might endeavor to find his enjoyment where the composer intended that he should find it, and not be disappointed from an unwise attempt to find it somewhere else. The observant music-lover will find, I think, that the development of orchestration has been perfectly normal, and that the instrumentation of each period is perfectly fitted to its music. A symphony of Mozart orchestrated in the Richard Strauss style would be a tinted Venus; while a tone poem of Strauss scored à la Mozart would be like one of Cropsey’s autumn landscapes reduced to the dead level of a pen-and-ink drawing. It is largely because of this [Pg 234] organic union between music and its orchestral garb that the amateur ought to strive to understand the nature and purpose of orchestration. The addition to his enjoyment of all orchestral music will be far more than sufficient to pay for the labor of the study.
It's nearly impossible for us living in this era to judge the value of this new musical style. All we can do is recognize its trends and observe how they develop. In this chapter, I aim to briefly highlight the key features of orchestral music from different periods so that, while listening, the reader can find enjoyment where the composer intended and not be let down by trying to find it elsewhere. A discerning music lover will notice, I believe, that the evolution of orchestration has been quite natural, and the instrumentation of each period perfectly suits its music. A Mozart symphony arranged in the style of Richard Strauss would be like a colored version of Venus, while a Strauss tone poem scored like Mozart would resemble one of Cropsey’s autumn landscapes turned into a plain pen-and-ink drawing. It's mainly because of this organic connection between music and its orchestral forms that enthusiasts should strive to understand the nature and purpose of orchestration. The increase in enjoyment of all orchestral music will more than compensate for the effort involved in studying it. [Pg 234]
INDEX
- Abbreviations in scores, 47
- Aria da capo, suggestion to orchestral composers, 220
- Bach’s orchestra, 195
- Balance of tone, 65;
- how obtained, 115
- Bass clarinet, compass and character, 28;
- introduction of, 209
- Bass drum, 111
- Bassoon, compass and character, 24
- Baton, use of, 148 et seq.;
- need of, 154
- “Battery,” 108 et seq.
- Beethoven’s symphonies, 226 et seq.
- Bells, 111
- Berlioz, 67, 68;
- his orchestra, 208
- Boston Symphony Orchestra, 50, 212
- Bowing, 9;
- marks for, 138
- Brass, 4;
- methods of using, 97 et seq.;
- Bach’s and Handel’s plans, 98;
- Haydn’s, 99;
- Mozart’s, 100;
- employed unsupported, 105;
- Wagner learns from Gluck and Mozart, 107
- Carillon, 112
- Castanets, 111
- Clarinet, compass and character, 26;
- how to read its music, 52;
- methods of using, 86 et seq.
- Classic music, character of, 222
- Classicists, modern, 231
- Clefs, 55 et seq.
- Colorists, 231
- Conductor, development of, 147 et seq.;
- interpreting, 156;
- Wagner’s influence on, 161;
- functions of, 164;
- in detail, 167;
- choice of tempo, 169;
- work besides choice of tempo, 174
- Conductors, famous, 158 et seq.
- Contra-bass clarinet, 96
- Contra-bassoon, 95
- Contrast, 65;
- how obtained, 119
- Cornet, 23
- Cyclic forms, 220
- Cymbals, 111
- Directions, composers’, to be obeyed, 139
- Double bass, compass and character, 17
- Drum, bass, 111;
- snare, 111
- English Horn, compass and character, 23
- Flexibility in orchestral playing, 134
- Flute, compass and character, 19;
- uses of, 81 et seq.;
- introduction of, 190
- Forms, development of musical, 220;
- Beethoven’s innovations, 227;
- Schumann’s, 228
- Glissando, 41
- Gong, 111
- Gossec, developer of orchestral technics, 158
- Habeneck, interpreting conductor, 160
- Handel’s orchestra, 196
- Harmonics, 7, 8
- Harmony, dispersal of, 64
- Harp, 39;
- pedals, 40;
- methods of using, 39 et seq.
- Harpsichord, used in conducting, 149 et seq.;
- method of use, 150;
- used in symphonic conducting, 155
- Haydn’s orchestra, 200
- Horn, compass and character, 30;
- how to read its music, 54;
- methods of using, 97 et seq.;
- stopped tones, 100;
- valves, 100;
- Rossini’s horn style, 100;
- in “Eroica” symphony, 101;
- four horns, how used, 101, 102
- Horn, English, 23;
- introduction into orchestra, 208
- Instrumentation, models, 68
- Instruments, list of, in orchestra, 4;
- names in four languages, 46
- Leader of orchestra, 154
- Legno, col, 10
- Legrenzi’s orchestra, 192
- Liszt, inventor of symphonic poem, 230
- Lully’s orchestra, 192
- Mendelssohn, model for string writing, 76
- Metronome, 172
- Meyerbeer, 39, 40, 41
- Middle voices, 135
- Monteverde, Claudio, founder of modern orchestra, 186
- Mozart, tone-coloring, and string plan, 75, 76;
- his orchestra, 204
- Music, orchestral, development of, 217 et seq.;
- polyphonic, 218;
- classic, 220;
- character of, 222 et seq.;
- what to expect in classic, 224;
- Beethoven’s, 226 et seq.;
- romantic, 228
- Nicode, divided strings in “Das Meer,” 77
- Oboe, compass and character, 20;
- uses of, 81 et seq.
- Ophicleide, 210
- Orchestra, defined, 3;
- Beethoven’s, 4, 206;
- instruments in, 4;
- how used, 61;
- compass, 61;
- dynamic range, 62;
- constitution of, 142;
- development of, 181 et seq.;
- in Middle Ages, 183;
- Peri’s and Cavaliere’s, 185, 186;
- Monteverde’s, 186;
- Scarlatti’s, 190;
- Lully’s, 192;
- Legrenzi’s, 192;
- Bach’s, 195;
- Handel’s, 196;
- in early part of eighteenth century, 193, 198;
- Gossec’s, 200;
- Haydn’s, 200;
- Dresden court orchestra, 203;
- Mozart’s, 204;
- Berlioz’s, 208;
- Wagner’s, 210, 211;
- Boston Symphony’s number, 212;
- festival, 213
- Orchestral music, development of, 217 et seq.
- Orchestras, famous, 140 et seq., 202
- Orchestration, general principles of, 61;
- requirements of, 63;
- models in, 67, 68;
- Bach’s polyphonic, 82;
- qualities of good, 113 et seq.;
- pianists’ mistakes, 115;
- Bach’s, 120;
- effect of clarinet in, 120;
- Handel’s, 121;
- romantic, 122;
- innovations of Monteverde, 188;
- Corelli’s contributions to, 193
- Overture, classic form, 200
- Percussive instruments, parts for, 112
- Performance, qualities of orchestral, 124 et seq.;
- requisites of, 125
- Phrasing, 137
- Piccolo, 95
- Precision, 131, 132
- Quality of tone, 125
- Quartette, string, establishment of, 189, 190
- Romantic music, 228 et seq.
- Saltato, 10
- Score, described, 43 et seq.;
- abbreviations in, 47
- Seating plan of orchestra, 49, 50, 203
- Shading in orchestral playing, 134 et seq.
- Solidity, 64, 114;
- how obtained, 115;
- in performance, 126
- Sonata, development of, 220
- Sordines, 10
- Stamitz, developer of orchestral technics, 158
- Strauss, R., leader of orchestral colorists, 232
- Strings, 5;
- methods of using, 66 et seq.;
- test of methods, 72;
- Beethoven’s plan, 72, 76;
- innovations in use of, by romanticists, 72;
- effects of different registers, 73;
- Haydn’s plan, 75;
- Mozart’s plan, 76;
- Mendelssohn’s plan, 76;
- introduction of various effects, 80;
- proper proportion of, 127
- Symphonic poem, 230
- Symphony, form and development, 220 et seq.
- Tambourine, 111
- Tempo, importance of, 169 et seq.
- Tone, balance of, 65, 126;
- how obtained, 115;
- qualities of, in orchestral performance, 125 et seq.;
- necessity of fine, 130
- Transposing instruments, 51 et seq.
- Tremolo, 9;
- invention of, 188
- Trombone, kinds, compass and character, 34;
- how used, 102;
- introduction in symphony, 103;
- Berlioz’s use of, 106;
- Mozart’s and Gluck’s use of, 107
- Trumpet, compass and character, 32;
- how to read its music, 54;
- methods of using, 98 et seq.
- Tuba, kinds and character, 35;
- how used, 103;
- introduction of, 210
- Tympani, compass and character, 37;
- how used, 108;
- Beethoven’s innovations in use of, 109
- Unanimity, 131, 132, 133
- Variety, 65;
- how obtained, 119
- Viola, compass and character of, 13 et seq.;
- how used, 67 et seq.
- Violin, compass, bowing, etc., 6 et seq.;
- entrance into orchestra, 187
- Violins, first and second, 5;
- second, 11
- Violoncello, compass and character, 16;
- how used, 71
- Wagner’s orchestra, 210
- Wood-wind, enumerated, 4;
- in detail, 19;
- methods of using, 81 et seq.;
- Bach’s plan, 82;
- Handel’s, 84;
- Haydn’s, 85;
- Mozart’s, 87;
- Beethoven’s, 88;
- Brahms’s, 89;
- Beethoven’s innovations, 90;
- Wagner’s, 91
- Xylophone, 112
Transcriber’s Notes:
Transcriber's Notes:
Antiquated words were preserved.
Outdated words were preserved.
The illustrations and music scores have been moved so that they do not break up paragraphs and so that they are next to the text they illustrate.
The illustrations and music scores have been relocated so they don’t interrupt paragraphs and are positioned next to the text they depict.
Typographical and punctuation errors have been silently corrected.
Typographical and punctuation errors have been quietly fixed.
Download ePUB
If you like this ebook, consider a donation!